Home

WinSpec User's Manual

1. 5 fe 1l FECI pt pei RE LAT jur p EST 1 fred feed geen p l PST pel 664 668 672 688 704 1488 1492 1496 1500 2 INTEGER 3 UNSIGNED INTEGER calibration nanometer set to 1 if background sub done min of strips per skips of min blocks before geo skps calibration coefficients ADC rate ADC type ADC resolution ADC bit adjust gain experiment remarks geometric operations rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 Intensity display string cleans number of skips per clean calibration file name CSMA background file name number of source comp diodes y dimension of raw data 0 scrambled 1 unscrambled long exposure in milliseconds used if exposure set to 1 long num of scans used if noscan set to 1 long num of accumulations used if avgexp set to 1 stripe file st130 version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 1 newl20 Type IT 2 old120 Type I 3 ST130 4 ST121 5 ST138 6 DC131 PentaMAX 7 ST133 MicroMAX SpectroMax 8 ST135 GPIB 9 VICCD 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 Set to 1 if flat field was applied reserved Kinetics Trigger Mode EMPTY BLOCK FOR EXPANSION Vert Clock Speed in micro sec
2. 108 Custom Chip entere heec 43 215 272 WinSpec 32 Manual Custom filter procedure sees 174 Custom Timing seen 43 216 Custom Toolbar adding a bu ttori isie e mes 212 customization of sese 211 display aiti ERR REP REFER URS 211 removing a button seen 212 SeLUDES eode esee ree ER eSI rb S 211 Custom Toolbar dialog box Add irap Rd RUPES 212 Available Buttons esee 212 ClOSe zeit e greet e nities 212 Help y nere puer 212 Move Down oett e aereo 213 Movye Upz iem iie Re eem 213 REMOVE E 212 Resets esu irte net Hp eee ivt DER LE Ue Pen 212 Toolbar Buttons eene 212 Customer support 270 D Dark charge eene 152 Data collection Initial PentaMAX cetero RII HERRERA 73 S13133 isses meu ne e Een 72 Data correction techniques esessss 151 Data display types eene 101 Data displayed as 3D graph 103 Data displayed as graph 596 9596 display range sess 105 brightness contrast control se 118 context window sees 112 CUISOE ene heibu NIE NG MT 108 Cursor CUVE sete eee ed 110 cursor functions esee 108 displaying one Strip eee ee seen 108 hidden surfaces eene 111 Information box eene 107 Marker Curve iret
3. eese 169 Sharpening F bctions ne ree et e e ub eed eee dee ope Pepe edite 170 Parameters tab pages 2 itte eite ee bee bte ied it 170 Sharpening Procedure 1 rer Ter teet tee iere petet renh 170 Smoothing PUunctiolis 10 2 pe oo opi e ect t ge e op et i eoe e eget im booa 171 Parameters tab pages eode eps eet eee I E Ee ETUR Ope ai ER oss 171 Smoothing Procedure 22e b ete ee Hn Hte e Ege i eed cete to tla 171 Morphological PunctiOnS co erede preteen te eee e Reo cde eee ota op ise teret 172 Parameters tab page em eei ei o e attt eet eoe tige coe sacs 172 Morphological Procedure eene nnne 173 Custom LEIlter i ett eee et tert t Ue i be ed epe ee e beet at 174 Filter Matrix tab page 2 ree Dre etes oae De rte getestet 174 Custom Filter Procedure 2 2 me tette ep peel bete pe tt Eee 174 BOOK Up Maley e reae eee eara ret ER epe de 175 Look Up Tabl tab page unte iet aee ete E pee ped ettet 175 Look Up Fable Procedure eren ete et reete tete pietre 175 Look Up Fable Fortmats ni tie Het e pe le eo tete Eee ETE 176 References tenerte e pte t tutu E A tt t E e 177 Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 179 icone DEED 179 Input tab page s icon ee e a eee elie 179 Output tab pases ite eee Heute ree se de blew acess ian 179 Threshold and Clipping eii nod ee eie ates 180 Procedure etd cows ie siete SES sect ites eee Hte teret tts Feast
4. Filter Size 5 5 lI ilter Sum 7 5 A mask is an n x n matrix nis 5 7 9 or Figure 151 Filter Matrix tab page 11 that is placed over every n x n subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed in the central position in the output file Users can specify the Filter Size 5x5 7x7 9x9 or 11x11 The Filter Sum is displayed in the adjacent box The Load Defaults button sets the matrix parameters to their factory default values When you click on this button you will see a warning message Will erase Data for ALL Filter Sizes Continue with Yes No Yes will erase ALL filter data before loading the factory default values Custom Filter Procedure Use the following procedure to apply a custom filter to an image 1 Select Custom Filter from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 Onthe Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values 5 Define the filter by entering the appropriate values in the Filter Matrix 6 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 175
5. see 59 temperature control 58 Spectroscopy mode sseseeeeee 143 SPEX spectrometer installation 28 SPEX TRIAX control see 218 Splash screen eet eee rens 30 Square Root math operation sss 157 Squared math operation seseseee 157 Status Bar Messages eee eeeeeeeeeeeseceecnseeseeeaes 20 Step and Glue file overlap itte ttg 162 file requirements seen 162 file starting and ending values 163 incremental files essen 163 overwriting incremental files 163 SET and RUN Seen RE 163 Strip selection Shift End key combination 109 Shift Home key combination 109 via Custom Toolbar sees 109 Subtraction math operation eee ee eee eres 157 SuperSYNCHRO eee 189 ACTIVE mode emet 202 Auxiliary output esee 204 continuous exponential mode 203 continuous linear mode sess 203 Interactive Gate Width and Delay 209 Interactive Trigger Setup sssss 208 Operation of etie Dust re 200 repetitive gating setup 202 sequential gating setup sse 203 SyncMASTER outputs sese 204 trigg
6. sees 38 Camera Detection Wizard Finished dialog box esses 39 Controller Camera tab page sees 40 Display tab page left applies to all controllers except ST 121 right applies to ST 12D0nly i s fete eet LR Su eet ete Sep Eu eerte tices 44 Interface t b Dage ier tere eb e pee cese eee gione 45 Cleans Skips tab page 5 eret epe eet reet ete ete nee 46 Vertical Skipszi etie ete tte eret teda ap E eee te ede Los Rte E piena 48 Spectrograph Menu og e e fepe eq eae Aone 49 Define Spectrograph dialog eee 49 Install Remove Spectrographs eeeeeeeeeeeeeereenee nennen 50 Connect tab page een iie deret He P UL Re eb po eee ei Ret LE Leones 51 Comm Settings dialog seen eene nennen 51 Gratings tab page Setting the grating parameters sse 52 Move Spectrograph Gratings tab page sse 53 Define Spectrograph Slits Mirrors tab page seen 54 Slit width and Mirror selection tab pages Move Spectrograph dialog 54 Entering the Laser Line Define Spectrograph Main tab page 55 Temperature didlo Tyi eer eea ere ette reap esee ee te eee e eai 58 Experiment Setup Main tab page seen 59 Experiment Setup dialog Timing tab page seeee 60 Data Corrections tab page ient reete te Feet e EP ete EREE 60 Generic ADE tab page
7. serene 116 xii Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Open dialo gsis deresine ren Re Et e ett pe etie diete pone 117 Circuit spe Image n reete e bei e ete 117 Brightness Contrast dialog eese 118 Circuit spe with Region Selected for Viewing eee 119 Circuit spe Expanded to show Defined Region esses 119 Display Layout dialog ote perte eret 120 Range tab page itid E et dt ee tc eue 120 Selecting the Large CUrSOE oerte etd ete t teen 120 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross sections eeeeeeeee 121 Information DOR x ete ee e fe 121 AxXes tab page donee teet tied ete e pete obtu eode 122 Fonts dialo tiaron ie uteed e eene tee oet reete r e RAE cene 122 Color tab page ce t te ect HER ert cO o 122 Dis
8. eeeeeeeeeerenenen rennen 27 Installing WinSpec 32 5 ee et dete det e Reese eoe oet E dede 27 Installing from the CD 22 22 eiie ed eene tre lated tede ere E e dete inp elected eda 28 Installing from the FTP Site teen recette peret eee rete de rest nnda 28 Custom Installation Choices esee enne enemies 29 Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinSpec 32 29 Starting WinSpec 32 5 dedu tesoro ce Herc tie ere tore te 30 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup cesssscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeees 33 TintrO GU Ctr Onis D EE 33 Basic Hardware Overview reai ieira tpat nennen nennen ener en 33 Entering the Default System Parameters into WinSpec sese 35 Camera Detection Wizard WinSpec Versions 2 5 25 and later 35 Editing Controller and Detector Characteristics esee 40 Entering the Data Orientatioh 54 eed Rep eet ext Heber Phe Rien 44 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters eese 45 Entering the Cleans Skips Characteristics eese enne 46 Setting up a Spectrographb o deett e irt haere 49 Ports and Comm Parameters 2 ee e etin Ree pe ek ects tete beet ar 51 Specifying the Active Spectrograph seen 52 Entering Grating INformations noniine eenia ee en rennen 52 Grating Parameters oorr eee teretes adhue eee eee e
9. 191 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator eese nennen 193 Programmable Timing Generator PTG eene 196 SuperS YNCHRO Timing Generator essere eren nennen 200 Sequential Mode Parameters essere eere nennen tenente nter 205 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup esee 208 Timing Generator Interactive Gate Width and Delay sees 209 Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee 211 IntroductiOri cott eee Mines EUR E hats ete o 211 Displaying the Custom Toolbar esee eene 211 Customizing the Toolbar eese neret nnne 211 Adding an Available Button ensarrar eene nennen 212 Removing a Button e nere ter HERE rete ete o 212 Individual Dialog Item Descriptions esent enne 212 Chapter 20 Software Options eesseeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeenee nennen 215 licenter 215 Custom Chip WAXCstChp Opt 2 etri ect edet ete lese are eco pe tette aei 215 Hrinrorsii eno ERE 215 Custom Timing WXCSstTim Opt eee eeeeseecsecssecesecesecsseceseceseesseesseeseneesaeeeaeeenaeenaes 216 Introduction edere ER eq te ee a t Ce eco 216 EITS EITS eXe ER 216 Macro Record WXmactec Opt irriicimeniii riitin eT E i is 217 Spex Spectrograph Control WSSpex opt eese 218 Vart
10. Amplifier if available High Capacity 1f this is a reported only parameter set it by selecting FAST on the ADC tab page E Avalanche Gain Cameras with electron P High Cepacty Low Neice multiplying CCDs Set to 0 initially and Avalanche Gain disabled Enable and increase the gain for low light level spectra r ccumulations Number o aa Gain 0 Enable Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Figure 31 Experiment Setup Main tab page WinSpec 32 Manual On the Timing tab page Figure 32 set the following parameters Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that do not apply to your system Timing Mode Free Run Triggered Mode Not checked Continuous Cleans Not checked Shutter Control Normal Pre Open Not checked Safe Mode Selected External Trigger Not checked Edge Trigger edge Delay time 0 Use Interrupts ST 138 only Not checked On the Data Corrections tab page Figure 33 all of the correction functions should be OFF On the ADC tab page Figure 34 set the parameters as they apply to your particular system Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that do not apply to your system Rate ADC rate Only those rates available for your A D converter will be displayed making it necessary to designate the A D type first Select the maximu
11. int srccmp int stripe int scramble long lexpos Jo long lnoscan no long lavgexp char stripfil 16 char version 16 JUR int controller type 0 scramble Not used by WinView number of stripes per frame 1 unscramble exposure val 32 bits when exposure 1 of scan 32 bits when noscan no of accum 32 bits when avgexp 1 strip file Not used by WinView SW version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 1 new st120 2 old st120 3 st130 type 1 4 st130 type 2 and ST133 6 DC131 The YT variables are not used by WinView 5 st138 YT FILE HEADER int yt file defined bs int yt fh calib mode fx int yt fh calib type int yt fh element 12 double yt fh calib data 12 float yt fh time factor i float yt fh start time Les reverse flag a n hu Version 1 6 Header All WinView WinSpec files version 1 6 and WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 data files must begin with the following 4100 byte header Data files created under previous versions of WinView WinSpec can still be read correctly However files created under the new versions 1 6 and higher cannot be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec Header Structure Listing unsigned int int unsigned int float int int unsigned char int int int in in in unsigned int float float char int int ct ct ct int int int int dioden JK 0 avgexp
12. r Horizontal compromising data acquisition erformance P Phase fj Phase B E Princeton Instruments does not Cock je 2 Clock p encourage users to change these parameter settings For most Clock Rate usec 6 4 Clock Rate nsec 50 applications the default settings Shift per Row usec 153 8 Shift per Pixel nsec 100 will give the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before ok Cms Hep customizing the chip timing parameters Figure 199 Custom Timing tab page FITS FITS exe FITS Flexible Image Transport System is the data format most widely used within astronomy for transporting analyzing and archiving scientific data files FITS is primarily designed to store scientific data sets consisting of multidimensional arrays images and 2 dimensional tables organized into rows and columns of information The FITS option allows you to acquire and save WinSpec 32 data in the FITS format This option also provides a file conversion function that allows you to convert existing WinSpec 32 SPE data files into the FITS format F1 help is included with the option Acquiring data in the FITS format starts with setting up the experiment parameters in WinSpec 32 With WinSpec still open you then open the FITS exe program by opening Chapter 20 Software Options 217 it at its directory location or by opening it from the Execute Macro dialog if the Macro option has been i
13. Template such as EXP in the File Minimum Overlap Names Template box There is provision for setting the starting File Increment Value As each incremental file is taken the File Final Resolution ES Units Point z Always Use Default Run Set Raw Data Files Setup Starting Incremental File Name File Names Template em File Increment Value zi Reset After Each Run Cancel Help Figure 139 Step and Glue Setup dialog Increment Value will increment by one If the Reset After Each Run box is checked the File Increment Value will reset to one and the subsequent set of incremental files will overwrite the first If the Reset After Each Run box is unchecked the File Increment Values assigned to the next and subsequent runs will start with the next digit after the last one used No files will be overwritten 6 Enter the Starting Value the Ending Value and the Minimum Overlap in the units selected A good overlap would be about ten times the coverage of a single pixel To determine the coverage of a single pixel click on Always Use Default the minimum resolution will be displayed in the Final Resolution edit box the resolution changes as the wavelength changes decreasing at higher wavelengths 7 Enter a Final Resolution for the resulting file Unless you require a certain resolution it is easiest to let the computer calculate the final re
14. s Units Pixel 2 Click on the Range tab to E d SE Set to Full Range Iv move the Range tab page Initial Full Range Figure 101 to the front Initial Autoscale and Set Iv Save as Defaul 0K C Hel to Full Range should be nee selected The Frame number should be 1 Figure 101 Range tab page 3 Click on the OK button The Display Layout dialog will close 4 Click on the a Autoscale button at the bottom of the image window Then select the large cursor by clicking on Cursor on the View menu and then on Large as shown in Figure 102 5 The display should now appear as shown in Figure 103 The axes will be labeled in image pixels and strips with respect to the CCD chip used to acquire the image The vertical image intensity profile at the cursor position will be displayed to the left and the horizontal image intensity profile at the bottom The minimum and maximum values for each profile are indicated Note that you can use the mouse and drag the axes and profile boundaries to change the size of the profile display regions To change the cursor location simply click the mouse at the new spot The cross sectional graphs will change to reflect the profiles at the new location View Acquisition Calibration To Toolbars gt v Status Bar Info v Axes v Cross Sections Cursor Figure 102 Selecting the Large Cursor Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 121 s Circuit spe
15. sss 80 SCAN siphal ied ie Sek fe AG ees 43 Screen capture Printing eee eee eeeeeeees 188 Sequential Mode Setup Exponential Increment esses 206 Fast Amplitude parameter esses 207 Fast decay and Slow decay 206 Fixed Increment 2 ertet ipei 206 Gate Delay nsenhebumenane pte rte 205 Gate Width siege September 205 On CCD Accumulations seesss 208 Save Sequence sees 207 208 sequential exponential algorithm 206 275 Sequential Mode Setup cont Slow Amplitude parameter esee 207 Time Constant parameter 207 Software Accumulations eeesses 208 Time Constant none tton 206 View Width Delay eee 207 SESSION DAT eret tbt oed 254 Setup Custos see REOR ER 28 Standard PCI eee 28 Setup program sesseseeeeeeeeeen nennen enne 28 Sharpening parameters oesno ADU pene bore 170 procedure cet eb eet 170 SHUTTER signal eee 43 Shutter type once ie eR oue tir 41 Smoothing parameters nenene ne teeth ret renes 171 procedure e siue e eere Ue Eee cS 171 Snapshot mode Y T sss 134 Sobel edge detection sss 169 Software Accumulations eseeee 208 Spectra Math cet s 155 Spectrograph aC Ve isse OPE PRODR
16. 3 Onthe Welcome dialog Figure 9 leave the checkbox unselected and click on Next Camera Detection Wizard Welcome x This wizard will attempt to detect the camera system you are using Please make sure your system is connected to the computer and powered on before proceeding Cancel Help Figure 9 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog 4 Select the system that you want to install e If there are two camera systems connected to the host computer and turned on the wizard table should contain two listings e If there are no systems listed click on Back check the cable connections and or turn on the camera system and then click on Next Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware x The camera detection wizard has found the following camera systems Camera _CCD Name PI System 1 EEV 100 1340F CCD Size 100x1340 Interface PCI Please select the camera you are using and press Next to continue If your camera is not in the list rescan by pressing Back lt Back Cancel Help Figure 10 Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware dialog 5 Follow the instructions on the dialogs to perform the initial hardware setup this wizard enters default parameters on the Hardware Setup dialog tab pages and gives you an opportunity to acquire a test image to confirm the system is working Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 37 To Use the Manual Function Note This function ca
17. Germany 49 0 89 660 7793 Japan 81 3 5639 2741 UK amp Ireland 44 0 28 3831 0171 Otherwise see our Support web page at www princetoninstruments com An up to date list of addresses and telephone numbers is posted on the Wwww princetoninstruments com Support page In addition links on this page to support topics allow you to send e mail based requests to the Customer Support group Index 3D Graph display esee 103 3D Layout tab page Z Axis Endpoint csceeececeseceeeeeceeceeneeenseeeeees 111 A B Absolute math operation 158 Absorbance on line process sssss 128 Active spectrograph specifying 52 Addition math operation sseeeese 157 Adjust calibration procedure ssse 96 AdJUSt eEEOT stereo Ee RR UST RS 97 Amplitude rette eerie 207 AND math operation esee 158 Areas Y iD iet esee ien 129 ASCII output on line process eee 137 Auto Select at least three strips cece eeeceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 eleven or more strips 00 eee ee eee cette eeeeeeeeeeeees 78 CWO SEC DS oec ertet edo e RD GE ERE hey 78 Auto Select algorithm esee 78 at least three strips eene 101 eleven or more strips sessseeeee 101 Simple StEID ceiiestedtec center divans reti tetas 102 tWO SEHIDS neret irte eee 102 Auto Select Image Graph or 3D Gr
18. L4 DA INN NV LLL Lg ggg gg lg gg Lg Tl AE Now Sidi NNNNNM ZZL SALSA EIS LES SPS SL LD FL NSS SALA AA P P Ninua Chip Mask AAA ZZ AA Shutter NLL age a KVAZ LL L E INNNNNV LLL UH B LT INNNNNY ILI IF SS SSS SLOP LOL OL PC PL PLC PL P Close AUA a elemen Figure 204 Virtual Chip dialog Figure 203 Virtual Chip Functional diagram Virtual Chip Setup The following procedure covers the basic hardware and software setup for Virtual Chip operation Equipment Suitable Princeton Instruments detector with 512x512FT or other frame transfer CCD array Suitable ST 133 PCI Interface Card and High Speed Serial TAXI cable Suitable Host Computer Software WinSpec 32 version 2 4 or higher WX vchip opt installed in the same directory as the executable WinSpec 32 program Assumptions e You are familiar with the WinSpec 32 software and have read the hardware manuals e Masking is for a 47x47 pixel Virtual Chip with its origin at 1 1 Procedure 1 Verify that the power is OFF for ALL system components including the host computer 2 Verify that the correct line voltages have been selected and that the correct fuses have been installed in the ST 133 3 Connect the TAXI cable to the interface card at the host computer and to the Serial Com connector at the rear of the Controller Tighten down the locking screws 4 Connect the Camera Controller cable to the Detector connector on the rear of the Controller and to the Dete
19. Look Up Table Input Look Up Table Dutput Look Up Table tab page The Look Up Table function uses an ASCII text file provided by the user to Input LUT Setup File translate pixel intensities from an input file Lure into different intensities in an output file D NwiriX Data Files LUT1 tet The input file must be a raw data file unsigned 16 bit image since the Look Up Table mapping assumes a 0 65536 range of intensity values in the input file The map file is a previously created text file refer to pages 176 and 177 for descriptions of the LUT formats that must be converted to a binary map file for the actual operation After the text file is selected clicking on the Create Binary LUT button converts the text information to binary format ees NNI oce e Clicking on Apply then remaps the image intensities and redraws the data display window appropriately Create Binary LUT Figure 152 Look Up Table Look Up Table Procedure Use the following procedure to process data using the LUT 1 Select Look Up Table from the Process menu 2 Using the Input and Output tab pages enter the Input and Output file names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse butto
20. Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Timing Mode Free Run Triggered Mode Not checked Continuous Cleans Not checked Shutter Control Normal Pre Open Not checked Safe Mode selected External Trigger Not checked Edge Trigger edge Delay time 0 Use Interrupts ST 138 only Not checked Experiment Setup Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load r Timing Mode Extemal Syne Continuous Cleans r Shutter Control Normal T Pre Open C Fast Mode Delay Time 0 000 Seconds WaitForTTL TTL Line 1 Edge Trigger ede x Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 42 Timing tab page 68 WinSpec 32 Manual 4 On the Data Corrections tab page Figure 43 all of the correction functions should be OFF 5 Onthe ADC tab page Figure 44 set the parameters as they apply to your particular system Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Rate ADC rate Only those rates available for your A D converter will be displayed making it necessary to designate the A D type first Select the maximum speed allowed by the converter ST 130 owners must confirm that the internal hardware jumpers of their controller are properly set for the desi
21. Parameters tab page Smoothing is also accomplished by mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Smoothing Parameters tab page Figure 146 These masks aieo sometimes called low pass filters attenuate regions P Ars dereud with high contrast while leaving pixels in regions of low contrast almost unchanged Figure 145 illustrates the smoothing filter effect EER k k Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 145 Original Image left and Smoothed Image Figure 146 Smoothing Parameters right tab page Input Parameters Dutput Smoothing Procedure Use the following procedure to smooth an image 1 Select Smoothing from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values 5 Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one 6 To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values 7 Click on Apply to begin processing 172 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Morphological Functions Parameters tab page Morp
22. WinSpec PRINCETON INSTRUMENTS Spectroscopic Software 4411 0048 Version 2 5K February 2 2010 Princeton Instruments RIAA CAN AA Copyright 2001 2010 Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc 3660 Quakerbridge Rd Trenton NJ 08619 TEL 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 FAX 609 587 1970 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Princeton Instruments Printed in the United States of America Adobe Acrobat Photoshop and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Cascade is a registered trademark of Roper Scientific Inc InSpectrum is a trademark of Acton Research Corporation Jasc and Paint Shop Pro are registered trademarks of Jasc Software Inc Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation PVCAM is a registered trademark of Photometrics Ltd Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The information in this publication is believed to be accurate as of the publication release date However Princeton Instruments does not assume any responsibility for any consequences including any damages resulting from the use thereof The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revision of this publicat
23. bottom y value amount y is binned grouped in hw 242 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ROIinfoblk ROIMAX ROI Starting Offsets ROI 1 1512 ROI 2 1524 ROI 3 1536 ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 ROL 6 1572 ROL 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 char FlatField HDRNAMEMAX 1632 Flat field file name char background HDRNAMEMAX 1752 background sub file name char blemish HDRNAMEMAX 1872 blemish file name float file header ver 1992 version of this file header char YT_Info 1000 1996 2995 Reserved for YT information long WinView id 2996 0x01234567L if file created by WinX Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times xcalibration 3000 3488 x axis calibration ycalibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration Start of X Calibration Structure 3000 3488 double offset 3000 offset for absolute data scaling double factor 3008 factor for absolute data scaling char current unit 3016 selected scaling unit char reservedl 3017 reserved char string 40 3018 special string for scaling char reserved2 40 3058 reserved char calib valid 3098 flag if calibration is valid char input unit 3099 current input units for calib value char polynom unit 3100 linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff char polynom order 3101 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM char calib
24. set to 1 if accum done by Hardware set to 1 if store sync used set to 1 if blemish removal applied set to 1 if cosmic ray removal done if cosmic ray applied this is type Threshold of cosmic ray removal number of frames in file max intensity of data future min intensity of data future y axis label shutter type shutter compensation time Readout mode full kinetics etc window size for kinetics only clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer computer interface isa taxi pci eisa etc I O address of interface card if more than one address for card interrupt level interface card Ky E EJ y x ay hy Xy xy x ay Fy 7 iA y xf x 2 k xy ky y Fy x7 a z xy aa ae af Bx xf yA p FJ ea xy x Ef ay X sy xy x xy xy x7 y F X A aa ui aL xy EJ ae xf xL 237 238 WinSpec 32 Manual unsigned int GPIBadd 1502 GPIB address if used unsigned int ControlAdd 1504 GPIB controller address if used unsigned int controllerNum 1506 if multiple controller system will have controller data came from Future Item unsigned int SWmade 1508 Software which created this file int NumROI 1510 number of ROIs used if 0 assume 1 1512 1630 ROI information struct ROIinfo 5 unsigned int startx left x start value unsigned int endx right x value unsigned int groupx
25. 1 1 D 1 i MU EN l 4 A Figure 207 Relationship between amp and the focal length detector angle and the distance of A from image plane WinSpec X Axis Auto Calibration When Calibration Usage is set to Auto Spectro in WinSpec 32 the X Axis calibration is done in the following steps after a wavelength change First the wavelength is calculated at each end of the array using the method above Then these two points plus the third center wavelength point are automatically fit to a 2 order polynomial using the wavelength calibration functions 247 248 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Appendix E CD ROM Failure Work Arounds Although not common there are CD drives that are not compatible with the Win 95 long filename convention Attempting to install on such a system causes the filenames to be truncated and the install fails causing a message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Application WinXSystem File Group WinXSystem Fortunately there are a couple of workarounds both involving copying the install files to the customer s hard drive first then installing the software from that location 1 If possible copy the files to the customer s hard drive via another computer that supports long file names If the customer s computer is part of a network then the files can be copied first to the hard
26. Display and User Units eese nennen rennen 88 Calibration Method cninn ee euet d He eee een d Lec e Leder duda 89 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration eeeeeeeeeeccceeeeeeee 91 Introductiori eei ttr tei e ete iC tei A ense iere edes 91 Preparatiott c o seo ean EC an 91 Calibration Parameters tapete tegere e einai eines ieee ied e ree e nnn een 92 OLSet iut ec re o tte dr Uo OUR eo d are CHEN HEEL oes 94 Table of Contents V Dispersion eiie eite eee eee i e HR HEU FER UR re E UHR EFE e tena 98 Chapter 8 Displaying the Dalta cnet ere occa rie Dan aa ka Iw r are aan 101 Introductions eaer ie EE 101 Screen Refresh Rte ui dee dee pe e dated EA EEEN 102 Data Displayed as a 3D Graph sese nennen 103 Displaying Ehid lamp spe ni iret o eee Ep eee e Recta 103 540 05904 Display Range teo Ren eT eie HELM poteet 105 Selecting a Region of Interest ii eid up ele e et Meca ge Eaa 106 Intormation DOX hes 12 22 cease eer gr Erde ee t e ei eei pest 107 Displaying Sinale Strip nete dte etn ette Epio d e oie ena 108 juro C E 108 Strip Selection 25 er tp cum tb e eiit Dp t o telae te EA a aean 109 Cursor Curve and Marker Curves Sesuci esitaiat eene 110 Iden Surfacesc uuu tet ttt eti ber re e beet ipe bate rta 111 Data Window Context menu ene eere reet eee tora ire tere petes ve 112 Eabeling Graphs and Images 5 mk et Ue epe i Lebe e eg
27. File operations menu EUER 7 Men as shown in Figure 57 Cu 3 Click on Delete Then answer yes to MEME the query asking whether you wish to Delete send the file to the recycling bin The file will be deleted and the File Operations menu will close Rename Properties Figure 57 Right click File Operations menu Note Click on the Open dialog Cancel button to exit the dialog without deleting any files Multiple Files It is also possible to delete multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for deleting 1 Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected 2 Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously 4 Hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected 6 Proceed in similar fashion to select each file to be deleted Once all files to be deleted have been selected right click on a selected file to open the File Operations menu Then click on Delete to delete all of the selected files Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration Introduction You can calibrate the W
28. Note Right clicking inside an ROI will open the ROI context E area oolbar menu Display Layout File Information Figure 85 Data Window Context menu Labeling Graphs and Images For graphs and images the normal context menu right click is as shown in Figure 86 s4 Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 Autoscale Auto 5 95 Cursor Zoom New Info Bar v Toolbar Display Layout File Information Figure 86 Normal Context menu This menu was changed for ROIs If there is an ROI and if the mouse is right clicked in the ROI the context menu changes to that shown in Figure 87 Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 113 g argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 N eEEEFEFEFFEEEEFEFEFEFEE Autoscale Auto 5 95 Zoom In Label Display Erase Labels Close ROI 4 4 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 A M XU ASA AN hi urrrreeerIIFIIIIIIIFIIIP Figure 87 ROI Context menu If the mouse is right clicked outside the ROI the normal menu Figure 86 appears The ROI context menu Figure 87 contains the usual actions pertaining to the ROI autoscaling on the region inside the ROI and zooming in to the ROI region plus three new actions Label Display allows user labels to be placed on the display Erase Labels removes ALL user labels from the display and Close ROI erases the ROI with
29. Undo Zoom In Button The original view will be restored 119 v 4 Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 n F D y Figure 98 Circuit spe with Region Selected for Viewing v Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 4 5 amp amp amp e i 14 Figure 99 Circuit spe Expanded to show Defined Region WinSpec 32 Manual Opening the Display Layout dialog With the image still open select Layout from the Display menu The Display Layout dialog will p Display Type Axes Cross Sections open Figure 100 Note that you Auto Select v Horizontal Horizontal can also access the Display l Layout dialog by clicking on the Iv Vertical Vertical Display Layout button of the Open ie I TIMER I Weller dialog n xs C 3d Keep Window Placement General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Curso Version 2 5 K v Save as Default Viewing Axes and Cross Sections Cancel Help Figure 100 Display Layout dialog I Still in the Display Layout dialog select Axes Horizontal Axes Vertical General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor 4 r rate Cross Sections Horizontal and i Frame Live Auto All Scans Zz S ale Cross Sections Vertical Refer From JEE T 1215 to 55535 to the online Help for additional information on Range Axes and Cross Sections x Eo
30. WinSpec 32 is provided on a CD shipped with the system or it can be installed from the Princeton Instruments FTP site 28 Caution WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K During the installation process you will be given the choice of AUTO PCI or Custom installation Click on Custom if you are using a SPEX spectrograph AUTO PCI Installs the WinSpec 32 application and DLLs the help files the INF file if required and the interface drivers sample data diagnostic programs Acton spectrograph support pulser support ASCII and Move Snap Ins PI Screen Saver PI SPE Shell Extension Visual Basic Interface and the Imaging option Custom By default installs the WinSpec 32 application and DLLs the help files documentation Acton spectrograph support pulser support selected Snap Ins PI Screen Saver PI SPE Shell Extension and the Imaging option However you can change the components for installation by checking and unchecking the boxes associated with the components Allows you to install the drivers for SPEX spectrographs Installing from the CD Exit any software currently running This will speed the installation of WinSpec 32 2 Insert the WinSpec 32 CD into your CD drive Windows will detect the CD and the installation will begin automatically Note If the auto start feature has been disabled on your computer click the desktop Start button select Run key x Setup where x is the letter designating your C
31. Yes to initiate the reboot e Click on No to wait before rebooting If you select No you may be required to close the eBUS Driver Installation Tool dialog Reboot the computer at your convenience 6 After the reboot verify that the network connection has been re established OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update This procedure is highly recommended when a laptop computer will be used to communicate with the ST 133 We recommend the SIIG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 if USB 2 0 is not native to the laptop s motherboard To reduce the instances of data overruns and serial violations the OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Host Controller installed for the SIIG card should be replaced by the appropriate Microsoft driver Windows XP or Vista 32 bit depending on the laptop s operating system Note This procedure may also be performed for desktop computers that use the Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCI 1 Download and install Microsoft Service Pack 1 for Windows XP if the service pack has not been installed From the Windows Start menu select SettingslControl Panel Select System and then System Properties Select the Hardware tab and click on Device Manager button Expand Universal Serial Bus Controllers Right mouse click on OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Host Controller and select Properties pog uode su T9 On the Driver tab click on the Update Driver button You may have to wait a minute or so before you will be allowed to click on
32. _Hep box so that you will be warned that the Figure 45 ROI tab page imaging selected 70 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K specified file name is already in use If not checked the old data file will be ADE mne oe aed overwritten by the new one No Main DataFie ROI Setup Data Corrections warning is provided Data File Name Data Type AutoSelect Should be Nme selected Auto save and prompts Select Don t Auto Increment File Name auto save or ask to save With this E Enable Curent Value io selection you won t receive a prompt when a file is closed as a result of oe Dale Existing Files MW AutoSelect starting a data collection A prompt will still be issued if you close the file FLOAT z M Confirm before overwriting explicitly and it has not been saved Auto save and prompts 3 since being collected Ask whether to save unsaved files Use a New Window for each run Peu Leave unchecked Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 46 Data File dialog Click on the button to the Run As Data File Name 2 x right of the Name field gwen a0 eaae This will open a browse box Select the directory ALAGA PR d where you want the stored 1Omorestiip SPE AA 200i SP I file to go In the example 10strip SPE LA strip SF illustrated the file name is 16strip SPE Ad 4irames TESTFILE and it will be 24 1stie SPE
33. acquisition will continue until terminated Note Generally data acquisition does not occur at exactly even times With a 0 1 second exposure time there is still the readout time for each data set to consider In reality the Y T point will be calculated from the first data set processed on or after the Y T sample time expires The actual time the Y T sample is taken is read using the system clock relative to the start of data acquisition and the times are stored with the Y T data as the last Y T curve Since data acquisition is done using DMA under the timing of the detector controller the timing coming into the DMA buffer is very precise However Y T time is taken as the data is transferred from the DMA buffer and processed for background subtraction and flat field This is under the program control and may be less precise for longer sample times this will probably not be noticeable 136 WinSpec 32 Manual YT Analysis Procedure Version 2 5 K 1 Establish the Experiment Setup Define Areas parameters for acquiring the data on which the Y T analysis is to be performed 2 Select YT Setup on the Acquisition menu This will open the YT Area and Equation Setup dialog Figure 114 3 Define the areas and equations for the Y T analysis See YT Area and Equation Setup page 130 for a detailed discussion of the Y T Area and Equation Setup dialog and the process of defining areas and entering equations 4 After defini
34. brackets the timing of the photocathode gate This minimizes optical leakage through the photocathode to the UV sensitive MCP when the photocathode is gated Off Bracket pulsing does not help in the visible region Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX3 camera See your PI MAX3 system manual for detailed information 8 Click on the Gating tab to bring the Gating tab page to the front 9 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gating setup dialog will appear In the Repetitive Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay remain constant over the course of the measurement If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog will close and you will return to the SuperS YNCHRO dialog Repetitive Gating Setup L Repetitive Gating Setup Gate Width Gate Delay Gate Width Gate Delay From TO Out fon 1 frees flO H rec 100 nes 7 10 nec z On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for 10 z 1 a z mi Exsposure s 1 r 1 Exposure s Cancel Help Cancel Help Figure 187 SuperSYNCHRO Repetitive Gating dialog Interna
35. button Mode Bracket Pulsing CON COF Setup Burst Mode C ON OFF Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gating setup dialog will appear as shown in Figure 180 In the Repetitive gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay remain constant over the course of the measurement If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog will Cancel Help close and you will return to the PTG C Sequential Bracket Stat G Man C Hain Burst dialog Figure 179 PTG Gating tab page Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential mosi Gee ecd Ene Gating Setup dialog will appear as Lm m s ue 10000 nsec z 1 5625 nsec shown in Figure 181 In the Sequential zr zd ie Bates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for Gatin g mode the Gate Width and Gate On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Delay do not remain constant but of m 1 fi Exposure s change either linearly Fixed or E a exponentially as the measurement FERE Help nde up EE 3E Figure 180 Repetitive Gating Setup 198 10 11 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Sequential Gating Setup x Gate Width Bate Delay Number of ian Stat 5 nsec Stat 1 5625 nsec g i End 5 z sec z End 201 z Inse
36. ete aee ete leen ee nca 204 Range Limits Exceeded Warning eee 206 Gate Width Delay Sequence dialog eee 207 Sequence Values File dialog esee rennen 208 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup dialog 208 Timing Generator Interactive Gate Width and Delay dialog 209 xiv Tables WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Figure 196 Default Custom Toolbar esee nennen nennen 211 Figure 197 Customize Toolbar dialog eee 211 Figure 198 Custom Chip tab page sseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeee nennen nennen nennen 215 Figure 199 Custom Timing tab page sees eene nennen 216 Figure 200 BITES dialog eee ee ke et preset Hei etch 217 Figure 201 Macro Record dialog eese nennen nennen 217 Figure 202 Install Remove Spectrographs dialog eee 218 Figure 203 Virtual Chip Functional diagram eene 219 Figure 204 Virtual Chip dialog eese nennen nennen 219 Figure 205 Wavelength Calibration Spectrum eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 234 Figure 206 Relationships of a and in terms of y and y sss 246 Figure 207 Relationship between and the focal length detector angle and the distance OF A from image plane rt e rt rt Eten Ree 247 Figure 208 WinSpec WinView o
37. etr eee edt rece teer sets 61 ROEdialog 2 ur eee eee tet ae E Gee eb ne ele ee Ret pets 61 DatasFile dialog eee Ree 62 Eie Brtowse dial og i ert e epe gelten ina 62 ACQUISITION MENU ROREM EE 63 Typical Mercury Argon Spectrum sees 64 Temperature dialog eet pe ARI p eene eet eget tr eet 66 Experiment Setup Main tab page oo cece cescsseceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeenaes 67 Liriine tab page shel see p rere ettet epe e iet e repete ite eere re t 67 D t Corrections tab page dne repete Un Gate epe dee Het poeta 68 Generic ADC tabspage eene eee gre 68 ROI tab page imaging selected essere 69 Table of Contents Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 xi Da ta File dialog uini pe te estere etes etie esee iio ioi 70 Pile Browse dialog tee ee tecti dena 70 ACQUISITION MENU e 71 ST 133 Interactive Camera dialog eee 72
38. host computer software binning Both of these types of binning occur during data acquisition Post acquisition binning can be performed on previously acquired data Hardware Binning Hardware binning is performed before the signal is read out by the preamplifier and may be used to improve the signal to noise S N ratio For signal levels that are readout noise limited this method improves S N ratio linearly with the number of pixels grouped together For signals large enough so that the detector is photon shot noise limited and for all fiber coupled ICCD detectors the S N ratio improvement is roughly proportional to the square root of the number of pixels binned Because hardware binning is performed while the signal is shifted into the readout register the readout time and the burden on computer memory are reduced However this time and memory savings are at the expense of resolution Since shift register pixels typically hold only twice as much charge as image pixels hardware binning of large sections may result in saturation and blooming spilling charge into adjacent pixels If you want to use hardware binning you define the binning parameters on the Experiment Setup ROI tab page These settings will be used for acquiring data until you change the ROI size or the amount of binning Notes 1 If you have a PCI card you may need to ensure that the number of pixels to be read out is always an even number a warning will appear
39. in Focus mode the images will not appear at the computer but only at the video monitor If the number of pixels on the CCD is very much larger than the number of video pixels you can use the Pan function to select any one of nine different subsets to display The Zoom function gives additional control One to one mapping from the selected region to the screen occurs with 2x selected You may additionally have the option of selecting Binning in which a wider view is achieved by combining adjacent pixels or Decimation in which pixels are discarded according to an algorithm STGP The exposure time will be the same as that set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 73 the other setting automatically The Intensity Scaling together with the Offset determines how the image data is mapped to the 256 gray scale levels Begin with the Intensity Scaling set to 1 to 4096 slider all the way to the right Similarly the Offset setting should initially be set to 2 slider all the way to left 5 When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Camera Operation dialog to halt focus mode operation 6 Click on Close to close the Interactive Camera Operation dialog and return to the Experiment Setup dialog Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin col
40. left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right Morphological Procedure Use the following procedure to morphologically process an image l 2 3 Select Morphological from the Process menu Enter the Input Image and Output Image names On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values Select the desired Mask Type and Mask Operation To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing 174 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Custom Filter Custom Filter x Filter Matrix tab page The Custom Filter Filter Matrix tab page allows you to set the filter matrix ps i parameter values The filter is applied to the dataset specified via the Input tab page page 167 The processed data is saved in the file specified by the Output tab page page 167 Filtering is accomplished by mask operations defined by parameters entered in the matrix These functions can enhance edges sharpen or smooth features or erode or dilate an image How these images are processed is briefly described below Input Filter Matrix Output
41. located can be easily accessed By default the data directory is a subdirectory of the WinSpec program directory Files of the specified type the WinSpec 32 data type is spe in the current directory and any subdirectories are listed in the box below the directory name Open 2 x Lookin QDta ss e e NK e five strip SPE yd flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec ste FL1 SPE yA Foot spe Fl41a spe Ww four strip SPE Fl41b SPE m Hg argon spe flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec step SPE yHid lamp spe flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec step2 SPE 7d Microbel spe j gt File name Hid lamp spe Files of type winx Data spe Cancel Open Display As Auto Select or Figure 76 Open dialog 104 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K The Image Graph and 3D Graph radio buttons at the bottom of the box allow you to select whether the file will be opened and displayed as an image two dimensional graph or as a 3D graph Select 3D Graph Auto Select should not be checked From the data directory select the image file called Hid lamp spe Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The graph display may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer The initial appearance of the display may vary depending on the initial Display Layout parameter settings Select Layout on the Display menu The Display Layout K General Range Color Axes 3D Lay
42. or I1 O2 O2 is the output value for I2 O3 O3 is the output value for I3 O4 OA is the output value for I4 Olast Olast is the output value for Imax Example The following example is for a one to one mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax are output levels Based on the Imin and Imax values there are 5 output values 7 3 1 In this example every input intensity less than 3 Imin gets mapped to 20 3 Imin is mapped to 20 7 Imax is mapped to 10 and every input intensity greater than 7 Imax is mapped to 10 Olast Input intensities 4 5 and 6 are mapped to 22 23 and 26 respectively 3 7 20 22 23 26 10 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 177 Format 2 This format is not a one to one mapping in that input intensities between Imin and Imax inclusive can be omitted from the list of In Out pairs Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter This format expects an arbitrary number of entries in the form of In Out and the In Out pairs may be listed in any order The In value must be between Imin and Imax inclusive Anything less than Imin is mapped to the first Input mapping Anything greater than Imax gets mapped the output value of the last In Out pair Any input value not specified in an In Out pair is mapped to zero Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ifirst Ofirst Ofirst is th
43. 169 Sobel edge detection ssssssss 169 Equations YT tees iter eet Rer et 129 Ethernet network is not accessible 260 Exclusive OR math operation s 158 Index Exponential Data type 206 Files of Type text box ssseeee 78 Filter Matrix tab page custom filter 174 Find Peaks effect on displayed peak height 85 in wavelength calibration procedure 85 FireWire installation seen 27 FITS CONVELtCE noie eoe UU 216 Fixed Increment type sese 206 Flatfield corrections seeeeene 153 acquiring a flatfield file s 153 MO HERPES 153 FT IMAGE SHIFT signal eee 42 Full lateral resolution eene 265 G H Gate Delay ete Red 205 Gate Wath tic ie os epe eet 205 Gigabit Ethernet installations inrer ere tise 27 Gluing spectra 161 existing data files eoe Reeve 161 final resolution see 162 Glued Data File Name esses 162 starting ending wavelength values 162 tC OLY ae yere ee ioi eee 164 GPIB default address setting 193 Graphics card 22 Graphs labeling eene 112 Grating Dame ace nra oiii Er E PREDA IE 53 parameters ec etre
44. 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Smoothing Parameters tab page sss rennen 171 Morphological Parameters tab page eee 172 Original Image left and Dilated Image right sssssse 172 Original Image left and Eroded Image right sues 172 Original Image left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right 173 Filter Matrix t b page eer ee ette tee rete 174 LOOK Up Fable cete etie et eed hatte 175 Input tab p s 4 teet eer etie a tee Ete ent 179 Output tab page eet nite te eee Rte RITE RE ERE IRE FPE AREE EHE ETE REIR 179 Threshold and Clipping Parameters tab page sese 180 Example Cross Sections of an ROIL eee 181 Cross Section Parameters tab page essen 181 Post processing Binning and Skipping Parameters tab page 182 Post processing Histogram Parameter tab page sees 184 Print Setup dialog eei tee fte Ret d ee cete 185 Print dialog eet ette ttd ee tee Et en 186 Print Preview Window ee t diete e ect eet erts 187 Pulsers dialog 1 e e ee eds 189 PG200 Comm Port tab pageses pnnt ranei ee ret ina 190 PG200 Triggers tab page dieere erede ere ete ieis 190 PG200 Gating tab page rtt edi teet cet i
45. 215 216 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K in the definition The result will be faster but lower resolution data acquisition Operating in this mode would ordinarily require that the chip be masked so that only the reduced active area is exposed This will prevent unwanted charge from spilling into the active area or being transferred to the shift register By default if there are no Pre Dummy rows the serial register will be cleared before rows are shifted If the Skip Serial Register Clean box is selected when there are no Pre Dummy rows the register cleanout will be skipped and the chip readout will be faster This feature is not available for PVCAM supported cameras Custom Timing WXCstTim opt Caution Notes 1 Fully supported by WinSpec Version 2 5 18 1 and higher 2 This option is not supported for 5 MHz systems Introduction Hardware Setup 1133 If this option has been installed Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Timing selecting Custom Timing ADC Type FAST z checkbox on the Controller Camera or Controller Detector tab page Default Timing From 1MHz adds the Custom Timing tab page to ae the dialog The Custom Timing m Head selections are shown in Figure 199 The default timing parameter values have been determined to give the fastest possible performance without Style High Active Thomson Hi pis Vertical
46. 268 X 248 X 1 Figure 103 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross sections Information box On the View menu select Info The information box should appear as shown in 2 s Figure 104 The Hee A D counts is Pasian cce UH xps frame 1 aspect 1 00 reported at the pixel and strip position corresponding to the cursor position Also zoom 2 18 2 18 reported are the Frame number Aspect ratio and X and Y Zoom in effect If a region is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the Figure 104 Information box region coordinates and diagonal length will also be reported iic died the Intensity in a ROI Drag the mouse cursor to define a rectangular region of interest on the displayed image 2 Click on zi Autoscale The display will autorange to the intensity range in the defined region The effect will be an increase in contrast in the observed image Throughout the image pixels darker or lighter than those in the defined region will be displayed as black or white 3 Click the mouse anywhere in the displayed image and click zie again to restore the original image view 122 WinSpec 32 Manual ud the Axes Open the Display Layout dialog and open the Axes tab page Figure 105 Note that Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis and the Label box for each are all checked If unchecked the corresponding axis or label would not be displayed 2 Change the axis label for both axes Then click on OK The displayed axes will no long
47. 3103 double calib value 10 3183 double polynom coeff 6 3263 double laser position 7 3311 char reserved3 3319 unsigned char new calib flag 3320 char calib label 81 3321 char expansion 87 3402 offset for absolute data scaling factor for absolute data scaling selected scaling unit reserved special string for scaling reserved flag if calibration is valid current input units for calib value linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff ORDER of calibration POLYNOM valid calibration data pairs pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS laser wavenumber for relative WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area x 7 Ay x Ey X uri x xy Ay x x ae k ay y Ey Kk 5 x x Appendix C Start of Y Calibration Structure Data Structure 3489 3497 3505 3506 3507 3547 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3672 3752 3800 3808 3809 3810 3891 239 double offset ee double factor JR char current unit x char reservedl char string 40 char reserveda2 40 char calib valid 3 char input unit a y char polynom unit y char polynom order fe char calib count double pixel position 10 double calib value 10 double polynom coeff 6 double laser position char rese
48. 52 cable 23 ie etes 92 COM port designation eeee 51 Communications parameters esses 51 grating change warning sse 53 Grating selection and moving 53 grating setup and selection ss 52 installation procedure esses 49 magnification parameter sese 93 OVEEVIEWz i eveniet ne eed 59 slit and port selections 54 Spectrograph calibration Linear AdjUst iie eerte 97 Adjust procedure esse 96 Auto Spectro method 50 83 92 162 detector pixel width parameter 93 dispersion eret e therein 98 dispersion data sets sse 99 increasing error 92 introduction to poeren eshe espre i ipogea 91 linear calibration equation ee eee eee 96 manu al 25 ave cha eee ebbe 83 Offset reason TOT aie eT ert crier resto 94 parameters iore ostio Feel ur 92 peak finder function sees 94 preparation for 91 SEQUENCE ete tit rk Het ie eres 94 Use for Auto Spectro Calibration checkbox 50 Spectroscopy data collection Initial 57 Experiment Setup procedure steps common to all controller types 59 procedure for all controllers 63 276 WinSpec 32 Manual Spectroscopy data collection Initial cont Skips and Cleans
49. 88 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Save as Default The Save as Default button in the Calibration Setup dialog determines whether a calibration is temporary or permanent until changed Once a calibration has been saved as the default it will be automatically applied to subsequently acquired data It will not be applied to data files recalled from disk Note The default state of the button not only with respect to the button setting but also with respect to whether it is disabled grayed out and not user settable depends on the situation as follows No Data If you open the Calibration Setup menu and there is no data Save as Default will be pressed and disabled that is it will be locked in the Save as Default state Should you then click on OK no calibration values will be written to the Windows Registry Not Live Data If there is data in the active window when you open the Calibration Setup menu but the data isn t live such as would be the case if it were recalled from disk Save as Default is under user control with not pressed as the default state Note that if the opened data file was saved in a calibrated state that calibration will be in effect when the file is opened the calibration values will be loaded in the calibration setup and the data displayed Live Data If the active window is displaying live data Save as Default will be under user control but in the selected or pressed state If Save as Default
50. Areas Defined UnDo le calculator offers an alternative way of defining equations Note that eight buttons are provided for defined E sel s areas As areas are defined these buttons become labeled A1 through A8 to indicate which button calls which area The numerical keypad used to specify constants provides 0 through 9 parentheses a space and a decimal point To the right are the five operands addition EE e ae SS ESS eR EES ETE TIENE Help subtraction multiplication division and Exp exponent Also provided are UnDo Close and Help Figure 113 Equation Calculator dialog In using the calculator you should press the New Equation button first then the Calculator button As the equation is keyed with the calculator the expressions will appear in the text entry box beneath the equation listing box On completing the definition close the calculator and press Store Equation to transfer the equation to the equation listing box completing the definition 134 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K YT Setup The YT Setup dialog settings determine how the Y T analysis will be performed using the areas and equations defined via the YT Areas and Equations Setup dialog The YT Setup dialog contains four text boxes and three radio buttons Of the four text boxes only Run Time and Number of Samples are user entries Computed Sample Time and Exposure Time are reported values only
51. CD ROM drive Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage depending on the number and size of spectra collected Disk level compression programs are not recommended Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory requirement is dependent on desired display resolution Two button Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse e Host Computer FireWire Protocol Pentium 3 or better processor running at 1 GHz or better Native FireWire IEEE 1394a support on the mother board or plug in interface card Minimum of 512 Mbytes of RAM CD ROM drive Hard disk with a minimum of 1 2 Gbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 25 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 23 e Host Computer GigE Protocol e 2 GHz Pentium 4 or greater e 1GB RAM or greater e CD ROM drive e Atleast one unused PCI card slot 32 bit PCI 2 3 compliant 32 bit 33 66 MHz bus e Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 65535 colors with at least 128 Mbyte of memory Memory requirement is dependent on desired display resolution e Hard disk with a minimum of 1 Gbyte available A complete installation of the program files takes about 50 Mbytes and
52. Changing the Calibration Method 1 Select Usage from the Calibration menu The dialog in Figure 58 will be displayed p Calibration Mode p Calibration Units i Auto Spect X Axis 2 Select the desired method of calibration nc i Manual e Auto Spectro selects Spectrograph Pine Laser Line Calibration as described in Chapter 7 A spectrograph supported by WinSpec 32 must be installed for this selection to be available Cancel Help Figure 56 Calibration Usage dialog e Auto Spectro selects Spectrograph Calibration as described in Chapter 7 A spectrograph supported by WinSpec 32 must be installed for this selection to be available e Manual applies the wavelength calibration to the active data The calibration is performed using the Default Calibration Setup dialog accessed by selecting Setup on the Calibration menu 83 84 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K e Off selects uncalibrated operation 3 Select the desired X Axis units This option is only available if the data set is calibrated If relative wave numbers are selected it will additionally be necessary to enter the wavelength of the laser line 4 Click on OK See the discussion of the Calibration Usage dialog in the online Help for details concerning the Calibration Usage dialog selections Calibration Menu The Calibration menu which can be called by clicking on Calibration Toc Calibration in the menu bar is shown in Figure 59
53. Clip ADC Offset ST 133 5MHz only Use the default setting Analog Gain ST 133 Medium On the ROI tab page select Spectroscopy Mode as shown in Figure 35 The Use Full Chip selection on the Main tab page overrides any ROI settings that may be present Note The choice of Spectroscopy or Imaging is only provided if the WinSpec 32 Imaging option has been installed If this choice isn t present the default state is Spectroscopy No Processes tab page functions should be selected For more information about these functions see Chapter 9 page 127 Experiment Setup Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load Rate iooKHe gt Type sow Contioller Gain Gan3 gt Resolution Bis BitAdust cipis Ed ADC Offset 50 zi Analog Gain Low Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 34 Generic ADC tab page Experiment Setup ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections New Pattern fi 4 Number Stored 0 C Imaging Mode Spectroscopy Mode Wavelength Slit Start fi E Height fi 00 Start fi End fi 340 E Group fi zl Meuse P Clear Clear All STORE Cancel Changes Use Software Binning Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Figure 35 ROI dialog 61 62 8 10 11 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K On the Data File tab page ma
54. Corrections tab page see Figure 134 151 152 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Setting Automatic Background Subtraction These steps instruct the software to automatically subtract a previously stored ae ea Pee EA background file from each new data Main DataFie ROI Setup Data Corrections acquisition Arithmetic 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu or click on the El button on the Custom Toolbar This will open the I Flatfield ee Experiment Setup dialog 2 Click on the Data Corrections tab The CCD Blemishes Came Ray Renova Data Corrections tab page will be selected OFF Figure 134 Remove C Temporal 3 Click on the Background checkbox to turn BIemisintale TIENE C Spatial on background subtraction Type in the Ed SEn name of a background file if it is in the 90 4 current directory Alternatively click on the button at the end of the entry window to open the file browser to select the Acquire Focus Cancel Help background file if it is in a different directory Figure 134 Data Corrections tab page 4 Once the Background filename has been entered click on the OK button This saves the background filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Background is turned off The filename entered in the Background box will be subtracted from each new file before it is displayed or stored If both Flatfield and Background are selecte
55. DELAYED TRIGGER OUT eee 190 Deleting data files sees 82 Demo nterface sereni etie eerte iti 45 Detector pixel Width eno ses es oet 93 DG535 ACTIVE mode 4 ceca etre tegens 195 bracket pulsing m ipee 196 continuous exponential mode 195 continuous linear mode sees 195 Interactive Gate Width and Delay 209 Interactive Trigger Setup eee eee etree 208 operation of Agenten 193 port address sese 194 repetitive gating setup ssseeeee 195 sequential gating setup sse 195 slope threshold amp termination 194 trigger mode Rete 194 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator 189 DUISDEESIORB Jc eere evecetnaeh EE 98 Dispersion data sets esee 99 Display color control eee ceeeeeeseceeeeeeneeceteeeeneees 122 Display tab page cesce ninine 44 EID eei tiettn s Mosier herent iets m 44 D T 44 Rotate isi RR Ree eel Ae 44 Displaying data as 3D graph 103 Division math operation 157 Documentation additional sss 20 E F BBI 2 An esi aeel tn ates 152 Edge Enhancement esses 167 179 Laplacian masks seeeee 169 parameters hen pe nO DIR 168 procedure eed ee pep nier
56. E wh ae kj ay y y x xy X x x E x x Ky Ef 7 x Kf 5 af x7 ae ye s x xy ae xf La Ef s E E Appendix C float int int unsigned unsigned double unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned char unsigned char unsigned unsigned char char int unsigned int long long long char char int in in in ch Fi in in in in in float long float float char unsigned float unsigned unsigned unsigned Ccroctict I H at o Ce et ch cb ct unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned in in ct ct in in in in in Ctt ick Gh et in in in LT int int int int int int calibnan 10 BackGrndApplied astdiode minblk numminblk calibpol 4 ADCrate ADCtype ADCresolution ADCbitAdjust gain exprem 5 80 geometric xlabel cleans NumSkpPerCln califile 16 bkgdfile 16 srccmp ydim scramble lexpos 16 lnoscan lavgexp stripfil 16 version 16 type flatFieldApplied spare 8 kin trig mode empty 702 clkspd us HWaccumFlag StoreSync BlemishApplied CosmicApplied CosmicType CosmicThreshold NumFrames MaxIntensity MinIntensity ylabel LABELMAX ShutterType shutterComp readoutMode WindowSize clkspd interface type long ioAdd1 long ioAdd2 long ioAdd3 int intLevel Data Structure
57. Error Creating Controller message sees eene nennen 260 Ethernet Network is not accessible nennen nennen 260 OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update eese 261 Program Error Message 2 ee eed rH e s EU p t i eee ee dp eet EPA oe da 262 Serial violations have occurred Check interface cable sss 263 Appendix GIOSSAMY Me 265 Warranty amp Servicen trecentis oia Dane a civi EE nn aveion niano inienn ienasi 267 Limited Warranty une eet teo enter tr aaron RR PER ED ae e PETERE eR Et Cogo 267 Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty eesseesseseseeeeeeeenee eerte 267 Limited One 1 Year Warranty on Refurbished or Discontinued Products 267 XP Vacuum Chamber Limited Lifetime Warranty essere 267 Sealed Chamber Integrity Limited 12 Month Warranty seen 268 Vacuum Integrity Limited 12 Month Warranty seen 268 Image Intensifier Detector Limited One Year Warranty esee 268 X Ray Detector Limited One Year Warranty eese 268 Software Limited Warranty essere neret nennen nnne nenne 268 Owner s Manual and Troubleshooting eese 269 Your Responsibility eere ie eA bee e ees 269 Contact nfOrriatloD 4 ode cerent tees ot ote terere Eire sete posed ac etoptese o rese ao ote ete CE ties 270 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 F
58. Figure 124 Assumed CCD Array Orientation 143 144 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Spectroscopy Mode In Spectroscopy Mode the default if the Imaging option has not been installed all pixels in a column are automatically binned The effect is to produce a single strip of data that is then displayed as a spectrum If Use Full Chip is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips as there are pixel strips on the chip allowing a full frame image to be acquired If Use Region of Interest is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips spectra as there are defined ROIs Imaging Mode In Imaging Mode available only if the option has been installed you have the ability to acquire full frame or ROI specific images If the Imaging option has not been installed images can only be acquired through the Use Full Chip function on the Experiment Setup Main tab page When this is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips as there are pixel strips on the chip allowing a full frame image to be acquired Binning Group and Height parameters Overview Binning is the process of adding the data from adjacent pixels together to form a single pixel sometimes called a super pixel The combination of pixels can be along the X axis the Y axis or along both axes The combination can occur while data is being shifted into the shift register hardware binning or after the data has been sent to the
59. Group determines the Y axis binning Image ROIs can overlap c Click on Store to store the newly created ROI The Number Stored will be updated Repeat this process until you have finished adding ROIs 5 To edit an existing pattern click on the spin buttons until the pattern number is displayed in the Edit Pattern field 150 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K 6 Then make your changes TIP If you are changing the Wavelength X axis values in Spectroscopy Mode select the first pattern and enter your changes there 7 Click on Store to store the changed ROI pattern Note To scan the full CCD chip at any time simply select the Use Full Chip radio button on the Main tab page and begin acquisition Defining ROIs by Mouse Input Often you can easily identify a region of interest by visually inspecting the full chip image When this can be done it is very easy to define the ROI graphically as follows 1 First click on the Use Full Chip radio Experiment Setup button Experimental Setup Main tab page DE i i a ee so that a full chip image will be acquired Main DataFile ROI Setup l Data Corrections Then click on Run Alternatively if you already have an image open this image and TE fl zi Number Stored 0 display it on screen Imaging Mode Spectroscopy Mode 2 Next click on the Use Region of Interest radio button Main tab page Then click on saa ok the ROI Setup tab to display the ROI Setup stat EIE ES tab pag
60. In the first setup Normal the shutter is opened when External Sync goes low Because it takes Daen Time Seva time to open a shutter data may be missed while the T Wear TLL ij shutter is opening In the second setup Preopen the Edge Trigger edse Z shutter is opened when the NOTSCAN signal at the a Fee EGE cancel Hep SCAN BNC on the back of the ST 133 goes high The advantage is that the shutter is fully opened when the Figure 120 Timing Tab page exposure triggered by External Sync begins The External Sync with Continuous disadvantage is that ambient light is no longer being Cleans Selected blocked from the array during the period between NOTSCAN going high and the External Sync going low Continuous cleans provides a way to get rid of the signal that accumulates on the array during that interval Full Speed sync C Safe Mode async Chapter 10 Shutter Normal Shutter Preopen l NOTSCAN NSSN y Read Read Read I External Sync i negative polarity shown Cleaning Open Close Open Close Open Open l Close Open Open 141 Close Close lt tep te tR l First wait Data Second wait Data Third wait Data and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Figure 121 External Sync Timing Diagram Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close l l Shutter Preopen Open Close
61. In the real world they can be separated by several pixels so that when the spectrograph goes to 0 nm the peak can show up 5 pixels to the right of the array center for example It is the function of the Calibration Offset is to compensate for this It is a wavelength which when sent to the Acton will cause the zero order to land in the center of the array This offset is then added to every wavelength sent to the Acton This offset does not depend on the scan pattern of the ROI used A second kind of Offset is used when x ROIs are programmed into the CCD The program is designed to keep the requested wavelength in the center of the ROI pattern in the center of a full x axis display If a full x axis is scanned or if the ROI is symmetrical just ignore the first and last 10 pixels e g then this ROI Offset is zero In the case of a very asymmetrical ROI where the first 512 pixels of a 1024 pixel array are skipped the center of the array is pixel 1 1024 2 512 5 and the center of the ROI is 51341024 2 768 5 If the requested wavelength went to the center of the array rather than the center of the ROI it would be just outside the scanned pixels The ROI Offset is used to compensate for this In this example the ROI Offset is 768 5 512 5 256 pixels This offset is converted to the equivalent wavelength at the requested wavelength and subtracted in this case from the requested wavelength before being sent to the Acton Suppos
62. Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Your Responsibility The above Limited Warranties are subject to the following terms and conditions 1 You must retain your bill of sale invoice and present it upon request for service and repairs or provide other proof of purchase satisfactory to Princeton Instruments You must notify the Princeton Instruments factory service center within 30 days after you have taken delivery of a product or part that you believe to be defective With the exception of customers who claim a technical issue with the operation of the product or part all invoices must be paid in full in accordance with the terms of sale Failure to pay invoices when due may result in the interruption and or cancellation of your one 1 year limited warranty and or any other warranty expressed or implied All warranty service must be made by the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option an authorized service center Before products or parts can be returned for service you must contact the Princeton Instruments factory and receive a return authorization number RMA Products or parts returned for service without a return authorization evidenced by an RMA will be sent back freight collect These warranties are effective only if purchased from the Princeton Instruments factory or one of our authorized manufacturer s representatives or distributors Unless sp
63. KB ST 133 2MHz EEV 1024x1024 CCD47_10 System and System Component Descriptions The following information briefly describes Princeton Instruments brand systems and the system components For more information contact your Princeton Instruments representative or Customer Support Systems 2D OMA V Cryogenically cooled focal plane array FPA based system for low light level NIR imaging 0 8um 1 7um InSight Includes an f 3 9 imaging spectrograph integrated with a high performance digital CCD The system is pre aligned and focused at the factory allowing for effortless integration into experiments MicroMA X Name used for some ST 133 based imaging systems usually with an RTE head The 5 MHz version is characterized by duplex head cable OMA V Cryogenically cooled Photodiode array PDA based system for spectroscopy applications PDA Low cost spectroscopy system uses ST 121 controller PentaMAX A D electronics are in the head so no controller is necessary Runs with PCI card only Both unintensified and intensified versions are available PhotonMAX EMCCD electron multiplying CCD Optimized for both traditional CCD and on chip multiplication gain operation Internal controller Vacuum guaranteed for the life of the camera PI Echelle Spectrograph that achieves high spectral resolution over the entire wavelength range of the camera one of several compatible Princeton Instruments cameras without any moving parts The sys
64. Layout x General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor Normal Graphs Ez Active 3D Graph Si Cursor ES Marker Graphs em Background E Normal Hidden Surface E Marker Hidden re Axis v Save as Default Cancel Help Figure 107 Color tab page Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 123 Select a different color by clicking on the Color xl swatch of the desired color Then click on OK 7 Basic colors to close the Color dialog and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog The axes af f mr and colors will now appear with the new color Repeating the process open the Color dialog again and restore the default color Again click on OK to close the Color dialog and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog The axes and labels will now be displayed in the original color Define Custom Colors gt gt Caneel Figure 108 Display Layout Color Palette d a New ROI and Intensity Range Open the Range tab page Note that you can change the displayed intensity range as well as the X Y range Try entering more restricted ranges and note how the displayed image changes Changing the X Y range by entering new values is functionally equivalent to changing the displayed area by dragging the cursor as previously described Selecting a narrower intensity range results in pixels brighter and darker than the range limits being displayed as white and black respe
65. On the Parameters tab page select either Figure 159 Post processing Histogram Histogram or Cumulative Histogram Parameter tab page g whichever is wanted 6 On the Parameters tab page under Values enter the Low Intensity and High Intensity values These are the Y Max and Y min Then enter the Group Size which is the range of intensity that the software will group together as a single data point In other words if the Group Size is 50 pixels having intensities in the range of 1 50 will be counted and graphed as a single point on the histogram 7 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 17 Printing Introduction WinSpec 32 can be used to print images directly Methods are listed below both for direct printing and for using the clipboard to transfer the image to another program for printing Setting up the Printer 1 Open the file you want to GOIEGI 2 x print Make sure that r Printer window is the active one Name ZETENES EINE From the File menu open J gt OP Status Ready the Print Setup dialog Type HP LaserJet 5Si 55i MX PS Figure 160 Where PISE LJSSI 2 The Print Setup dialog is Comment HPLISSI Software 192 168 44 217 similar to that found in Paper Orientation many Windows programs Size Lette
66. Open Close Open Close NOTSCAN SOMO IP Read ke Read Ke Read External Sync i l l l negative polarity shown Fd l l t dep ie tR First wait Data Second wait Data Third wait Data and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Figure 122 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram Figure 122 shows the same timing diagram with the addition of continuous cleans indicated by the shaded areas labeled CC Continuous cleans are additional clean cycles and defined by the same parameter values as the standard clean cycles When the External Sync trigger arrives during continuous cleaning the current clean cycle must be completed before the exposure will begin In time critical experiments the number of rows per clean set on the Hardware Setup Controller Camera tab page should be 1 or 2 to minimize the delay 142 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Continuous Cleans Instruction If the controller and the detector support it a specialized cleaning function can be used when _ moleaneta Display neice seg continuous cleans is active This function Continuous Cleans Instruction can only be Cleans activated if the checkbox for it is visible on the NES ERES D mH Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page see RON E Figure 123 Clean Mode Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal ETT AN shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster continuous clean
67. ROI the entire chip or a specified subregion are automatically binned The effect is to generate a single strip of data that is then displayed as one spectrum In WinSpec the ROI definition and binning parameters for spectroscopy are grouped under the headings of Wavelength and Slit The Wavelength X axis parameters determine the start point and length of a data strip and the amount of X axis binning By default the Group value is 1 no binning but can be increased to indicate the number of pixels being binned to increase the sensitivity at the expense of resolution The Slit Y axis parameters determine the vertical location and height of the Y axis columns When multiple ROIs are defined all of the ROIs will have the same Wavelength values multiple data strips will be generated and multiple spectra will be displayed The Slit values however may vary from ROI to ROI as long as the Slits do not overlap Imaging Mode Imaging mode allows you to define rectangular groups of pixels of any size that will be binned together to create an image rather than a spectrum Separate Group parameter values can be entered in the X and Y directions for every defined parameter to give you the greatest possible flexibility in controlling the readout Although modest binning may be employed to increase the sensitivity there is a tradeoff in that it adversely affects the image resolution As a result binning when imaging is normally limited to a few pixe
68. Semicolon r Line Termination Characters Line Feed Carriage Return Tab C Carriage Return Line Feed C Carriage Return Only Line Termination Characters Select one M ine Feed Only of the following as the line termination character to be used Line Feed Carriage Return Carriage Return Line Feed Carriage Return Only Line Feed Only Cancel Figure 117 ASCII Output Setup dialog 138 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Procedure 1 Select the Experiment SetuplData File tab page 2 Enter the filename to be used when WinSpec saves the TXT file Click on the browse button to the right of the Name field and select the directory where the file should be saved You can also select other file saving parameters such as auto increment file overwrite or file append 3 Select ASCII Output File on the Experiment SetuplProcesses tab page The ASCII Output Setup dialog will open 4 Setthe Delimiter and Line Termination Characters 5 Click on OK to save your entries and close the dialog Then click on Acquire or Focus to initiate data acquisition 6 Atthe end of the acquisition the TXT file will be saved automatically Depending on your data file entries Step 2 the acquired data may also be saved automatically as an SPE file or you can save it manually Chapter 10 Cleaning Introduction An acquisition is made up of an exposure period and a readout period For the rest of the time the camera is waiting to
69. The Setup Calibration menu contains two items Setup and Usage Usage which call the Calibration Setup and Calibration Usage dialogs Brief descriptions follow Figure 59 Calibration menu Setup Once a single spectrum has been acquired or loaded the menu item Setup opens the Calibration Setup dialog A calibration session consists of finding the peaks marking the known peaks to be used for calibration and saving the calibration data as the default or applying it to the active data set only Usage Selects the Calibration mode and Units Once the wavelength calibration has been performed it can be applied by selecting Manual or turned off by selecting Off Selections can either be saved as default power up parameters or be applied to the active data set only For more information see the online Help discussion of the Calibration Usage dialog Wavelength Calibration Procedure Before a wavelength calibration can be performed it is necessary to either load a spectrum or acquire one For good calibration results the spectrum should have well defined peaks for which you know the wavelength A calibration requires at least two points defined by pixel and by units Naturally the more points used the more accurate the calibration The ideal calibration spectrum would have one peak at the start of the array or region of interest one at the end of the array or region of interest and one midway between the end peaks In real life the ide
70. The large box in the Define Equations section of the window Each defined and stored equation is listed here Equations can include areas constants parentheses operands and even other equations The left most item for each equation listing is the Equation designator En where n is an integer in the range of 1 to 4 Note An asterisk appearing before an equation designator e g E3 indicates that E3 contains areas that lie outside the calibration range of the detector To the right of the designator is the space allocated for the equation which can be up 64 characters in length This includes space for a user comment Optional user comments are inserted by entering a colon after the equation and then keying the comment text Expressions for the equation are keyed into the text entry box located below the listing box For example suppose two areas Al and A2 had been defined and you wished define the equation E1 A1 A2 followed by the comment This is a test The sequence would be 1 Click on the New Equation button 2 Click in the text entry box below the equation listing box to insert the text cursor 3 Key A1 A4 This is a test do not key the quotation marks 4 Click on the Store Equation button The new equation with the comment would appear in the equation listing box 5 Click on OK to close the window and make the equation available for Y T analysis Note that this equation would be stored so that it would also
71. Then set the Port Address to the GPIB address PotType GPIB of the DG535 Default setting is 15 Port Address fis i Once you have selected the correct port address click on Initialize Port If the software cannot find the pulser on this port such as if the pulser is not turned on or if the address setting incorrect you will get an error message If this happens OK Cancel Download To DG535 Help check the address check the cable connections and check Figure 171 DG535 Comm Port tab page that the pulser is powered Click on the Triggers tab Figure 172 Triggers Gating Comm Port Select the Trigger mode Input Trigger Mode either Internal in which the ainera Bm zd DG535 free runs or RON D mi External in which it is triggered from an external Threshol Elton ITesHald Volts source Slope Temmination If operating in the Internal UM Tues E trigger mode set the Trigger Negative 50 Ohms Frequency in Hz Consult the DG535 Manual to determine the maximum Trigger Frequency that can be used in your application If operating in the External ote Powngad ace e trigger mode specify the Slope Threshold and Figure 172 DG535 Triggers tab page Termination appropriate for the trigger source Chapter 18 12 13 Pulser Operation 195 Click on the Gating tab to DG535 x fee 2 the Gating tab page to Triggers Gating Com
72. VS VY image will be displayed as described in Chapter 8 Figure 53 High Intensity Lamp Spectrum Multiple Files It is also possible to open multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for opening e Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected e Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously e hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected e Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected e Proceed in similar fashion to select each file to be opened Once all files to be opened have been selected click on Open or double click on a selected file and all of the selected files will be opened There are a number of additional options and operations that can be performed from the Open dialog For example clicking the Display Layout button will directly open the Display Layout dialog described in Chapter 8 In addition options for the organization of the Open dialog itself can be selected by means of the icons to the right of the Look In field or by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the file listing area of the box but
73. With this instruction the Monee Skips delay between an External Sync trigger and wicca E i the start of exposure is minimized Hasc E F Continuous cleans instruction will be used in place of the standard continuous cleans if both Use Continuous Cleans Instruction on the Cleans Skips tab page and tet m Continuous Cleans on the Experiment Figure 123 Cleans Skips tab page Setup Timing tab page are checked Continuous Cleans Instruction ROls and Cleaning An ROI is a user defined subsection of the array As with full frames the defined clean cycles are used to keep charge from accumulating on the array while it is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array The specialized cleaning function for an ROI Vertical Skips is applied when the ROT is read out Vertical Skips parameters are used to shorten the readout discard time for the rows before and after the ROI Minimum Block Size sets the number of invalid rows horizontal lines of the CCD to bin before the valid data Number of Blocks sets the number of these blocks to shift and discard before going to a geometric grouping algorithm Refer to Vertical Skips on page 48 for detailed information about vertical skips and the grouping algorithm Note The 2 D OMA array does not support vertical skips and all of the rows on the array are read out and converted before the non ROI information is discarded The default Vertical Skips set
74. a new filename perform the following steps 1 Select Save As from the File Save As 21x menu The Data File Save As Save in Cd DATA e ef dialog Figure 54 appears ARGONT SPE WG three strip SPE WG 2strip SPE WABkne CIRCUIT SPE AA 1035strip SPE A 3001 SPE VA Blue Foot spe m 10morestrip SPE d 3strip SPE WA CAM HG ARGON SPE y 10strip SPE WA 4Sirames 512sq SPE y Cellb HID LAMP SPE y 16strip SPE y adjust SPE yd YT MOON4 SPE YA I strip SPE WA Back SPE y Cels Spray4 spe yA 256strip SPE y Bkand SPE y Cels n quickly and easily select the target directory s Save as type wink Data x Cancel 3 Type ina name for the file oooi MAE es Z Windows 95 long file name convention applies It is not necessary to add the spe automatically according to the specified file type extension 2 Open the directory where you want the file saved Clicking on the button at the right of the Save In field opens a browser function that will allow you to File name d lamp SPE Figure 54 Data File Save As dialog It will be added Save as type Indicates the file type The aines Data spel TIFF File tif data types currently supported are listed in B bit TIFF File tif Figure 55 If AII Files is selected you will Lo be able to save the file with any extension The file however will be saved in the SPE file type format Only the data is saved This could have some un
75. al Chip WXVchip opt icti tee t e be ce rie 218 Iiincorniifen o nC 218 Martual Chip Setup 2 octo rte eite tes pere leah PE Hee ete e Ped ertet eno 219 Experimental Limifg ioi ee ee eti nte eei ke t preset He etes 222 AV TPS eset ete e NO ER LER E te Ee D LR ones 222 Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 225 System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference esses 225 System and System Component Descriptions eeseeseseeeeeeneeeneeeeen nennen 228 Systems ereenn mm 228 Controllers aanere e A E AA tos A Tn EE A E E A Even Meuse 229 Camiras IDetectors eee e e ke ter ee E Ut iagniceelagearpetedosee saueetesincnibtens 230 Pulsets edet eet d tr toL erdt 230 High Voltage Power Supplies esee nennen 230 Miscellaneous Components eese nennen 231 CCD Array DesignatotsS eter rr tf ecce hU rte fatte cetero ipte eR Reed 231 Table of Contents 1X Appendix B Calibration Lines cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 Appendix C Data SITUCLUTO sroicire das erar adeunda Ged vate ocd adita iva rU VES 235 Version 1 43 Header eee pou id eas eee eh esee tere ete ta 235 Versi n 1 6 Header iui uet eae etse aede trs 236 Version 2 5 Header 3 23 04 e ree A e nee inna ais 239 Startof Data 4100 ha a eid d e e ei elena 243 Definition of Arra
76. amount x is binned grouped in hw unsigned int starty top y start value unsigned int endy bottom y value unsigned int groupy amount y is binned grouped in hw ROIinfoblk 10 ROI Starting Offsets ae ROI 1 1512 as ROI 2 1524 Lx ROI 3 1536 LE ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 Js ROI 6 1572 75 ROI 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 y ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 char FlatField 120 1632 Flat field file name char background 120 1752 Background sub file name char blemish 120 1872 Blemish file name float software ver 1992 Software version char UserInfo 1000 1996 2995 user data long WinView id 2996 Set to 0x01234567L if file was created by WinX Version 2 5 K x ad ay ay E xf x P Ef xy x ay Las y x Ey Ai 7 Ej lr y ae ur x Rif E Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times 3000 3488 x axis calibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration xcalibration ycalibration Start of X Calibration Structure double offset 3000 double factor 3008 char current unit 3016 char reservedl 3017 char string 40 3018 char reserved2 40 3058 char calib valid 3098 char input_unit 3099 char polynom unit 3100 char polynom order 3101 char calib count 3102 double pixel position 10
77. an Accumulations setting of one Number of Images equals the number of exposures each of which is followed by a readout After each exposure the Gate Width and Gate Delay change as programmed before the next exposure occurs f multiple Accumulations are programmed each exposure is repeated n times where n is the number of accumulations specified Every accumulation is processed before the gate delay and width change for the next shot The total number of exposures equals the specified Number of Images times the number of Accumulations ATTENTION Accumulations can be set on the Sequential Gating Setup dialog and on the Experiment SetupIMain tab page The two settings must be the same for proper operation Gate Width The starting and ending gate widths are independently set The first Shot will have the Starting gate width and the last Shot will have the Ending gate width This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type Gate Delay The starting and ending gate delay values are independently set The first Shot will be taken at the Starting delay with respect to T and the last Shot will occur at the Ending delay with respect to To This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type ATTENTION The precise timing of both the gate and signal at the camera will additionally depend on a number of different delay mechanisms that can significantly affect the experiment These are discussed for the PI MAX camera in so
78. and Marker Curves don t appear the problem may be with the assigned colors which should be different from the normal graph color and different from the background color On the Display Layout Color tab page it the Active 3D Graphs button that allows the cursor curve color to be set The Marker Graphs button is used to set the marker curves color Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 111 Hidden Surfaces The following procedure shows you how to shift the view to see the hidden or underside of the data 1 Open the Display Layout dialog and make the following changes Range Change Y so that the range is from 40 to 1 not from 1 to 40 3D Layout Select Show Hidden Surface and deselect Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Remove Hidden Lines should be selected Change the Z Axis Endpoint to X 25 and Y 0 The Z Axis Endpoint can be set by entering values up to 80 X either polarity and 80 Y positive only or graphically by using the mouse If you click on Adjust Z Graphically and then on OK the Z Axis Adjust window will appear With the cursor in that window depress the left mouse button and drag the cursor around the WinSpec 32 desktop until you see the desired axis orientation Then release the mouse button Because the data is displayed the moment you depress the mouse button and then updated as you drag the cursor you can see the effects of dragging the axis while moving it When working with a high density data
79. at the left side of the Status Bar Status Bar help messages are also provided for the menu selections Additional Documentation Additional documentation can be found in the WinSpec32 Documentation directory on the hard drive where WinSpec 32 was installed Among the files that may be in this directory are WINHEAD TXT This file contains documentation on the header structure for WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 Data Files TXT files can be opened with any ASCII text editor WinX readme doc This is a read me file that contains the latest information on new features fixed problems and work arounds for issues not yet solved WinX32 Automation 3 X for Visual Basic pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Visual Basic User Interface component is selected during installation It describes how to create your own Snap Ins by using Visual Basic Professional Edition and the WinX32 Automation files Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader WinX32 Programming for Macro Record pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Macro option is installed It provides detailed information on how to create and edit macro programs for WinSpec 32 Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader The Macro option is not supplied with the standard WinSpec 32 program Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 To ensure that the computer you have can operate the Princeton Instruments equipment please first read the system requirements below carefully WinSpec 32 s requi
80. binning size 184 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Histogram Calculation Introduction Two types of histograms are available for graphing the distribution of intensities of an image The Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together The X axis indicates the intensity and the Y axis displays the number of pixels in that intensity range The Cumulative Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together once again using the X axis to show intensity This time however the Y axis indicates the total number of pixels with intensity less than or equal to the range Thus the Cumulative Histogram is always an increasing function Procedure EE X 1 Select Histogram from the Process menu Input Parameters Output 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input Operation image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the C Cumulative Histogram button to the right of the field Val 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame sind containing the data on which the operation is Low E to be performed nee p x 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Gie ra Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values Apply Close Help 5
81. browser accessed by the button to the right of the field C Sum m Cross Sectional Type 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed C Cross Section Cross Section 4 If you want to process only part of the Input occus Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively draw an ROI in the active window using the mouse and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to Mouse Apply Close Help enter those values Figure 157 Cross Section Parameters 5 Onthe Parameters tab page select either A ab page Sum or Average If Sum is selected all pixel values in the X Y or Z direction according to whether X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Cross Section is selected will be summed to generate the output If Average is selected the average of all of the pixel values in the X Y or Z direction will be summed to produce the output 182 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K 6 On the Parameters tab page select X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Cross Section whichever is wanted Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Binning and Skipping Introduction Selecting Binning on the Process menu opens the Binning and Skipping window
82. card Type FAST ROI Setup tab card Make no changes to the settings on this tab card unless you have re enabled Normal Operating Mode ROI setup for Virtual Chip High Speed Mode is performed through the Virtual Chip dialog 10 From the Setup menu select Virtual Chip and enter the following settings High Speed Mode Enabled Virtual Chip Definition The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel virtual chip The X and Y dimensions are established by the external mask The virtual chip is fully flexible in the X direction However the set of choices for the Y dimension has been pre selected for optimal Chapter 20 Software Options 221 performance Note that the origin point that Princeton Instruments uses for a CCD array is 1 1 Chip Y Dimension 47 Select this dimension from the drop down list Chip X Dimension 47 Enter this dimension manually 11 Click on the Load Default Values button This enters the default ROI values These values are Start pixels of 1 1 End pixels based on the Chip Y and Chip X dimensions and Groups of 1 Region of Interest The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel ROI i e the entire virtual chip An ROI that is a subset of the virtual chip can be defined X Start 1 Y Start 1 X End 47 Y End 47 X Group 1 Y Group 1 Click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button This will download the definition set up the ROI and calculate the readout time Observe the calculated readout time If you
83. correct and the point on the profiles intersected by the large cross hair extensions will accurately indicate the cursor position Also the information box will accurately report the pixel number and intensity at the cursor position 5 95 Display Range 1 Click on s The data display will shift so that it only fills the 5 to 95 region of the window range Had the data initially extended all the way to the window boundary the data display would have been slightly compressed to fit within the 5 95 range Click on Es restoring the image to its initial appearance Before advancing to the next topic open the View menu Then select the Small cursor and deselect Cross Sections 106 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse drag a rectangular region on the image as shown in Figure 79 Figure 79 Hid lamp spe 3D graph with region selected for viewing 2 Click on amp Zoom In The view will change so that only the selected region is Figure 80 Hide lamp spe 3D graph expanded to show defined region 3 Click on Ql Undo All Zoom In The original view will be restored Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 107 Information box On the View menu select Info The information box should appear as shown in Figure 81 The first line reports the intensity and pixel number at the cursor position The second line reports the frame number strip number and the pixel number The int
84. count 3102 valid calibration data pairs double pixel position 10 3103 pixel pos of calibration data double calib value 10 3183 calibration VALUE at above pos double polynom coeff 6 3263 polynom COEFFICIENTS double laser position 3311 laser wavenumber for relative WN char reserved3 3319 reserved BYTE new calib flag 3320 If set to 200 valid label below char calib label 81 3321 Calibration label NULL term d char expansion 87 3402 Calibration Expansion area Start of Y Calibration Structure 3489 3977 double offset 3489 offset for absolute data scaling double factor 3497 factor for absolute data scaling char current unit 3505 selected scaling unit char reservedl 3506 reserved char string 40 3507 special string for scaling char reserved2 40 3547 reserved char calib valid 3587 flag if calibration is valid char input_unit 3588 current input units for calib value char polynom_unit 3589 linear UNIT and used in the B polynom coeff char polynom order 3590 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM char calib count 3591 valid calibration data pairs double pixel position 10 3592 pixel pos of calibration data double calib value 10 3672 calibration VALUE at above pos Appendix C Data Structure 243 double polynom_coeff 6 3752 polynom COEFFICIENTS double laser position 3800 laser wavenumber for relative WN char reserved3 3808 reserved BYTE new calib flag 3809 If set to 200 valid label below ch
85. damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gate mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your PI MAX manual for detailed information PI MAX3 Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Gate mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gated mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your PI MAX3 manual for detailed information 72 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Data Collection Procedures Controller Specific WARNING ST 133 Controller The procedure that follows for these controllers is in two parts Video Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor not the computer monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized data collection begun can begin If acquiring data with a PI MAX PI MAX2 or PI MAX3 intensified camera make sure the ambient light levels are low Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gate mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources Refer to your camera system manual for detailed information specific to experiment setup and data acq
86. displayed see Figure 130 The side effect ROIs are necessary to accommodate hardware Figure 130 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resulting Data DEFINED Labeled boxes are user defined ROIs Those without labels are computer generated limitations Methods of Defining and Storing ROIs A region of interest full width or partial width can be defined by 1 Opening the Easy Bin dialog and entering the values for a single full chip wide spectroscopy mode ROI 2 Entering values for the Wavelength X and Slit Y parameters from the keyboard Dragging the mouse cursor on a displayed image to define a rectangular region and then clicking the Mouse button Before using this method you must acquire a Full Chip image Otherwise you will get a Size of Image in Active Window is Incompatible with Current Chip Size message when you try to define an ROI Note In Spectroscopy mode ROIs created via the mouse are limited to full chip width like the ones depicted in Figure 127 This is not the case in Imaging mode 148 4 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Defining the region with the mouse and then changing parameter values via the keyboard before storing the pattern This allows you to change a full width ROI created by mouse selection to a partial width ROI like the one in Figure 128 After an ROI is defined its pattern can be stored edited or deleted All defined areas will be indicated on the displayed image after they
87. eave echinacea E aoo eet tii lee de wie 17 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 susss 21 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup sene 33 Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 57 Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection sss 65 Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files TI Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration see 83 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration ssssseeeee 91 Chapter 8 Displaying the Data sese 101 15 16 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 K Introduction The WinSpec manual has been written to give new users of Princeton Instruments detector camera systems step by step guides to basic data collection storage and processing operations The most up to date version of this software manual and other Princeton Instruments manuals can be found and downloaded from ftp ftp princetoninstruments com public Manuals Princeton Instruments The WinSpec manual is divided into the following three parts e Part 1 Getting Started is primarily intended for the first time user who is familiar with Windows based applications or for the experienced user who wants to review These chapters lead you through hardware setup experiment setup data collection file h
88. entries and close the dialog Then click on Acquire or Focus to initiate data acquisition On Line YT Description Y T Analysis allows you to easily monitor and study the way spectral data changes as a function of time This is particularly useful in characterizing time dependent processes Y T Analysis provides for defining areas on the data where each area is a region bounded by a starting and ending wavelength and containing a certain number of pixels whose wavelength values lie within the region The value of an area is the sum of the intensities of the pixels in the area If a process study produces spectral lines that change with time it may be useful to define a separate area for each line of interest where each line is precisely spanned by its area The value of each area can be the sum of the total intensities defined with respect to the baseline or the values can be baseline corrected in which case the value of each area is the sum of the intensities with respect to an imaginary line joining the first and last pixels of the area This latter method is more accurate with a sloping baseline After areas have been defined they can then be mathematically operated on as specified in user entered equations These equations allow you to can add subtract multiply divide or otherwise manipulate up to eight areas You can also include constants or even other equations The Y T analysis modes provided give you control over when the equatio
89. exponential mode 191 continuous linear mode sess 191 operation of soiis ras epis ree in 189 repetitive gating setup 191 sequential gating setup sse 191 PIHWDBEINI eei rere 254 Pixels binning or grouping eese 144 Polynomial method of calibration 89 Post processing binning and skipping eee 182 CLOSS SECHONS ss oe erect eee tee zeae 181 edge enhancement eee 168 histOgrams 2 teer hers 184 morphology oteo aers or the Eres 172 sbarpening esteem exer 170 SMOOUHING i or petri RERUE 171 threshold and clipping sessss 180 Print Preview usos diete e fen tonnes 186 Print Preview buttons Close eth RS Re 187 Next Page ePi s 187 Prev Pagen endis steenaenneee nonet 187 laai i EEE EEEE qe Dep ten 187 Two Pagen eate ee a ea 187 Zoom Ii Hehe iste olt ietes 187 ZOOM OUt ote titanate are 187 Print Setup dialog box esses 185 Index Printing from WinSpec 32 sss 185 color mapping e eter 186 saving as TIF file before printing 188 Screen capture eene retten nee 188 Process Mask operations eeeess 167 Ieferences ienoscmr e tere peret tes 177 PTG ACTIVE mode tene teen 197 Auxiliary Trigger output sees 199 continuous exponent
90. file name and select Properties With PI Shell Extension deselected only the standard Windows 95 file property page will appear With PI Shell Extension selected additional property pages will appear Visual Basic User Interface Allows DLLs programmed using Visual Basic 5 or higher to be executed from WinSpec 32 Options Allows you to install or uninstall the WinSpec 32 options Some options may require a password Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinSpec 32 Refer to Appendix F 30 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Starting WinSpec 32 Before starting WinSpec 32 follow the hardware interconnection and power up instructions in the hardware manuals supplied with your system Then open the Windows Program manager and start WinSpec 32 by clicking on WinSpec32 in the PI Acton folder see Figure 1 Note You can start WinSpec 32 even if you have not installed the interface card or if you have not turned on the controller If there is no interface card WinSpec 32 will run in Demo mode This mode allows you to look at and post process previously stored data such as the sample data installed with the software and to become familiar with experiment setup and data acquisition Some features will not be available because the program looks for information from the controller and camera while WinSpec 32 is loading and initializing CONF d 4 WinSpec32 y E Softkey Documents s LA StartU
91. has been entered on the Define Spectrograph Gratings tab page the next step is to select and Gratings sits Mirrors Spectrograph To Move move the grating These operations are performed Spex 270M on COM2 zi using the Gratings tab page Figure 26 of the Grating fi 200 Move Spectrograph dialog The procedure follows Move to o nm 1 Open the Move Spectrograph dialog by id opes NENNEN N E selecting Move from the Spectrograph menu Max Freq o Steps sec On the Gratings tab page verify that the z indicated active spectrograph is the correct Ramp o Hm one Cancel Help Select the grating to be moved The available gratings were previously entered on the Figure 26 Move Spectrograph Gratings Define Spectrograph Gratings tab page tab page Enter the new position in nm in the Move to field Enter any speed settings and click on OK to execute the selections The grating will come to rest with the selected wavelength at the center of the CCD array Note There may well be some finite error in the final position This error can be measured and compensated for using the Spectrograph Calibrate procedure 54 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Entering Information for Software Controlled Slits and or Mirrors Some spectrometers allow you to control the slit width and or Main Gratings Slits Mirrors Connect do mirror selection under r Controllable Slits software control
92. have been stored If a pattern is being edited its outline will be green and all other patterns will have red outlines In Imaging mode purple outlines will be drawn if two or more patterns are defined that do not have identical Wavelength Start and End points these outlines represent additional data that will be included in the image acquired using the ROI Setup The display of defined regions of interest is automatically updated when patterns are added or cleared Stored patterns are save to disk when you exit the WinSpec 32 and are automatically loaded the next time you start the program Notes 1 Right clicking inside an ROI opens the ROI Context menu which in addition to providing auto scale and zoom functions enables the labeling of image and graphical data The Experiment Setup Save Load tab page allows all experiment set parameters including ROI to be saved in a user designated file for later recall See the discussion of the Save Load tab page in the online Help Defining an ROI via Easy Bin Easy Bin allows you to define of a single full chip wide ROL ais Center 1 1 Select Easy Bin from the Acquisition menu f p gt e 2 On the Easy Bin dialog Figure 131 click on the appropriate radio button User Defined Binning Center 1 Establishes an ROI one pixel high a c i na c Center 10 Establishes an ROI 10 pixel high Seo re UMOR Center 100 Establishes an ROI 100 pixel high emerge
93. is selected and you click on OK the calibration will be stored in the Windows Registry and will be automatically applied to all subsequent acquired data unless a new calibration is performed If Save as Default is unselected and you click on OK the calibration in effect i e in the Calibration Setup dialog will apply to the active data file only Calibration Display and User Units The default Calibration Units are nanometers nm These units can be changed with the change taking effect immediately Calibration units to choose from are nm nanometers cm 1 wavenumbers rel cm 1 relative wavenumbers and user units units other than above For relative wavenumbers only the wavelength of the excitation laser must be entered in the Laser Wavelength box in nm Display unit choices are the same with the additional selection of pixels The Display Units selection can be different from the Calibration units except in the case of User Units Under Display Units the choices are pixels nm nanometers cm 1 wavenumbers and rel cm 1 relative Raman shift wavenumbers These units are the ones shown on the X axis whenever calibrated spectra are displayed To display files without calibration even files collected with a specific calibration select the pixel option under Display Units User Units allow the operator to scale the spectra to any arbitrary unit Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration 89 Calibration Method A calibration r
94. location of the two peaks while in pixel mode and dividing the difference reported in calibration units in the calibration mode Note The absolute value of the peak is reported in the Info box If it is not already open open it by selecting Info from the View menu 98 Dispersion WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Press Continue to initiate another Adjust computation cycle The reported error should decrease Repeat the cycle two or three times until no further reduction in the error can be achieved The final error value achieved may wander a bit with each cycle repetition reflecting the noise content of the spectrum Click OK to close the Adjust dialog and return you to the Spectrograph Calibrate dialog Now that Offset and Adjust are complete the spectrograph can move a target peak very close to the center of the display The final step is to calibrate the wavelength scaling so that peaks on the far left or the far right in the window are also accurately calibrated This is called the Dispersion calculation and again it is automated in WinSpec 32 To adjust the Dispersion calculation you will make two measurements in the lower spectral range 253 652 for Mercury one measurement with the peak at the left edge of the display and one with the peak at the right edge Then you will make two measurements in the upper spectral range 579 066 for Mercury After these steps WinSpec 32 then tries to find the combination of Focal
95. not on a file name Right clicking on a file name opens a Windows shortcut menu that provides a number of additional operations including open delete rename print properties and edit operations such as copy and cut 80 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Saving Data Files Data files must be saved to disk before exiting the software It is also recommended that you save periodically when making measurements to minimize the overall risk of data loss If you exit and there are unsaved data files you will be prompted to save them The File menu provides three Save commands as follows 1 Save Saves the active data file using the original file name and type and in the original directory folder 2 Save As The Save As dialog is used to save the active data file to a user specified file name and directory The file type can be changed 3 Save All Saves all open data files using the original file names and directories folders Sometimes during data collection or processing windows will be opened and display data with an lt untitled gt title These are temporary files and they must be saved to disk if you want to keep them The Save As dialog performs this function The Save As dialog also allows you to open a file and save it with a different name Saving Temporary Data Files The WinSpec 32 software allows you to work with temporary files files with names like lt untitled 1 gt To save these files or to save any file to
96. of approximately 8 msec Large A large shutter is one that is typically 35 mm and larger In the case of a camera having a very large CCD such as the Kodak 2k x 2k a large shutter may have been installed This setting represents a shutter compensation time of approximately 28 msec Remote Remote is primarily intended for spectroscopy applications where an external shutter would be placed ahead of the entrance slit Electronic Electronic only applies to operation with an intensified camera which would normally not be equipped with a mechanical shutter This selection would apply to both the Gate and Shutter CW modes of the IIC 100 IIC 200 IIC 300 MCP 100 and PI MAX Custom This shutter type is automatically selected if you are using a PVCAM supported camera When Custom is the shutter type you will be able to enter the shutter close compensation time in the field below the shutter type Shutter close compensation time delays readout to allow time for the shutter to fully close The close value will vary depending on the camera and the shutter used Phosphor Decay Time Used by the PI MAX3 when running in single trigger DIF mode to to delay the shift behind mask for the first image Shutter Open Compensation Time Delays the exposure until the shutter is fully open The open delay value will vary depending on the camera and the shutter used Readout Mode The readout mode is determined by the characteristics of the CCD array and
97. pter e be cedere et 110 multiple strips ertet ket 109 ROD seen 106 strip selection onei teesis orses sneis 109 Undo All Zoom In eee 106 Zoom n rnt t TROU 106 Data displayed as image autoranging ROI serene 121 axes and cross sections sssseeeee 120 axes labeling iet tern 122 brightness drerit eer ener 117 color of axes and labels 122 context window csse 112 cursor functions i nee crt imt enero 108 Display Layout dialog box 120 Display Layout Range tab page 123 information box seen 121 ROL ietenatenttete sie i RORIS 119 Data file compatibility esses TI Version 2 5 K Data Filestab page ede omen in 81 Data files closmg ugiat 81 deleting iet eno E EEE tires 82 Via File menu eie edat 82 deleting multiple files sesss 82 JCODILZIDB er ipae ES 81 Opening coca aterert e ER e RERO UE RE EERS TI reducing toCOD ise tetirerten eges 81 vA p M M 80 Data files temporary saving eee 80 Data Start ei ERR eee 244 Data structure Ver V43 se n inti bend 235 Ver 1 6 and 32 bit Versions 2 00 0 eects 236 Wer 2D cil oh icra cepe e Tee Sowa ail 239 Data Type Save AS sie seo serene 80 Data Window Context menu esses 112
98. set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update the other setting automatically When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Operation dialog to halt focus mode operation Click on Close to close the Interactive Operation dialog and return to the Experiment Setup dialog Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data Data collection can be initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog by selecting Focus from the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen To store the most recent image click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page If you want to initiate data acquisition select Focus again To store the new data to disk again click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button This completes initial data acquisition with a PentaMAX Controller Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 75 Data Collection Unintensified Cameras The following data collection procedure works for all cont
99. so the Timing Generator will adjust the input value to the nearest allowable value Gates Per Exposure Figure 195 Timing Generator Interactive Gate Width and Delay dialog Gate Delay Sets the time between the beginning of the trigger pulse either internal or external and the beginning of the photocathode gate pulse The units available are nanoseconds ns microseconds us or milliseconds ms Only some values are allowed so the Timing Generator will adjust the input value to the nearest allowable value Gates Per Exposure Allows you to specify the number of times the photocathode will be gated on during the exposure Charge will accumulate on the CCD array as those gates occur during the exposure and the accumulated charge will be readout at the end of the exposure The acquired data will contain signal from multiple exposures and read noise from a single readout Signal is limited by pixel well capacity and the A D converter for a 16 bit A D this is 65536 counts 210 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings Introduction The Custom Toolbar feature of WinSpec 32 allows you one button access to many features or combinations of features available through the software The Custom Toolbar layout and the number of buttons displayed on the Custom Toolbar can easily be changed Displaying the Custom Toolbar 1 To make the Custom Toolbar visible s
100. that the number of Accumulations set here must be the same as the value set on the Experiment Setup Main tab page for proper operation Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup The E button on the Custom Toolbar allows you to select the PTG or DG535 trigger mode liniemal Frequency 1000 S H Internal or External while acquiring data In the case of the SuperS YNCHRO you must stop C External data acquisition before you can make changes z 2 and apply them Cancel Help Internal The Timing Generator will create its own trigger signals at the selected frequency Figure 194 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup dialog External The Timing Generator will be triggered by trigger signals that originate in an external piece of equipment Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 209 Timing Generator Interactive Gate Width and Delay The lll button of the Custom Toolbar allows you to control the Gate Width Gate Delay Gate Width and Gate Delay parameters of the PTG or DG535 Timing Generator while acquiring On CCD Accumulations nsec p nsec data In the case of the SuperS YNCHRO you must stop data acquisition before you can make changes and apply them Close Help Gate Width Sets the duration of the pulse applied to the PI MAX intensifier to gate the photocathode The units available are nanoseconds ns microseconds us or milliseconds ms Only some values are allowed
101. the center of the display you should enter a slightly higher Target Wavelength and click on the Reposition button Once the peak appears near the left edge check and if necessary adjust the cursor position on the peak using the same criteria as for the Offset and Adjust operations Then click on Continue to Step 2 to initiate the second data acquisition e The spectrograph will acquire the second spectrum If the peak is close to the right edge of the display as expected click on Continue to Step 3 to initiate the third data set acquisition If the peak is not in the right position use the Reposition button to move the spectrograph as required to position the low peak near the right edge of the display Then click on Continue to Step 3 to initiate acquisition of the third data set e The spectrograph will acquire the third spectrum this time positioning the cursor on the high peak at 579 066 If the peak is close to the left edge of the display as expected click on Continue to Step 4 to initiate the fourth data set acquisition If the peak is not in the correct position use the Reposition button to move the spectrograph as required to position the high peak near the left edge of the display Then click on Continue to Step 4 to initiate acquisition of the fourth data set e After completion of the fourth data set once again check to be sure the cursor is on the correct peak and manually move it if it is not After all four reference point
102. the Acton InSpectrum 24 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K System Component Your System Notes Interface Card Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI USB 2 0 FireWire GigE Older systems use the Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI is required for Photometrics cameras and PhotonMAX Newer Princeton Instruments systems use USB 2 FireWire or GigE System Name Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller PentaMAX ST 121 ST 133 ST 133 2MHz ST 133 5MHz ST 138 Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the bottom of the unit Detector Camera and CCD Array Refer to your order and Appendix A Detector Camera Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the back of the unit Shutter Type Small lt 25 mm Large 35mm None Spectrograph Type Acton Spex or Pulser Type DG535 PG200 PTG or PTG is associated with SuperS YNCHRO the PI MAX and PI MAX2 cameras SuperS YNCHRO is associated with PI MAX3 cameras Pulser Serial Number Refer to serial label typically located on the back of the unit and in the lower left corner Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 25 Chapter 1 Installing the PCI Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows XP and Vista 32 bit to install software a
103. the Experiment Setup parameters Unlike background subtraction the shutter will open and close normally If background subtraction was selected the background file will be subtracted from the flatfield file before it is saved to disk If the Acquire Flatfield feature is found to be too limiting in some way a flatfield file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected enter the filename in the Flatfield Correction filename box on the Experiment Setup Data Corrections tab page Figure 134 Automatic Flatfield Correction These steps instruct the software to automatically divide each new data file pixel by pixel by the specified flatfield file 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu or click on the El button on the Custom Toolbar This will open the Experiment Setup dialog Click on the Data Corrections tab to select the Data Corrections tab page Figure 134 Click on the Flatfield checkbox to turn on Flatfield correction Type in the name of a flatfield correction file in the current directory Alternatively click on the button at the end of the field to open the file browser to select the flatfield correction file if it is in a different directory Once the Flatfield filename has been specified click on the OK button This saves the flatfield filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Flatfield correction is turned off Each pixel in a new file will be divided by the correspondi
104. the remainder is required for data storage depending on the number and size of images spectra collected Disk level compression programs are not recommended Drive speed of 10 000 RPM recommended e Mouse or other pointing device Operating System Requirements TAXI Protocol Windows XP or Windows Vista 32 bit operating system USB 2 Protocol Windows XP with Service Pack 1 or Vista 32 bit FireWire Protocol Windows XP with Service Pack 2 or Vista 32 bit GigE Protocol Windows XP 32 bit with SP3 or later or Vista 32 bit Your System Components Take a few minutes and enter the information in the table below Various pieces of this information will be required when you install WinSpec 32 when the Setup Wizard see Camera Detection wizard page 35 runs and when you begin entering component information on the dialogs and tab pages associated with Hardware Setup Spectrograph Setup and Pulser Setup Other information such as software version and hardware serial numbers may be useful if you ever need to contact Customer Support System Component Your System Notes Application Software WinSpec Version 2 5 Found on the installation and Version CD or via the WinSpec Help menu Software Options Options purchased separately from WinSpec such as Macro Record or Virtual Chip PVCAM Driver Yes No PVCAM driver is used to run Photometrics cameras PhotonMAX Princeton Instruments cameras with USB 2 and
105. ud odusts stored in a directory named gt Data If the file name Fil esit doesn t automatically EE appear in the browse box Save as type wirt Data spe Cancel Ze type it in The file type should be WinX Data Figure 47 File Browse dialog spe Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 71 10 Click on the Save button to save the entered information Acquisition Calibration Toc and return to the Experiment Setup dialog Beer Setup etup 11 Click on OK This will close the Experiment Setup MGE dialog Focus Video Focus 12 Once again click on Acquisition in the Menu bar Earth LIT Again the Acquisition menu will appear as shown in Exposure Intensity Figure 48 Easy Bin Step and Glue Readout fine Acquire Background Acquire Flat Field Video Pulse Counter Figure 48 Acquisition menu Experiment Setup Procedures Intensified Cameras Refer to your PI MAX or PI MAX3 system manual for experiment setup instructions Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Data Collection Procedures Intensified Cameras Refer to your camera system manual for data collection instructions WARNING _ PI MAX and PI MAX2 Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Shutter mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to
106. under USB 2 0 Appendix H Troubleshooting Introduction The following information is provided for troubleshooting communication errors that may occur Camera or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog Controller CCD Display Interface Camera Name ca eral zi Figure 214 Cameral in Camera Name Field When a PVCAM based camera is detected selected during the Camera Detection Wizard formerly the Hardware Wizard a default name such as Cameral will be shown in the Detected Hardware table and will be entered in the Camera Name or Controller Type field on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page Because this name is not particularly descriptive you may want to change it Such a change is made by editing the PVCAM INI file that is generated by Camera Detection Wizard To change the default Camera Name 1 Using Notepad or a similar text editor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example You should see entries like the ones below Camera 1 Type 1 Name Cameral Driver apausb sys Port 0 ID 523459 Change the Name entry to something more meaningful for you for example ST133USB to indicate that this is a PVCAM based system using an ST 133 with a USB 2 0 interface and save the edited file Camera 1 Type 1 Name ST133USB Driver apausb sys Port 0 ID 523459 The new Camera Name or Controller Type name will now appear on the Hardware Setup Controller Cam
107. up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Exposure Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each exposure and clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Use Continuous Cleans Instruction This feature is supported by Version 5 and higher ST 133 controllers and will only appear if the detector camera also supports this feature Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster continuous clean Check this box if you want to apply the continuous cleans instruction to the continuous cleans function available when External Sync timing mode Experiment Setup Timing tab page is being used to acquire data With this instruction the delay between an External Sync trigger and the start of exposure is minimized Refer to Chapter 10 starting on page 139 for more information about continuous cleans and continuous cleans instruction Note Older versions of the ST 133 controllers as well as other controller types and cameras do not support this instruction WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Vertical Skips Vertical skips are associated with regions of interest ROIs that are smaller than the full chip This feature allows you to bin and quickly traverse the rows that pre
108. will open the Install Remove Spectrographs dialog Figure 22 The lower window lists the supported Spectrographs The upper window lists those installed To install a spectrograph select it from the list in the lower window select the Communications Port Auto COM1 COM8 or DEMO and click on Install Version 2 5 K Install Remove Spectrographs x Installed Spectrographs Acton SP300i on COM1 Remove Selected Spectrograph Selected Spectrograph The installed spectrograph will then appear in the upper window In the case of the example shown in Figure 22 the selected spectrograph is an Acton SP3001 Acton SP500i Notes ile Supported Spectrographs Acton SP750 Communications Port Auto Y When you click on Install Selected Spectrograph to install the spectrograph WinSpec 32 will try to connect the spectrograph to the selected communications port If you select Auto as the port the system will assign the spectrograph to the first available COM port If the spectrograph is not found an error message is displayed Even if communication is not established the spectrograph and its assigned port will be added to the list for example Acton SP300i on COM2 DK Cancel Help Figure 22 Install Remove Spectrographs To install another spectrograph repeat the installation procedure To remove a spectrograph select it in the upper box and click on Remove Selected Spectrograph The s
109. wiri amp Data Files UE a Display Result w E SD piss Range EN gg C Tem 1 ange i zx Y Range ES 1 to 576 Datatype UINT16 Datatype FLOAT Apply Close Help 7 Apply Close Help Figure 140 Input tab page Figure 141 Output tab page Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 140 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Output tab page The Output tab page Figure 141 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 167 168 WinSpec 32 Manual Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page Edge enhancement is accomplished by mask operations defined by parameters entered on the Parameters tab page These functions can enhance edges sharpen or smooth features or erode or dilate an image How these images are processed is brief
110. 0 220 Shutter _ _ Sem l Detector Serial Com or USB 2 0 110 220 Controller Computer Figure 8 Cryo Cooled System with External Controller Diagram Entering the Default System Parameters into WinSpec Camera Detection Wizard WinSpec Versions 2 5 25 and later The Camera Detection Wizard is used to load the WinSpec hardware setup parameter fields with default values for a WinSpec compatible camera system The Camera Detection Wizard runs automatically the first time you install WinSpec and can be launched at a later date if you decide to control a different WinSpec compatible camera The autodetection function can be used for Gigabit Ethernet base camera systems ProEM and PI MAX3 FireWire based camera systems Quad RO PVCAM based camera systems USB 1 interface USB 2 interface Photometrics PCI Acton InSpectrum and PhotonMA X and Princeton Instruments PCI TAXT interface based systems 36 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K To Use the Autodetection Function 1 Make sure the camera system is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on 2 Run WinSpec The Camera Detection Wizard will automatically run if this is the first time you have installed a Princeton Instruments WinX application Win View 32 WinSpec 32 or WinXTest 32 and a supported camera Otherwise if you installing a new camera type click on the Launch Camera Detection Wizard button on the Controller CCD tab page to start the wizard
111. 2 90 365 02 485 27 546 07 931 20 811 53 301 00 435 83 Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration 6 Once the wavelengths have been entered for the selected peaks check the selection box to the left of the nm z Pixel box for each peak selected Say ee Figure 63 A checkmark in the box Pixel Value indicates that the peak is selected Mfis2e95 365 02 Note that wavelength values must be v por i583 entered for these peaks before the Iv 485 266 546 07 selection box can be checked B 537 089 7 Click on OK This completes the Ppa wavelength calibration and the dialog will close At the same time the Calibration Mode selected in the Usage dialog will automatically change from Off to Manual Calibration Units Points Entered 4 Points Needed 2 Save as Find Default Peaks Note the appearance of the data display The peak find routine display data arrows and pixel number of each peak found does not change The x axis units will however change to reflect the display units RGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 Figure 64 Spectrum after Calibration Calibration Setup HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 X Calibration Method Linear Polynomial d 87 Pixel Value jos xs mz pne uox 9339 Display Units nm Cancel Help Figure 63 Setup Calibration screen after selecting peaks and entering calibration wavelengths
112. 2 window Values labels and alphanumeric data are usually entered from the keyboard Selections and screen control operations are usually done using a mouse or other graphical I O device although keyboard selection shortcuts are provided Mouse selection is typically done by positioning the mouse cursor on the selection item and clicking the left mouse button In some case clicking the right mouse button will bring up a dialog with additional information or a special menu that allows additional operations to be performed 32 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 K Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the relationships between Setup Options Window the camera the controller and the host computer This Horne i 5 Detector Temperature overview is followed by a discussion of the Setup Wizard that EET ss runs the first time you select Hardware from the Setup menu Pulsers Figure 4 The remainder of the chapter presents the Hardware Environment Setup tab pages so you will be able to make the appropriate Custom Toolbar selections and entries for your system Preferences l Load Factory Defaults gt The chapters that follow describe how to configure a A E spectrograph set up a pulser set up experiment parameters and control array temperature Initial data acquisition is discussed Figure 4 Setup menu in Chap
113. 245 P reflect the change in the transfer function C igasi See the online Help for a detailed discussion of the palette and transfer ya ES function options C Color 1 Change the brightness and contrast Inverted settings to obtain the most pleasing image display Note that clicking on ee the small square above the Brightness Cancel Help scale and above the Contrast scale will restore the default brightness and Figure 97 Brightness Contrast dialog contrast values 50 2 Try different Function and Palette Type selections to see the effect on the displayed image Note that the displayed curve will also change reflecting the change in the brightness transfer function Until you gain more operating experience we suggest you leave the Function Type set to Linear the Palette to Grayscale and the Brightness and Contrast both to 50 3 Click on OK to close the box Any setting changes will be applied Chapter 8 Displaying the Data Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse position the cursor at one corner of the region to be defined depress the left mouse button drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner and release the mouse button Refer to Figure 98 Click on the amp Zoom In button The view will change so that only the selected region is displayed as shown in Figure 99 Note The Display Layout Cursor tab page allows you to change how the ROI region is displayed Click on the amp
114. 5 would be 499 6 499 5 499 6 498 8 1234 154 25 where 499 6 499 5 is the amount of pixel in data point range 499 6 498 8 is the coverage of the pixel and 1234 the pixel s value This algorithm unlike a simple interpolation or curve fitting followed by interpolation maintains both the general spectral shape and the intensity content of the original files Interpolation could totally remove a peak if it were between two adjacent output data point wavelengths The algorithm is general and doesn t depend on the input files having the same wavelength resolution or the same number of pixels Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra 165 In the second stage of the operation the intermediate file is glued into the output file The gluing is done in increasing wavelength point by point based on the wavelength value of the point Initially the output file contains all zeroes Files are glued into the output using several rules as follows e For cases with no overlap between data in the intermediate file and the output file the intermediate file is just copied to the output file point by point pixels in the input file that are outside the wavelength range of the output file are discarded e For cases where the intermediate data overlaps the output data the data from the two files are gradually blended over the overlap region The most common overlap case for step and glue will be where the intermediate file starts after th
115. 5 K This page intentionally left blank Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes Introduction The Processes tab page on the Experiment Experiment Setup Setup dialog allows you to set up and activate Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections up to four different processes for automatic ADC Timing Processes Save Load processing of incoming data It is most likely that you will only activate one such as on line thresholding or two such as on line ntn Abrobance s REEDS thresholding and ASCH output file at a time Process activation occurs when you select a I OnLine YT Setup checkbox After you click in a checkbox you can then click on the Setup button and begin entering or reviewing the parameters for the process After you have clicked on the OK button the process es will be applied to data being acquired ASCII Output File Note The on line thresholding and absorbance processes change the raw data If you want to Acqui Sens Cancel Help retain raw data you may want to use a post acquisition process instead Figure 109 Experiment SetuplProcesses tab page On Line Thresholding Description On line thresholding allows a threshold test to be performed on data as it is acquired The threshold test is performed after background subtraction and flatfield correction but before software accumulation Data that falls within the threshold range retu
116. 91 92 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K The Experiment Setup parameters must be set so that a spectrum can be acquired Using Easy Bin select a single strip of several rows near the center of the CCD and an exposure time between 0 1 and 0 5 seconds A filename should have been entered for the test acquisitions using the Data File tab page Experiment Setup dialog Also Overwrite Confirmation should be turned off so you won t see warning messages about overwriting data files Exit the Experiment Setup dialog by clicking on the OK button Acquire some data and display the data as a graph Next position and size the data window We suggest locating it at the upper left and sizing it so that it doesn t extend more than half way across the screen Then select Keep Window Placement on the Display Layout General tab page followed clicking on OK This operation assures that all data windows will fall in precisely the same spot and will be precisely the same size a configuration that conveys a significant convenience advantage when calibrating Notes 1 You must use the supplied cable to control the spectrograph Do not use a standard 9 pin serial cable even if it worked with an earlier version of WinSpec If the spectrograph does not move or you get an error message such as Communication Error with Spectrograph the spectrograph setup is probably incorrect Check the power on the spectrograph the cable connections and the set
117. 96 543 007 E E y m N 763 510 772 376 811 531 B NOOdY I 912 297 922 450 7 g a ejas Apeejs ye peureygo seul noen dn Buren sea dure eju 0001 peurejqo seu uof v eyoN Figure 205 Wavelength Calibration Spectrum Data Structure Version 1 43 Header All WinView or WinSpec files version 1 43 must begin with the following 4100 byte header typedef WINXHEAD int dioden int avgexp int exposure int datarange int mode float wexsy int asyavg int asyseq int linefreq int date0 int datel int date2 int date3 int date4 int ehour int eminute int noscan int fastacc int avgtime int dmatotal int faccount int stdiode float nanox float calibdio 10 char fastfile 16 int asynen int datatype float calibnan 10 int rtanum int astdiode int int78 int int79 double calibpol 4 int int96 int int97 int int98 int int99 int int100 char exprem 5 80 int int301 char label 16 int gsize int lfloat char califile 16 char bkgdfile 16 Appendix C WinView 1 see lexpos WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView CCD X dimension Not used by exposure if Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not use
118. A further assumption is that the hardware and spectrograph setups as discussed in Chapter 2 have been completed The last assumption is that a suitable spectrographic source is available The mercury lines produced by ordinary fluorescent lights can be used However it will be better to begin with a low pressure gas discharge lamp such as neon mercury or mercury argon if one is available There are two data collection modes Focus and Acquire e In Focus mode operation no frames of data are stored until Start Storage is selected This mode is particularly convenient for familiarization and setting up For ease in focusing the screen refresh rate should be as rapid as possible achieved by operating with axes and cross sections off e In Acquire mode every frame of data collected is stored This mode would ordinarily be selected during actual data collection One limitation of Acquire mode operation is that if data acquisition continues at too fast a rate for it to be stored data overflow will eventually occur This could only happen in Fast Mode operation The following data collection procedures are done in the Focus mode 57 58 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K WARNING If using a PI MAX or PI MAX2 intensified camera initial data collection will be done in the Shutter mode Gate mode for PI MAX2 In both cases Shutter and Gate mode the camera can be damaged if exposed to light overload Before powering the controller and camer
119. Acton SP300i Communications Port z are done as follows 1 On the Main tab page select your spectrograph as the Active Spectrograph Comm Settings Click on the Connect tab Note the COM port named in the Communications Port field If it is not the one you want to use for the active spectrograph select the correct port from the drop down list The choices are Connection Preferences gt COMI through COMS and Baud Rate son Demo Data Bits e Click on Comm Settings Parity None Figure 23 This will open the Comm Settings dialog as Stop Bits 1 zj Use Flow Control shown in Figure 24 Set the connection preferences R erdware i according to the requirements C Sotware ZON ZOFF of your spectrograph For Cancel Help Acton Spectrographs use the Figure 24 Comm Settings dialog ma O o Figure 23 Connect tab page Comm Settings x settings shown in Figure 25 Click on OK to close the Comm Settings dialog All parameters will be stored and automatically restored whenever WinSpec 32 is booted Notes 1 Set the COM parameters separately for each COM port that has an installed spectrograph 2 Only one spectrograph at a time can be active at each COM port However multiple spectrographs can be installed for each COM port If you plan to install more than one spectrograph for a COM port it would be a good idea to make sure that the connection p
120. All Selects the full chip height LK carca Hee User Defined Allows you to set the Slit Y axis Figure 131 Easy Bin dialog Start and End pixels If you have a full chip image displayed you can use the mouse cursor to create the bounding box for the ROL Since all Easy Bin ROIs are full chip width only the box s height parameters will be used 3 If you have selected User Defined enter the start and end pixels This allows you to create an ROI that is not centered vertically on the chip 4 Click on OK when you have finished To define multiple ROIs ROIs that are not full chip width and or ROIs that are not centered vertically on the chip use the ROI Setup functions accessible from the Experiment Setup dialog Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning 149 Defining ROIs by Keyboard entry 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog and Experiment Setup click on the ROI Setup tab to open the ROI me eo eea e Setup tab page Figure 132 Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections 2 Select the appropriate mode Imaging or NEN EDO n s aie sume Spectroscopy f you don t have the Imaging option the Imaging Mode and Spectroscopy Mode radio buttons will not be present C magingMode Spectroscopy Mode Wavelength Slit Start fi E Start fi E End 1240 Height 100 24 Group 4 3 Note the Number Stored value This will TEL tell you if how many ROIs have already been Mouse haa tes E Store stored Depending on wh
121. D drive and press the Enter key on your keyboard The install sequence will begin If your CD drive doesn t support the Windows long filenames attempting the installation causes the filenames to be truncated and the installation fails generating an error message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Application WinXSystem File Group WinXSystem If this should happen see Appendix E for workarounds 3 Click on the program that you want to install If you have clicked on Install WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 you will be given additional choices on the next dialog 4 After selecting the program follow the instructions provided on the dialogs and continue with the installation process You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions Installing from the FTP Site If you aren t sure how to access the FTP site contact Princeton Instruments Customer Support Department for assistance Contact information follows Princeton Instruments 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Customer Support E mail techsupport princetoninstruments com Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 29 For customer support and service outside the United States see our web page at Www princetoninstruments com An up to date list of addresses telephone numbers and e mail addre
122. DB PI SX 1300 ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 227 Controller Type Camera CCD Type PIXIS 100F B BR R INA BEV 100x1340F B N PIXIS 400F B BR R N A EEV 400x1340F B PIXIS 512F B UA MAR 512x512 CCD 77 PIXIS 1024F B UA EEV 1024x1024 CCD 47 10 Z PIXIS XF 1024 N A e2v 1024x1024 CCD 47 10 PIXIS XO 100B N A PI 1340x100B PIXIS XO 400B N A PI 1340x400B PIXIS XO 512B N A e2v 512x512B CCD 77 00 PIXIS XO 1024B N A e2v 1024x1024 CCD 47 10 PIXIS XO 2KB N A PI 2048x512B ProEM 512B N A e2v CCD97B ProEM 1024B N A e2v CCD201B uad RO 4096 N A FCD 4096x4096F MT uad RO 4320 UA KAF 2084x2084 MT ST 133 ST 133 ST 133 ST 133 ST 133 Spec 10 100 B R BR Spec 10 120 Spec 10 120B Spec 10 256 B E Spec 10 400 B R BR EEV 100x1340F 100x1340B HAM 124x1024 HAM 122x1024B EEV 256x1024F CCD30 B OE EEV 400x1340F B Spec 10 100 B R BR Spec 10 400 B R BR ST 133 2MHz ST 133 2MHz EEV 100x1340F B EEV 400x1340F B SpectruMM 120 SpectruMM 120B SpectruMM 250 SpectruMM 250B ST 133 ST 133 ST 133 ST 133 HAM 124x1024 HAM 122x1024B HAM 252x1024 HAM 250x1024B Quad RO4320 IN VersArray 512B F ST 133 TEK 512x512DB DF 228 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Controller Type Camera CCD Type VersArray 1024B F ST 133 TEK 1024x1024DB DF VersArray 1300B F ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B F VersArray 512B F ST 133 2MHz MAR 512x512 CCD77 VersArray 1K
123. Data Collection Procedures Controller Specific seen 72 SPa133 CoOntroller zi ve set Sons eerste aes ed tttm teda on eae 72 PentaMAX Controller x eee et dee ie 73 Data Collection Unintensified Cameras esses enne enne enne 75 Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 77 Introd ctiOn cte ette eee eas ete EE ete e pee ety Ree Taas ERE RR ERE HERE t anae o TI Opening Data Files cit cce ted eie eto ee ee Rete e ere ease ste TI Savine Data Pils EE 80 Saving Temporary Data Files sees 80 Data Pile tab page eee ette ie tiem ots Rebel ei Rete E tecto 81 Closingia Data Bile it e sostagitecsaecn easetsrncn ett a E i eck cab acer soto eee ie 81 Deleting Data Filesi ioen etienne e yeast e ert ee H sees ects eH Heber PEG Reden 82 Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee erre 83 Introductions 3i iiie ed rm e d gd rep neben etre Ee eee Ee pda 83 Changing the WinSpec 32 Calibration Method sese 83 Changing the Calibration Method sese rennen 83 Calibration Mernu eee eene eee ec eae 84 Wavelength Calibration Procedure eese eee ener 84 Ss ve as Default 3 aee e A T e e Rte de RE eee 88 INO Datars sted E 88 Not Live Data n pee Ra pee ail hae bec eoe 88 lave Data undue RR SU Sn HEU ia ae A ele terrd 88 Calibration
124. EXT and follow the directions on the subsequent dialogs for selecting the interface controller and detector camera 38 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk Figure 12 Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk dialog 4 When you have finished with these selections you will see the Test Image dialog Figure 13 The default selection is No If you select Yes you must make sure that the system is connected to the host computer and that the camera system is turned ON before you click on the Next button f Camera Detection Wizard Test Image Figure 13 Camera Detection Wizard Test Image dialog 5 Depending on your radio button selection the following will happen e No Clicking on the Next button will load the camera controller default parameters into WinSpec and pop up the Finished dialog e Yes Assuming that the camera system is connected to the host computer and turned on clicking on the Next button will acquire a single frame of data using a 100 msec exposure time load the camera controller default parameters into WinSpec and pop up the Finished dialog 6 Click on Finish to complete the camera installation Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup Camera Detection Wizard Finished Figure 14 Camera Detection Wizard Finished dialog box 39 40 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Editing Controller and Detector Characteristics
125. I MAX camera Cleans should be set to 1 and Strips per Clean to 4 Spectrograph Before a spectrum can be acquired it is necessary that the spectrograph be powered and properly installed as described in Chapter 2 It is not necessary to calibrate the spectrograph The default settings will be close enough for initial familiarization purposes However it will be necessary to install the spectrograph This is the procedure whereby the WinSpec 32 software is informed of the spectrograph model communications port selected gratings slit width and mirror selections if applicable It is also necessary to establish successful communications between the host computer and the spectrograph These considerations are all discussed in Chapter 2 Additional information for the individual spectrometer setup and dialogs is provided in the online Help Experiment Setup Procedure All Controllers and Unintensified Cameras 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog Figure 31 IEZZLZUELS from the Acquisition menu or by clicking on the ape Timing Processes Save Load zl button on the Custom Toolbar Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections m Exposure Time 2 On the Main tab page set the following 1 sc parameters Exposure time 0 1 second Number of Spectra fi a Number of Spectra 1 Use Full Chip selected Accumulations 1 CCD Readout Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest Readout Dimensions X 653 Y 492
126. K DelayTime 46 Used with Async Mode ShutterControl 50 Normal Disabled Open Disabled Closed AbsorbLive 52 On Off AbsorbMode 54 Reference Strip or File CanDoVirtualChipFlag 56 T F Cont Chip able to do Virtual Chip ThresholdMinLive 58 On Off ThresholdMinVal 60 Threshold Minimum Value ThresholdMaxLive 64 On Off ThresholdMaxVal 66 Threshold Maximum Value SpecAutoSpectroMode 70 T F Spectrograph Used SpecCenterWlNm 72 Center Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueFlag 76 T F File is Glued SpecGlueStartWlNm 78 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueEndw1lNm 82 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueMinOvrlpNm 86 Minimum Overlap in Nm SpecGlueFinalResNm 90 Final Resolution in Nm PulserType 94 O None PG200 1 PTG 2 DG535 3 CustomChipFlag 96 T F Custom Chip Used XPrePixels 98 Pre Pixels in X direction XPostPixels 100 Post Pixels in X direction YPrePixels 102 Pre Pixels in Y direction YPostPixels 104 Post Pixels in Y direction asynen 106 asynchron enable flag 0 off datatype 108 experiment datatype 0 float 4 bytes 1 long 4 bytes 2 short 2 bytes 3 unsigned short 2 bytes PulserMode 110 Repetitive Sequential PulserOnChipAccums 112 Num PTG On Chip Accums PulserRepeatExp 114 Num Exp Repeats Pulser SW Accum PulseRepWidth 118 Width Value for Repetitive pulse usec PulseRepDelay 122 Width Value for Repetitive puls usec PulseSeqStartWidth 126 Start Width for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndWidth 130 End Width for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqStartD
127. Length Inclusion Angle and Detector Angle that minimizes the error Note Some CCDs have very little response at 253 652 If this is the case for your detector it will be necessary to use a peak having a longer wavelength as the low value For mercury the 435 833 line should prove suitable 1 Click on the Dispersion button to open the Dispersion dialog If you have never calculated the Dispersion before click on the Default button This provides standard values for Focal Length Inclusion Angle and Detector Angle based on the manufacturer s data for the active spectrograph If you have already run the Dispersion calculation before and it provided satisfactory values they will be displayed and should be used as your starting values Enter the Lower and Higher Reference Wavelengths For the mercury spectrum use 253 652 low and 579 066 high Again if your CCD doesn t have sufficient response to calibrate at 253 652 it will be necessary to use a different peak It isn t necessary to enter a Target Wavelength It will be calculated during the procedure Selected Grating 1200 Geometrics Focal Length mm 5o 4 Inclusion amp ngle E 43 32 E Detector Angle o3 Load Defaults Dispersion Calibration Lower Reference Wavelength 253 552 Higher Reference Wavelength 579 066 266 777 2d Reposition target Next Target Wavelength Instructions Click Start Procedure to move Low
128. MMENTMAX 80 User comment string max length 5 comments AABELMAX 16 Label string max length FILEVERMAX 16 File version string max length DATEMAX 10 String length of file creation date string as ddmmmyyyy 0 ROIMAX 10 Max size of roi array of structures TIMEMAX 7 Max time store as hhmmss 0 Custom Data Types Used In the Structure BYTE unsigned char WORD unsigned short DWORD unsigned long 244 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Reading Data The data follows the header beginning at offset 4100 In WinView WinSpec the data is always stored exactly as it is collected The order of the data depends on the placement of the shift register In the diagram below the shift register is on the RIGHT SIDE of the chip Each COLUMN of data is first shifted RIGHT into the shift register and then DOWN The data is read and stored in this order First column read XnYm XnYm 1 XnY2 XnY1 Last column read X1Ym X1Ym 1 X1Y2 X1Y1 X1Y1 X2Y1 XnYl IS X1Y2 X2Y2 XnY2 HSI Tale X1Ym 1 X2Ym 1 FEN XnYm 1 F V X1Ym X2Ym Meets XnYm kerri C a eee eec eee gt US 9e gt A D In the diagram below the shift register is on the BOTTOM of the chip Each ROW of data is first shifted DOWN into the shift register and then RIGHT The data is read and stored in this order First row read XnYm X2Ym X1Ym Last row read XnYl xo X2Yl XlYl X1Y1 X2Y1 XnYl X1Y2 X2Y2 XnY2
129. PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog eee 73 Typical Data Acquisition Image 75 Open dialog 5 ind etie ae tete ecce Hte tees 77 High Intensity Lamp Spectrum cece ceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeeseeeeneseaeeeneeenaes 79 Data File Save As dialog eese 80 Save As Data TYPES errnet eet E nt ae eects eere bun 80 Data File tab page ten aet e gu ect e etg ete tert sane 81 Right click File Operations menu eese 82 Calibration Usage dialoe ettet ettet esee tiic 83 Calibration menu 2 e cse e eie eee Rede eee a esate 84 Hg Ar on spectrum rte eie etie ene iieri eee eoa 85 Calibration Setup dialog after running Find Peaks routine on Hg Argon SPO CELUI o retos er rto Po e ut oec ee AAT N a oee TEES Er ESS 85 Spectrum after running Find Peaks routine eere 86 Setup Calibration screen after selecting peaks and entering calibration wavelengths er e tt er P ee eee ete eget ne egent 87 Spectrum after Calibration eese eene enne eren nne 87 Spectrograph Calibration dialog serene 93 OP Set dialog erret eie PR eset Rede cates Ree Ht ee tec ease 94 Peak Pinder Examples eterne oet reta 95 Offset Spectrum for Zero order Measurement see 96 Adjust dialog e cei c ee eoe dete 97 Calibration Adjust Spectrum esee nennen 97 Dispersion dialog iie cath secede rete tee eene eter eere t
130. Spec 32 has been installed close that application and do a Custom installation of it with the appropriate interface component selected PCI Interface or ISA Interface depending on the interface card type Be sure to deselect the interface component that does not apply to your system Note WinX versions 2 5 25 and higher does not support the ISA interface Data Loss or Serial Violation You may experience either or both of these conditions if the host computer has been set up with Power Saving features enabled This is particularly true for power saving with regard to the hard drive Make sure that Power Saving features are disabled while you are running WinSpec 32 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict message Data Overrun Due To Hardware Conflict Figure 215 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict dialog If this dialog appears when you try to acquire a test image acquire data or run in focus mode check the CCD array size and then check the DMA buffer size A large array for example a 2048x2048 array requires a larger DMA buffer larger setting than that for a smaller array for example a 512x512 array Appendix H Troubleshooting 259 To change the DMA buffer setting 1 Note the array size on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page or the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page Full Chip dimensions Open Setup Environment Environment dialog Increase the DMA buffer size to a minimum of 32 Mb 64 M
131. The Controller Detector tab page may also be named Controller Camera or Controller CCD depending on the hardware selections is used to enter and update Controller Type Detector Camera or CCD depending on the system Type and some of the Controller Detector type parameters such as Shutter Type and Readout Mode The Controller and Detector Type selections are perhaps the most fundamental and important of all hardware selection decisions and directly influence the appearance of many other WinSpec 32 screens and the selections provided on them As a result setting up the software for use in any system should always begin with the Controller selection Hardware Setup XXX Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Controller Type Controller Version Camera Type v Shutter Type r Readout Mode LOGIC OUT Output Y z f ec z Shutter 0 Pun Compensation Tine Vertical Shift Time us xxxxx msec Vertical Shift RENE Type Window Size m NISL E oat auts D MPP From Controller AntiBlooming Custom Chip T Custom Timing Launch Camera Detection Wizard Cancel Help Figure 15 Controller Camera tab page Figure 15 shows the fields and checkboxes that may be present on the Controller Detector tab page WinSpec 32 displays or hides features based on the selected controller detector and readout mode All of the features are described in the text that follows Controller Type Camera Na
132. The radio buttons set the Y T acquisition mode Average Snapshot or Focus If Focus mode is selected the upper two text boxes Run time and Computed Sample Time are not displayed These parameters and selections are discussed in the following paragraphs YT Setup Parameters Focus In this acquisition mode you set the Y T Number of Samples only The Exposure Time indication is simply that set on the Experiment Setup Main tab page For example suppose you had established two areas Al and A2 and one equation E1 A1 A2 Al would be the sum of the intensities over one specified range of data points and A2 the sum of the intensities over a second specified range of data points on the spectrum Adding the two together yields one value for E1 Assume a Number of Samples value of 1 000 On starting data acquisition for each and every acquired data set the Equation E1 calculations would be performed and the resulting Y T value stored This process would continue until the specified Y T Number of Samples have been taken or until the data acquisition is terminated Once the specified number of Y T points have been calculated and stored data sets will continue to be taken according to the Experiment Setup parameters but no more YT calculations will be performed There would be 1 000 points in the Y T curve each equal to A1 A2 The data set s and the Y T curve would be displayed in separate windows If multiple equations had been defined they would be c
133. Where this is Enabled Width Speed the case the Slits Mirrors tab Front Axial Entrance v 0 06350 mm 10000 Steps sec page Figure 27 in the Define Side Lateral Entrance v 0 06350 mm 10000 steps sec Spectrograph dialog is used to Front Axial Exit Iv 0 06350 mm 10000 Steps sec specify the controllable slits and i selectable mirrors Actually Side Lateral Exit Iv 0 06350 mm 10000 stepssec setting the slit width and Slit Steps Unit 157 48 Steps mm specifying which mirror to move ui Backlash is accomplished via additional Steps tab pages provided in the Move aeai 05 a Spectrograph dialog as shown in Controllable Mirrors Enabled Position Figure 28 Once the selections Entrance M Front Axial are made simply press OK to execute them Exit v Front Axial coos __ Figure 27 Define Spectrograph Slits Mirrors tab page Move Spectrograph xi CEZ Spectrograph X Gratings Slits Minors Gratings Slits Mirrors Front Axial Entrance 0 06350 4 mm Side Lateral Entrance 0 06350 mm Entrance Front Axial zl Front Axial Exit 0 06350 mm Exit Front Axial Side Lateral Exit 0 06350 gt mm Cancel Help Cancel Help Figure 28 Slit width and Mirror selection tab pages Move Spectrograph dialog Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 55 Entering Laser Excitation Information WARNING If yo
134. X1Ym 1 X2Ym 1 XnYm 1 V X1Ym X2Ym XnYm l l The data is stored as sequential points and the X Y and Frame dimensions are determined by the header The X dimension of the stored data is in xdim Offset 42 The Y dimension of the stored data is in ydim Offset 656 The size of a frame in bytes is One frame size xdim x ydim x datatype Offset 108 The number of frames of data stored is in NumFrames Offset 1446 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration Equations used in WinSpec Wavelength Calibration WinSpec 32 wavelength calibration is based on the grating equation for Czerny Turner or Ebert spectrographs see Figure 206 m d sin a sin p or A d m sin a sin p 1 where wavelength at the center of the image plane m diffraction order d distance between grooves the inverse of grooves per mm and a B angles of the incident and exit beam relative to the grating normal The angles a and f are related to the inclusion angle y and the rotational angle of the grating V a y y 2 and B y y 2 Thus the grating equation can be written as m d sin v y 2 sin y y 2 2 sin y cos y 2 and the grating angle is given by y asin m 2d cos y 2 2 245 246 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Collimating Focusing d Sli Focal Image Plane Relationships of and p interms of Y and V Figure 206 Relationships of a and B
135. a ctive of the CCD array and are optimum for most Pre Dummies 4 measurements Peer a fu 3 Princeton Instruments does not encourage users to change these parameter settings For most applications the default F T Dummies f0 El Skip serial register clean settings will give the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before customizing the chip definition OK Cancel Help Figure 198 Custom Chip tab page Normally not all of the pixels in a CCD array are exposed and read out a frame of dummy pixels bounds the active area These dummy pixels are usually masked and are not normally read out However they could be read out by changing the chip definition in software For example in the case of the KDK 512 x 768 chip illustrated in Figure 198 the 512 active rows are preceded by four dummy rows and followed by four dummy rows In addition there are 14 dummy columns on one side of the active region and 14 dummy columns on the other side By changing the chip definition to increase the active area while decreasing the dummy settings the dummy cells would be read out By doing so one could measure the dark charge with every readout Note that F T Dummies are chip specific and are dummy rows at the boundary of the masked and visible areas of a frame transfer device It is also possible to increase image acquisition speed by reducing the size of the active area
136. a reduce the room light to reduce the risk of damage Note that intensifiers are particularly at risk in pulsed laser operation where overload spot damage can occur without raising the average current to where the overload detection circuits will be activated It is far better to be careful than sorry Before proceeding take the time to carefully read the manual for your intensified camera Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for shutter or gate mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual Temperature Control Before continuing the array temperature should be set to some easily achieved value in the operating range and Temperature lock should be established The way this is done depends on the controller Temperature Control for a System using an ST 133 Controller or for a PVCAM based System 1 Open the WinSpec 32 Setup menu and click on Detector Temperature This will cause zd Target Temperature 0 0 Set Temp the Temperature dialog to appear as shown in i Y as E Figure 30 Current Temperature Locked 2 Setthe Target Temperature to the desired value 0 suggested for initial data lt tomes He acquisition 3 Click on the Set Temp button When the Current Temperature Unlocked message changes to Current Temperature Locked temperature lock will have been establis
137. a 98 Image display of 256 data strips sese 101 3D Image display of 10 data strips seen 101 3D graph with two data strips seen 102 3D graph with five data strips eese nennen 103 Open dialog nuce nee vet Hi etit eer Rr eased cemented 103 Display Layout dialog eiie he et 104 Ed lauip spe 3 D Graph eee tette retenti eeti 105 Hid lamp spe 3D graph with region selected for viewing 106 Hide lamp spe 3D graph expanded to show defined region 106 Graphical Display with Information box eee 107 Single Strip displayed graphically eene 108 3D Display with Cursor curve and Marker Curves eesss 110 3D Plot with Hidden Surfaces ee ee eeseeseeeseecseecesecssecsaeceseesseeeseeeseeeees 111 Data Window Context menu essent 112 Normal Context men ete petet esie tti ee rte eite E iS 112 ROL Context nien n e eae detenti toe res eR ETE AE ree 113 Eabel Display Acton 2 x peer ttc ect iie ie exe ted 114 Label Options subdialog eese ener 114 Eabel text entry box tiet ttti ete 114 Data with Finished Label eene ene 115 Edit box with line wrapped label and finished label with same line wraps 115 ROI resized to correct Line wrapping eese 116 Display after changing Font Selection
138. a controller This mode is used primarily for demonstration purposes or post processing of acquired data and cannot be used in an actual measurement Interrupt Level The interrupt level for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed Card Number This field only appears if more than one PCI card has been detected in your computer This field allows you to set up the communications parameters so each card is uniquely addressed I O Address The I O Address for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed I O Address 2 and 3 High Speed PCI only These addresses are reported but cannot be changed address selection is automatic and under computer control With other interfaces these addresses are not displayed 46 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Entering the Cleans Skips Characteristics Caution For most applications the default settings lt SSamaee will give the best results We advise C Uns fries PRESE contacting the factory for guidance before changing these parameters from their Sele Pree Ot default values Exception With a PI CMAX Rises eoo g camera we suggest settings of Cleans 1 and i Strips per Clean 4 Minimum Block Size 16 m and Number of Blocks 32 The Cleans Skips tab page allows you to mE ad change the clean and skip parameters Vertical Skips from their default values or to reload the Minimum Block Size 2 default values Figure 18 shows all of the Number of Block
139. a doublet For example if using the 579 066 nm mercury line in doing the Dispersion Calibration you need to take care to check that the peak finder hasn t selected the 576 96 nm line instead If it does it is a simple matter to move the manually move the cursor to the correct peak Note that the zoom function can also be controlled using the data window icons If it is difficult to see the precise cursor position simply press the keyboard Insert key to expand the display about the cursor position The key may have to be pressed several times to achieve the desired resolution Use the Delete key to return to the original display If you do decide to move the cursor note that each time a cursor positioning arrow key is pressed the cursor will move one data point Assuming no horizontal binning is in effect one data point will correspond to one pixel on the array As a final comment even if you should move the cursor when it wasn t necessary repeating the Calibration Offset cycle a few times will still achieve an optimum offset adjustment 96 Adjust WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Untitled 1340 X 1300 X 1 alaja Q Figure 68 Offset Spectrum for Zero order Measurement 6 Note the reported Error value in the Offset dialog The value is reported in nm Transposed to pixels it should be less than one pixel The number of nm represented by one pixel will depend of course on the dispersion of the grating 7 P
140. a range will remain correct In the same manner as for the other parameters the values entered don t appear in the area listing box until the Store Area button is pressed Mouse The area range can also be specified using the mouse To do this display a data set and use the mouse to delineate a rectangular data region on the data The height of the rectangle is not important Only the X dimensions are of interest although for reasons of convenience you may wish to position the rectangle on a peak or at some other location It is generally helpful to have the Information box displayed at the same time so you can see the precise values of the start and end points for the range When satisfied that the rectangular region correctly spans the region of interest click the button labeled Mouse in the YT Area and Equation Setup dialog The mouse selected start and end points will then appear in the Range From boxes and will be copied to the area list box when the Store Area button is pressed Baseline Correction The value of each area is the sum of the intensities over the area s specified range The value of an area can be calculated using the intensity heights with respect to the baseline or using the intensity heights with respect to a straight line segment drawn between the start and end points of the specified range The latter results in a corrected area that is the part of the total area above this line Baseline Correction gives more accura
141. acquired data set Functions covered include Threshold and Clipping Cross Section Binning and Skipping and Histogram Introduction Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 19 Printing describes printing features of WinSpec 32 WinSpec 32 can print directly to almost any Windows printer driver Pulser Operation describes the operation of the Pulsers that can be used with WinSpec 32 Custom Toolbar Settings describes the Custom Toolbar and explains how to add remove the available buttons Software Options describes WinSpec 32 options that can also be purchased from Princeton Instruments Part 3 Reference Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix I Online Help System and Camera Nomenclature provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and cameras CCD arrays It also provides brief descriptions of systems and system components CCD array related abbreviations are also included Calibration Lines contains wavelength tables and a detailed spectrum for Mercury Argon Data Structure contains descriptions of the data structure for both WinView WinSpec 1 43 and for 1 6 The data structure for WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 is the same as that for WinView WinSpec 1 6 Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration discusses the WinSpec 32 wavelength calibration algorithm CD Failure Work Arounds provides advice on how to successfully complet
142. addition to entering areas and equations you will need to enter acquisition parameters on the YT Setup dialog opened when you click on Setup after activating On Line YT on the Processes tab page On this dialog you can also select which equations to be displayed YT Area and Equation Parameters Define Areas YT Setup x Aquisition Parameters Run Time Computed SampleTime 3600 I Seconds 60 Seconds Number Of Samples Exposure Time eo 100 mSec Aquisition Mode Average Snapshot Focus r Display Parameters i Cancel Help Figure 112 YT Area amp Equation Setup dialog Area Listing Box The large upper box in the Define Areas section of the window The left most item for each area listing is the Area designator An where n is an integer in the range of 1 to 8 To the right of the designator is space for a user comment which can be as long as 32 characters To the right of the user comment are the X Start and End points The last space is used to indicate whether Baseline Correction is to be implemented for that area either Yes or No Note that information cannot be directly entered in the box The definition is actually performed using the boxes and buttons directly beneath the Area Listing box Once the definition is complete it will appear in the listing box Note An asterisk appearing before an area designator e g A2 indicates that the range of A2 is outside the
143. al spectrum is seldom available but the closer you can come to this ideal the better the calibration results will be Figure 60 shows a mercury argon spectrum that could serve as the basis for a good calibration in many situations Appendix B contains wavelength tables for Argon Neon and Mercury together with a detailed spectrum for Hg Argon Wavelength Calibration 85 Chapter 6 v4 HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 O x Figure 60 Hg Argon spectrum Once you have the calibration spectrum displayed on the screen as the active data set proceed as follows 1 Click on Setup in the Calibration menu to open the Calibration Setup dialog box If a previous calibration had been saved the calibration values would be listed If no previous calibration had been saved as the default no values would be listed For more information see the online Help for this dialog 2 Click on Find Peaks An automatic peak finding routine will be performed The maximum number of peaks is equal to one quarter the number of displayed pixels The pixel values for the 10 highest peaks will be shown in the Pixel boxes in the Calibration Setup HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 Calibration Units r Calibration Method oe C j 4 Linear Polynomial fi zi r Calibration Points Pixel Value Pixel Value m 182 895 nu 250 397 E 201 E 927 363 485 266 n 5312 L 537 089 980 424 n 734 069 L 383 398 Display Uni
144. amera with USB 2 0 interface a PhotonMAX a Photometrics camera or an Acton InSpectrum will automatically be created when the Camera Detection Wizard runs One of the things this file contains is the default name for the camera typically Cameral that is displayed on the Hardware Setup Controller Camera tab page Because this name is not particularly descriptive you may want to change it by editing the PVCAM INI file editing instructions are provided in Cameral or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog on page 257 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 27 Installing the FireWire Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows XP and Vista 32 bit to install software and hardware Quad RO camera systems use FireWire IEEE1394a to communicate between the camera and the host computer 1 Check the connectors at the front or back of your computer for an existing FireWire IEEE1394a port that matches the 1394a port on your camera If your PC does not have a functioning FireWire 1394a port you must install a FireWire IEEE 1394a interface card Refer to the interface card and computer manufacturer s documentation for instructions Installing the GigE Ethernet Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows XP and Vista 32 bit to install software and hardware ProEM and PI MAX3 camera systems use the GigE Ethernet to communicate between the camera and the host
145. ames it is necessary to select Same Strip Multi Frame on the 3D Layout tab page of the Display Layout dialog It might further be noted that these buttons do not appear on the default Custom Toolbar Instead they must be added using the Customize Toolbar dialog accessed by selecting Custom Toolbar on the Setup menu 110 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Cursor Curve and Marker Curves In analyzing a data display it is often desirable to highlight the cursor curve and to have every nth curve displayed in a different color as a convenient marker WinSpec 32 provides these functions as demonstrated in the following procedure 1 On the 3D Layout tab page select Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Then press OK The cursor curve and marker curves should be clearly delineated Note that on a color monitor they would be in contrasting colors and much easier to see than in a black and white print as shown in Figure 83 v 4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Pixel 328 Intensity 460850 00 AF point 328 strip 17 frame 1 Figure 83 3D Display with Cursor curve and Marker Curves Note that displaying the data with Highlight Cursor Curve displayed affects the time required to step the cursor from curve to curve If Highlight Cursor Curve is OFF the cursor can step without updating the entire display If Highlight Cursor Curve is ON the entire display updates with each step a considerably slower operation If the Cursor Curve
146. and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page set the X and Y bin size 6 On the Parameters tab page select Average if the binned data values are to be averaged If the Average box is left unchecked the binned values will be summed 7 Onthe Parameters tab page set the Skip X and Y values Data points that fall in the skip zones do not contribute to the output Skip values of zero are allowable that is Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 183 no points will be skipped Leftover points at the end of a strip or column are discarded 8 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 9 Click on Apply to begin processing Binning and Skipping Restrictions and Limitations The following are some restrictions and limitations of the Binning and Skipping function e This function can resize an image down to a minimum of 1 pixel but WinSpec 32 cannot display an image less than 2 x 2 pixels e May cause data overflow in the output image if the output data type is selected as integer If data to be binned will exceed 32 000 counts select Unint or Long e The maximum binning and skipping size is the size of the input image When the maximum is reached to increase the binning size you must first decrease the skipping size then increase the
147. andling wavelength calibration spectrograph setup and calibration and data display procedures e Part 2 Advanced Topics goes on to discuss ancillary topics such as cleaning ROIs binning data correction techniques printing gluing spectra Y T analysis processing options pulser operation and customizing the toolbar These chapters are more informational and less procedural than those in Part 1 e Part 3 Reference contains appendices that provide additional useful information such as e commonly used system controller type and camera type terminology provided in Appendix A e Hg Ar Ne calibration spectrum data and graph provided in Appendix B and e data structure information provided in Appendix C Also included are appendices that address repair and maintenance of the WinSpec 32 software and installation work arounds for situations where the CD ROM does not support long file names A software hardware setup wizard guides you through the critical hardware selections the first time you select Setup Hardware To properly respond to the wizard s queries you may have to refer to your ordering information such as exact detector model A D converters etc Keep this information handy Even though the wizard will assist you in getting started it will still be necessary to read through this manual to familiarize yourself with the many data collection and analysis options available Summary of Chapter Information Part 1 Ge
148. aph TI Auto Spectro See Spectrograph Calibration AUX DLY D TRIG OUT eee 190 Avalanche gain eese 59 67 265 Axis labeling eme 122 Background subtraction 151 152 acquiring background files 151 automatic gente DURER DR 152 Binary math operations 158 Binning constraints with PCI card 144 265 266 hardware etie ctt 144 in spectroscopy eeeseeeeeneeren nennen 144 pOSU process eese ertet ee toe teen cp cute 182 SO LWAEG d oeste ete persi ed 144 145 Binning and Skipping post processing oe ee eects eee esse cee eeeeeeeeeeees 182 procedure onec reote 182 restrictions and liminations 183 Bitwise math operations AND idee 158 complement tete eet Hte 158 exclusive OR nettes oreet 158 OR c n 158 BloCK SIZ6 mrene iet Oe ote RR edd 48 C Calibration iu EE 84 method 5 este re pete herren 89 Of iae iua ieee DRG ehe 83 reference INES aec sette enter be 233 Setup dialogs cscs eite eire testen 85 StrUCEtUres etre RETE ERR 238 242 Camera Detection wizard sss 35 Cautions calibration sequence ssseeeee 94 changing Cleans and Skips settings 46 running different versions 253 WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 in same director
149. ar calib label 81 3810 Calibration label NULL term d char expansion 87 3891 Calibration Expansion area End of Calibration Structures 3978 4098 char Istring 40 3978 special intensity scaling string char Spare 6 25 4018 BYTE SpecType 4043 spectrometer type acton spex etc BYTE SpecModel 4044 spectrometer model type dependent BYTE PulseBurstUsed 4045 pulser burst mode on off DWORD PulseBurstCount 4046 pulser triggers per burst double PulseBurstPeriod 4050 pulser burst period in usec BYTE PulseBracketUsed 4058 pulser bracket pulsing on off BYTE PulseBracketType 4059 pulser bracket pulsing type double PulseTimeConstFast 4060 pulser slow exponential time constant in usec double PulseAmplitudeFast 4068 pulser fast exponential amplitude constant double PulseTimeConstSlow 4076 pulser slow exponential time constant in usec double PulseAmplitudeSlow 4084 pulser slow exponential amplitude constant short AnalogGain 4092 analog gain short AvGainUsed 4094 avalanche gain was used short AvGain 4096 avalanche gain value short lastvalue 4098 Always the LAST value in the header Start of Data 4100 4100 Start of Data Tr he he he o E o E E 28 2s 2s 2s 2 k 2 2 2s 2s 2s 2 k kkk kk End of File eK KK aK HK A 2 kkk kkk kkk k kkk kkk k Definition of Array Sizes HDRNAMEMAX 120 Max char str length for file name USERINFOMAX 1000 User information space CO
150. at you want to do you may want click on Clear or Clear All Lancet Changes Use Software Binning to remove stored ROI patterns TIP Acquire a full chip image before adding or editing ROI patterns The existing patterns will be superimposed on the image Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help 4 To add a new pattern click on the spin buttons next to the Number Stored text Figure 132 ROI Setup tab page until the text to the far left is New Pattern Spectroscopy Mode This will not be necessary if there are no patterns stored a Enter the Wavelength X axis Start End and Group values The Group value controls the X axis binning 1 indicates no binning higher values indicate the number of pixels being binned to increase the sensitivity at the expense of resolution e Spectroscopy Mode When multiple ROIs are defined the Wavelength values for the first pattern are applied to the subsequent patterns created e Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs can have different Wavelength values TIP If you re not sure of the chip size open the Main tab page and note the X and Y values there b Enter the Slit Y axis Start Height and Group if in Imaging Mode values e Spectroscopy Mode Height controls the Y axis binning indicates no binning higher values indicate the number of pixels being binned to generate the strip of data Do not overlap Slit values e Imaging Mode Height is the height of the image and
151. atically for automated Acton spectrographs as stored in the spectrograph s electronics Grating Parameters The grating values are required for the dispersion calculation and for the Number of Turrets Current Turret selection of the active grating p 4 Some spectrographs have interchangeable grating 1 2 3 turrets each able to mount up Grooves 200 jeo i200 to 3 gratings Where this is the case the grating information o ak ELS arango may have to be separately Steps nm 16 7 1 7 zl 1 7 specified for each turret that Askin may be installed These od ao parameters are specified on the Gratings tab page Figure 25 of the Define Spectrograph dialog In the case of Grating Movement Mode Slew Faster automated Acton spectrographs the grating Cancel Help information is automatically supplied Figure 25 Gratings tab page Setting the grating parameters Main Gratings Slits Mirrors Connect Gratings Display Warning On Grating Change 1 If there are two or more turrets enter the number of the turrets 2 Then from the Current Turret field select the turret whose grating parameters will be defined Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 53 If entries are missing or incorrect select the correct grooves mm value for each grating Make sure that the gratings are listed in the proper order Grating 1 listed first etc You can also enter a Name for each grat
152. b if it is currently 32 Mb or 128 Mb if it is currently 64 Mb click on OK and close WinSpec Reboot your computer Restart WinSpec and begin acquiring data or focusing If you see the message again increase the DMA buffer size Data Overrun Has Occurred message Because of memory constraints and the way that USB transfers data a Data overrun has occurred message may be displayed during data acquisition If this message is displayed take one or more of the following actions 1 SEN Unc E P9 Minimize the number of programs running in the background while you are acquiring data with WinSpec 32 Run data acquisition in Safe Mode Add memory Use binning Increase the exposure time Defragment the hard disk Update the Orange Micro USB2 driver See OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update page 261 If the problem persists your application may be USB 2 0 bus limited Since the host computer controls the USB 2 0 bus there may be situations where the host computer interrupts the USB 2 0 port In most cases the interrupt will go unnoticed by the user However there are some instances when the data overrun cannot be overcome because USB 2 0 bus limitations combined with long data acquisition times and or large data sets increase the possibility of an interrupt while data is being acquired If your experiment requirements include long data acquisition times and or large data sets your application may not be suitable for the USB 2 0
153. be Photoshop The 16 bit TIFF format is not as widely supported Images saved in this format can be opened and processed with Adobe Photoshop Chapter 18 Pulser Operation Introduction Four different pulser timing LM xi generators are available for use with Fea WinSpec 32 To be available pulser sws ama Setup Pulser support must have been installed as E described in the Installation chapter C None None Pulser support is then accessed by ce TE selecting Pulsers on the Setup EEA menu and then selecting the pulser Figure 163 Pulsers dialog to be used with the system Available selections include the Princeton Instruments brand PG200 Pulser the Princeton Instruments brand Programmable Timing Generator PTG plug in module for the ST 133 high power ver 3 the Stanford Research Systems DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator with Inhibit Option and the SuperS YNCHRO The Model PG200 is available for all Princeton Instruments intensified detectors except the PI MAX family of intensified cameras The PI MAX and PI MAX2 require the PTG or DG535 In the case of the PI MAX3 camera which has an internal controller its internal pulser is the SuperS YNCHRO All four pulser timing generators are programmable from WinSpec 32 Consult the applicable hardware manuals for detailed instructions on setup and connection to other devices PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator The PG200 is programmed via one of the serial port
154. be available the next time the software is booted New Equation button The first step in defining an equation is to press the New Equation button necessary before the equation parameters can be defined Note that clicking on New Equation does not cause an immediate change in the listing box A newly keyed equation does not appear there until the Store Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes 133 Equation button is pressed Ordinarily you would not do that until all of the expressions for the equation have been specified Store Equation button Once the equation expressions have been keyed the Store Equation button is used to store them and cause them to appear in the equation listing box If you click on the OK key without first pressing the Store Equation button the entries for the equation will not be stored and that equation will not be available for Y T analysis Note The expressions for an equation can be changed by clicking on that equation s designator in the equation listing box and then keying new values for the parameter to be changed The changes do not take effect until the Store Equation button is pressed Delete Equation button Equations defined and listed in the equation listing box can be deleted using this button To delete an equation simply click on the equation s designator in the equation listing box and press the Delete Equation button Calculator button Opens the Equation Calculator Figure 113 This
155. be told to acquire spectra or images During this waiting period charge generated from different sources builds up on the array unless some kind of cleaning process is ongoing Cleaning minimizes the impact of the unwanted signal noise by row shifting the accumulated charge to the output register and then discarding it Depending on your system WinSpec 32 will provide you with up to five cleaning features The most common cleaning feature is Clean Cycles which occur until Acquire is selected and may continue up to the entered number of cleans before exposure begins If External Synchronization is being used to control exposure a feature called continuous cleans may be used in addition to the standard clean cycles Where the detector and controller support it a specialized version of continuous cleans Continuous Cleans Instruction can be used with the External Sync timing mode The readout of ROI information is enhanced by the Vertical Skips feature With Version 5 of the ST 133 Controller continuous cleans for Kinetics is also supported All of these cleaning features and their interrelationships are described in the sections that follow Clean Cycles The basic cleaning function is implemented by clean cycles These cycles start when you turn the controller on and a clean pattern is programmed into the controller Their purpose is to remove charge that accumulates on the array while the camera not acquiring data i e exposing and reading out
156. been installed the selection box won t Magnification H es appear but the spectrograph model will be venorted Grating Movement Mode p Slew Faste v Be sure the correct Grating to Calibration Procedures Calibrate is selected Calibration is grating specific If the indicated grating is Offset Adjust Dispersion incorrect click on the arrow at the right of the selection box to display the cma He available gratings and make the correct selection Figure 65 Spectrograph Calibration dialog Be sure the indicated value for the Detector Pixel Width in microns is correct The default value will depend on the type of CCD chip installed Note that some design factors such as a tapered fiber optic ahead of the chip will change the pixel size seen by the spectrograph and so will have to be taken into account in determining the value to be entered Be sure the indicated Magnification value is correct for your spectrograph This parameter is determined by the geometry of the spectrograph Contact your spectrograph manufacturer if you have any questions about the magnification parameter value Select the Grating Movement Mode Slew or Scan Operation with Slew selected will be significantly faster than with Scan selected 94 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Offset Caution You must begin calibration with the Offset procedure and end with the Dispersion procedure Perfor
157. but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the Amplitude Note that the Gate Width and Gate Delay values need to be selected with some care in fluorescence decay experiments Typically the starting gate width will be very narrow perhaps 2 ns and the final gate width should be wider by about the ratio of the anticipated signal amplitude decrease over the course of the measurement Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 207 timebase Similarly the starting gate delay has to take the various insertion delays into account and the final delay value might typically be set to a value on the order of five times the anticipated decay time of the process Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the fast decay with respect to the slow one For example if you know that the amplitude of the fast decay signal is typically five times the amplitude of the slow decay signal you could enter 5 for the fast decay amplitude and 1 for the slow decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering fast and slow amplitude values of 5 and 1 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 50 and 10 Note that the default values will give satisfactory results in many measurements Slow Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay ti
158. c v IV Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed m Increment Type G Fixed Width Increment o nsec Delay Increment je 98594 nsec est Jecay Siow Decay Time Worstenit oF sec 7 Tie orstant IE fes zl Amplitude pos DBUIINGE oa View Width Delay Sequence Setup File On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure 1 zi a C Exponential Repeat Width Delay for fi Exposure s Cancel Help Figure 181 Sequential Gating Setup box Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses In any case if the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 200 for more information as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog will close and you return to the PTG dialog Select Burst On or Off If you select ON each trigger will initiate a burst of gate pulses Set the number of pulses in the burst and their period Note If Burst and Bracket Pulsing are both selected the entire burst will be bracket
159. ce eoe eee tete 128 ASCIDOoUutput 5 terit ette 137 thresholding seien eot 127 NEP analysiScscs sede RIA 129 Online Help overview 19 Openmng dat files noie eet est TI multiple files nro rettet 79 Operations Absolute Une 158 Addition Jtt ted neus 157 AND ninihenehnes hebunsc eerte 158 Complement 23 repete e 158 Division e Ite eee idee 157 Exclusive OR meno SR Ure 158 Logl O nrerin Ia Rie 157 Version 2 5 K Operations cont MUN bids eiit rede ame PIER 157 Multiplication eee 157 Natural Log eode te dens 157 NOT E EE iie se b Recens 158 OR conepemimheete Decet 158 Square Root essere 157 oquared z eei ntpote eng 157 SUDtraCtiOD s iuo ciostee e ie tp ERU ees 157 Options Custom Chip eese 215 Custom Timing eee 216 dM 216 Macro Record os oneng heben asnes 217 SPEX TRIAX support eene 218 Virtual Chip ite ete tete 218 OR math operation seen 158 P Q Paper Size and Source sss 185 PCI card driver installation sss 25 PCI interface binning constraints 144 265 266 PCI Timer interface rnin isen 45 Peak finder function sese 94 Peaks Hg Argon spectrum eee 86 PentaMAX data collectio uoi eeepc 74 POCUSIN Gs eset ODD RR Dep 73 PG200 p ls r eene Seles 189 continuous
160. cede and follow the ROI The rows to be processed and discarded are binned into blocks each containing a number of rows with the Number of Blocks parameter determining how many blocks there will be before and after the ROI Shift Register HH IT SKIPS binned vertically prr BB Fl SF HE aE op up EEE up cp uem Feet eb Bs ese seo es DERE d Sse Su eau ne tee EER E FE REIR ERES Fe i ab Be eee ee ee EES oC Bde ee cue ee cue t eG ten Fee Es Fs Ete Ee FEA BEd e FEE BE ee SEE HE SETE ee ee ee peut PR Si Hd Bisse BE ee GEHE oe AAi Ae E ee cea Meets Bet ees ERER RTE Figure 19 Vertical Skips The block size determines how quickly the region preceding and following the ROI will be traversed If the blocks are large the region will be traversed quickly but there is the possibility of overloading the shift register and causing blooming With small blocks the risk of blooming will be minimized but the time to traverse will be large WinSpec 32 uses an exponential algorithm to simultaneously achieve rapid traversing with minimal risk of blooming The first block specified in rows is as large as possible Each successive block is a factor of two smaller than the one preceding until the minimum block size is reached All remaining blocks are the minimum block size By making the first block as large as possible and subsequent bloc
161. cel Help Figure 188 SuperSYNCHRO Sequential Gating dialog Internal Trigger 204 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Sequential Gating Setup Gate Width Gate Delay From TO Qut Number of Spectra Stat 5 m usec Stat usec zal al rz ug Ad fuses End 201 H uec V Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed Increment Type ered Width Increment o nsec Delay Increment E usec C Exponential D Pesce 3 View Width Delay Sequence Save Sequence Values To File On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for mi 1 I 1 Esposure s Cancel Help Figure 189 SuperSYNCHRO Sequential Gating dialog External Trigger 10 The functions on the Trigger Out tab SuperSYNCHRO page Figure 190 allow you to enable the SyncMASTER trigger output from 99 in Gating Trigger Out the SyncMASTERI and SyncMASTER SyncMASTER2 connectors on the he AUX I O cable and set up the Aux e Freq is set by Internal in Trigger In tab Out signal at the AUX OUT connector SyncMASTER2 on the rear of the Delay from SyncMASTER1 2 T usec PI MAX3 e When you enable SyncMASTERI Audiery the output of that connector will be at the frequency entered on the Trigger In tab page e The output of the SyncMASTER2 connector will be at the same frequency as that of SyncMASTER1 However you can enter a delay so the edges of that signal will occur a
162. ch as that shown in Figure 72 s4 256strip SPE 1024 X 256 X 1 c Gm mr k 2 Y 250 Z 1 40 Figure 72 Image display of 256 data strips e If there are at least three data strips but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 73 u 10strip SPE 1024 X 10 X 1 x 51911 Y 1 1 l 454 Figure 73 3D Image display of 10 data strips 101 102 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K e If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips v4 2strip SPE 1024 X 2 X 1 Figure 74 3D graph with two data strips A single strip will always be plotted as a simple graph Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shifts position as required to read true for the selected strip The file Open dialog and Display Layout dialog both contain the three display mode select radio buttons Image Graph and 3D Graph If you want to control the data display mode yourself simply leave Auto Select unchecked and the display mode will correspond to whichever of the three radio buttons is selected Screen Refresh Rate The Screen Refresh Rate is an important but often overlooked display performance parameter At times such as when focusing by making the screen refresh rate as rapid as possible the focusing operation may be much easier to perform than it would be with a slow refr
163. closed by clicking on the x box at the upper right of the window or by clicking on Close in the File menu An open data window can be removed from view by clicking on the l box at the upper right of the window The file will be reduced to an icon on the task bar but the data will remain loaded in RAM There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter Unless you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use If the file hasn t been saved you will be prompted There are several ways of closing an open data window Each is described below e The Xl box at the upper right of the data window will close that window only e The zl box at the upper right of the window will also remove the data window from view by reducing it to an icon on the task bar There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter However the data will remain loaded in RAM reducing the memory available for data collection Unless you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use e Close in the File menu closes all windows using the data set displayed in the active data window This may be important if New in the Window menu or in the Data Window Context menu has been used to open additional windows with the sam
164. cluded in this chapter are accessible from Processes menu These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 153 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Threshold and Clipping X Threshold and Clipping X Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output Input Image 4 r Output Image Circuit spe EM Bi D Data Pino v Display Result p ef a icm punc Range a to se 1 1 to 268 Y Range YR see eel Datatype UINT16 Datatype FLOAT Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 153 Input tab page Figure 154 Output tab page Apply Close Help Output tab page T
165. computer For best performance Princeton Instruments recommends the Intel Pro 1000 GigE card 1 Install the interface card into the host computer before installing WinSpec When WinSpec is installed it will replace the driver supplied with the card with a high performance driver After you have finished installing WinSpec make the cable connections between the camera and computer power on the camera and then start up WinSpec Installing WinSpec 32 Caution Because WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 contain files with the same name but different content do not install WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 software in the same directory Before installing WinSpec 32 Verify that your computer meets the requirements listed on pages 21 22 Check to see if the interface card has been installed Note that the interface card is not necessary if the computer will only be used for post processing data If you plan to collect data and the card is not installed in your computer you will need to install it and add the hardware this may require re installing WinSpec 32 to ensure that the correct interface card driver is installed If installing under Windows XP or Vista 32 bit make sure that you are logged on as administrator of the computer Otherwise the installation will fail because changes cannot be made to the Windows Registry Check to see if WinView 32 has been installed on your system Determine how you will be installing the software
166. condary electrons are generated via an impact ionization process that is initiated and sustained when higher than typical voltages are applied to an extended portion of the CCD s serial register Multiplying the signal above the read noise of the output amplifier enables ultra low light detection at high operation speeds Some CCD cameras with on chip multiplication gain utilize two output amplifiers an on chip multiplication gain amplifier that allows the camera to be used for low light high speed applications and a traditional amplifier for wide dynamic range applications Backlash Applied to the movement of gratings or slits this is the amount of play between gears when changing the direction of travel Bias In a CCD detector system the minimum intensity required for each exposure equivalent to performing a zero second exposure with the shutter closed Without adding any light the bias allows charge to be read out on the CCD while raising the intensity level high enough to ensure that the detector does not deliver a negative number to the A D converter The A D converter only works in the set of positive numbers and has no instructions for processing negative numbers The bias may be user settable However it is set at the factory and should remain stable over the lifetime of the detector system Binning Hardware binning is the process of combining the charge from adjacent pixels in a CCD before the signal is read
167. ctively The effect is to increase the contrast of the image Each time a change is made click on OK to close the Display Layout dialog and observe the effect of the change On completing your display experiments restore the defaults Autoscale Intensity and Full Range checked Last close the data file Displaying a Z Slice Open a data file with multiple frames 2 Position the cursor in the data window 3 Click on Z slice button It will cut a section across multiple frames 124 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Part 2 Advanced Topics Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes sss 127 Chapter 10 Cleaning pride SERA Ee Pa DER M ERER YU R PRESE N Lsd enira 139 Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning see 143 Chapter 12 Correction Techniques esee 151 Chapter 13 Spectra Math sess 155 Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra sess 161 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes ssss 167 Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 179 Chapter 17 Printing ui ennt rr iren et leur UE ERR REO E Lu rU da 185 Chapter 18 Pulser Operation see 189 Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings sss 211 Chapter 20 Software Options sse 215 125 126 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2
168. ctor connector at the rear of the camera Tighten down the locking screws 220 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K 5 If it has not been installed already connect a line cord from the Power Input module on the back of the Controller to a suitable AC power source 6 Turn on the Controller 7 Turn on the host computer and select the WinSpec 32 icon 8 From the Setup menu select Hardware and enter the following settings Controller CCD tab card Controller PentaMAX or the appropriate ST 133 controller Controller Version 5 CCD Type appropriate frame transfer array EEV 512x512FT for this procedure Shutter Type None LOGIC OUT Output Shutter Readout Mode Frame Transfer Interface tab card Type the appropriate interface card For this procedure the selection is High Speed PCI Cleans Skips tab card Number of Cleans 1 Number of Strips per Clean 512 Minimum Block Size 2 Number of Blocks 5 9 From the Acquisition menu select Experiment Setup and enter the following settings Main tab card Exposure Time Enter a value The exposure time can either be greater than the readout time or it can be equal to the readout time If you want an exposure time gt readout time enter a value larger than the readout time calculated when the virtual chip definition was downloaded If you want an exposure time readout time enter 000 sec Number of Images Enter the desired number of images Use Region of Interest Accumulations 1 ADC tab
169. ctrograph focusing and alignment is an art onto itself and is beyond the scope of this manual Basically it consists of filling the aperture from a broad light source and adjusting the focusing mirror for the sharpest image narrowest possible symmetrical peak on the CCD Focusing can also be accomplished by moving the detector in and out Different detectors and or spectrographs will have different means for doing this In addition it may be necessary to rotate the detector so that the spectral line is perfectly vertical on the CCD 2 The Offset Adjust and Dispersion parameter values for WinSpec 32 will not be the same as they were with earlier versions of WinSpec This is true even if the same spectrograph is used You cannot simply enter values you may have recorded when using the earlier 16 bit WinSpec versions If you do very large calibration errors will be introduced The calibration must be performed using the following procedure Preparation 1 Install the spectrograph mounting it to the detector per the instructions in the Detector manual and turn it on You may have to restart the WinSpec 32 software after turning on the spectrograph 2 Mount a suitable light source mercury lamp preferred near the entrance slit of the spectrograph so that the light passes through the spectrograph onto the detector 3 Review the Define Spectrograph selections and settings to be sure they are correct for the calibration to be performed
170. d 4 Follow the instructions on the dialogs To reinstall WinSpec 32 and any options follow the procedure as described beginning on page 21 Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations The following information covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface Maximum cable length is 5 meters 16 4 feet 1 MHz is currently the upper digitization rate limit for the ST 133 Controller Large data sets and or long acquisition times may be subject to data overrun because of host computer interrupts during data acquisition USB 2 0 is not supported by the Princeton Instruments PC Interface Library Easy DLLS Some WinView WinSpec 2 5 X features are not fully supported with USB 2 0 See the table below Supported with USB 2 0 in WinX 2 5 X X Kinetics WinX 2 5 18 1 Reset Camera to NVRAM Defaults Temperature Lock Status WinX 2 5 x doesn t utilize hardware lock status Virtual Chip Custom Chip Frames per Interrupt RS170 Video Output Online Exposure File Information Overlapping ROIs YES Lo A WinX 2 5 18 1 Not all header info is currently available in WinX 2 5 x through PVCAM Table 5 Features Supported under USB 2 0 continued on next page 255 256 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K E ea aes with USB 2 0 in pec aie 2 5 X Macro Record Macros recorded for non PVCAM cameras may have to be re recorded to function Table 5 Features Supported
171. d nox H ue e End 7 zl see v Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed Increment Type Fixed Width Increment o nsec Delay Increment o nsec chest Decay Siow Decay C Exponential J mplitude p Amplitude p 4 a View Width Delay Sequence V Save Sequence Values To File Setup File Software Accumulations Not supported with full speed sync data collection Cancel Help Figure 168 Sequential Gating Setup dialog 6 Click on the Gating tab Select Gating Mode HV Pulsing Enabled to start gating the intensifier Be sure you have followed all intensifier precautions stated in the hardware manuals before making this selection 8 Click the Apply Changed Settings button This writes all changed parameters to the PG200 It may take several seconds depending on the number of parameters that have been changed To set all of the parameters click on the Apply All Settings button 9 Click on OK to close the dialog Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 193 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator The DG535 is programmed via the IEEE 488 GPIB port of the computer default GPIB address is 15 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the DG535 front panel Basic DG535 operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The DG535 is use
172. d the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction Background Subtraction with Intensified Detectors To properly perform background subtraction with an intensified detector a new background must be acquired whenever the intensifier gain setting is changed This is necessary because changing the intensifier gain also affects the dark charge of the intensifier EBI Chapter 12 Correction Techniques 153 Flatfield Correction Flatfield correction allows you to divide out small nonuniformities in gain from pixel to pixel The instructions below set the flatfield correction to be performed before data are saved to RAM or disk Acquiring a Flatfield File This operation is similar to normal data acquisition 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the detector has reached operating temperature to ensure stability Set the same binning parameters and ROI If you plan to use a background file with data collection on the Experiment Setup dialog select Background and enter the name of the background file This background file will be subtracted from the flatfield file before it is saved to disk Illuminate the detector uniformly The accuracy of this uniformity will be translated into an accurate flatfield correction Select Acquire Flatfield from the Acquisition menu Figure 48 page 71 This will immediately acquire a flatfield file using
173. d by Not used by Not used by of stripes collected if 1 see lnoscan Not used by Not used by Not used by X dimension Not used by Not used by Not used by fast access Not used by 0 float WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView file Not used by WinView WinView 4 byte 1 gt long integer 4 byte 2 integer 2 byte 3 unsigned integer 2 byte 4 String char 1 byte 5 double 8 bytes Not implemented 7 unsigned byte 1 byte WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView WinView 6 byte 1 byte Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by comments Not used by Not used by Not used by Not used by calibration WinView file Not used by WinView background file Not used by WinView Actual dim of image Xy 7 x x 2 k xy kA i xy x7 y F ur x xy p 7 E kf a xf ky hu Xy xy x ur af ay Ky k X y ef xy kA xy xy x7 y Lae xf ae EI x E E 235 236 654 656 658 660 664 668 672 688 704 706 708 710 712 736 832 836 840 int WinSpec 32 Manual
174. d to control the PI MAX gate functions If the system is Camera Has Been Set To Safe Mode equipped with a PI MAX camera the Camera State dialog Figure 169 will appear when the software is started Although the software NUS always initially places the PI MAX in Safe C Restore To Last Setting Select The Desired Action mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting Shutter Mode or Gate Mode Figure 169 Camera State dialog I Make sure the DG535 is connected to the computer s Tri IEEE 488 GPIB port Later agers Gating Comm Port you will tell WinSpec 32 the pen nen esi DG535 s GPIB address The f Jine Frequency 1003 He default setting is 15 2 Following all intensifier cones z ed ois precautions listed in the ULT za 5s hardware manuals turn on the Slope Termination DG535 and wait for it to C Extemal Positive High initialize If the DG535 is not Negative 50 hms turned on the WinSpec 32 software won t be able to program it 3 Select Setup and then Pulsers to open the Pulsers h OK Cancel Download To DG535 Help dialog o sees Domiood Tons Heb 4 Select DG535 Then click on Figure 170 DG535 dialog the Setup DG535 button The DG535 dialog will open 194 10 11 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Click on the Comm Port tab Figure 171 Triggers Gating Comm Port For the Port Type select GPIB
175. ddress u tab page WinSpec 32 will display and hide V O Address 2 features based on the interface card installed in the host computer All of the features are described in the text that follows 1 0 Address 3 Type Select the communications type that will be used to transmit data from the controller to the computer All communications types are not available for all controllers and computers The Demo selection which allows the Cans Heb software to be exercised but which does not support data transfer to the Figure 17 Interface tab page computer would not ordinarily be used in the field High Speed PCI Select if a Princeton Instruments RSPI PCI high speed serial Interface card is installed in your computer and you want data transfer to be interrupt driven This choice would give the highest performance in most situations PCI Timer Allows data transfer to be controlled by a polling timer if using PCI high speed serial Interface card Useful for troubleshooting possible interrupt problems computer crashes or system fails to return data Note that data transfer is slower in PCI Timer mode and data overrun more likely Also PCI Timer cannot be used to continuously acquire small Regions of Interest in Safe Mode timing operation PCI Timer isn t compatible with Use Interrupts operation a timing mode available when using the ST 138 Controller Demo Allows the software to be exercised without being connected to
176. ding on Sia Glorede the spectrograph grating used Stop Acquisition Figure 38 Acquisition menu 64 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K v 4 HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 Figure 39 Typical Mercury Argon Spectrum 3 To store the most recent image click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page This completes the initial spectroscopy data acquisition routine that should work with any Princeton Instruments brand Controller Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection Introduction ATTENTION WARNING The procedure in this chapter will enable you to begin collecting real image data promptly Minimum requirements are assumed If your system is more complex e g requiring consideration of complex timing and synchronization issues you will have to carefully study the other chapters of this manual as well as the manuals provided for the system hardware components before data acquisition that addresses those needs will be possible Nevertheless it is a good idea to begin with the simplest possible operating mode This approach will give you operating experience and familiarity that will prove very valuable when you go to make more complex measurements For additional informa
177. drive of a computer that supports long file names then transferred through the network to the customer s hard drive Check the list of files below to make sure that the long filenames remain intact Then install the software from this location on the hard drive Copy the files to the customer s hard drive from the customer s CD ROM then fix the names of the files that were truncated There are only 7 files that are not DOS compatible 8 3 so this at most a 10 minute job Here are their abbreviated and full filenames Not all of these files are used in the standard installation but all are present on the CD e CLSSNA 1 CLS rename to clsSnapIn cls e PIXCMT 1 DLL rename to PXCMTXT32 dll e WINX R 1 DOC rename to WinX_readme doc e WINX32 1 BAS rename to Winx32Test bas e WINX32 1 DOC rename to Winx32 Automation VB Version doc e WINX32 1 FRM rename to Winx32Test frm e WINX32 1 FRX rename to Winx32Test frx 249 250 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance Note When WinSpec 32 is installed it modifies the Windows Registry file If for any reason you reinstall Windows the Registry file may be replaced and WinSpec 32 may not run correctly Reinstall WinSpec 32 to correct this problem Install Uninstall WinSpec 32 Components at a Later Time After you have installed WinSpec 32 you may want to install additional WinSpec 32 files or to u
178. e Two Page Causes two pages to be displayed at a time in a side by side layout Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the previewed page allowing a selected area to be examined in detail There are two zoom levels Note that if not at full zoom the cursor becomes a magnifying glass if positioned on the image area Zoom Out Allows you to return to the normal unzoomed preview display Close Closes the Preview window and returns you to the normal WinSpec 32 display 188 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Printing a Screen Capture It is also possible to do a screen capture of the entire WinSpec 32 window This is the best way to capture such information as cross sections scaling and color lookup tables A limitation of screen shots is that the resulting image is based on the resolution of the monitor not the resolution of the image For a 1 million pixel CCD even a 600 x 800 video mode is not enough to show all the pixel information 1 Display the desired image or images in WinSpec 32 Click once on the title bar of WinSpec 32 to make this the active window 2 Press Alt Print Screen This copies the entire contents of the WinSpec 32 window including image or graph displays and dialog windows to the clipboard Note Alternatively press Ctrl C or select Copy on the Edit menu to copy an image to the clipboard This function only works on image displays and only on the image itself 1 e scales and cross section information
179. e If there are already regions stored End End you will now see them displayed as com a aue a rectangles on the displayed image 3 Click on the spin button to the right of the Mouse Full Clear Clear ail STORE New Edit Pattern field until the field label says New Pattern instead of Edit Pattern Cancel Changes I ies Sole Binna 4 Usethe mouse to drag an ROI box over the desired region in the image display Acquire Focus Cancel Help 5 Click on Mouse ROI tab page to enter the ROI information Once this information is displayed on the tab page you edit it Figure 133 ROI Setup tab page Imaging Mode 6 Click on Store to save the new pattern Chapter 12 Correction Techniques Introduction Advanced data collection includes background subtraction flatfield correction CCD blemishes removal and Cosmic Ray removal The skillful use of these techniques can significantly enhance measurement capabilities Note that not all of these techniques will be available in early releases of the software Background Subtraction Princeton Instruments systems are adjusted so that data have a small offset This offset assures that small signals won t be missed This offset can be subtracted after the signal is acquired to prevent it from having any influence on the data Background subtraction allows you to automatically subtract any constant background in your signal This includes both co
180. e data Simply clicking on Close in the File menu will close all windows containing the same data regardless of how it is displayed e Close in the Control menu accessed by clicking on the WinSpec 32 icon at the left end of the Title bar closes WinSpec 32 as does double clicking on the WinSpec 32 icon Similarly the key combination ALT F4 also closes WinSpec 32 e Close All in the Window menu closes all open data files e The key combination Ctrl F4 closes the active window only 82 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Deleting Data Files You can delete data files directly from within WinSpec 32 without having to close WinSpec 32 and without having to use the Windows 95 Explorer or another file utility This is achieved using the File Operations menu accessed by right clicking on the file name in the Open dialog as explained below 1 Select Open from the File menu Select Only files with the selected data type Savein in gt amp er E2 rit spe or tif will be listed 2G 2strip 5SPE 2G Bknc Scan for Viruses yA 300i 5PE YABlue ae Open With i 2 Position the mouse cursor on the name gn P zdssiosrE 44 CAM Stuffit v atrames 512sqSPE y Cel5 of the file you want to delete and click HID LAI 1 toZip WG adiust SPE YT MOON 3 Add to ARGON1 zip WABack SPE y Cels the right mouse button This will open Sas DZpandEMalARGONI 2 Pekoni SPE cee the right click
181. e output file has data but before the output data has ended Output file XXXXXXXXx0000000000000 Intermediate file Vyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy There are five points in the above overlap region and the result of the blending would be left to right overlap point number blending result 1 5 6 x 1 6 y 2 4 6 x 2 6 y 3 3 6 x 3 6 y 4 2 6 x 4 6 y 5 1 6 x 5 6 y If there is only 1 point in the overlap region then it would have 1 2 x 1 2 y e Another case occurs when the intermediate file starts before the output and ends after the output file has data In this case also the data is blended across the overlap region e Since the glue is a general algorithm there will be cases such as the following Output file XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX Intermediate file yyyyyy yyyyyyy or Output file 000000x x x x x x x 0000000 Intermediate file yyyy yyyyyyyy In these cases the composition of the result will be 50 Intermediate and 50 Output One of the effects of the above rules is that multiple copies of the same file can be glued and the result will be the same as if only one copy had been used The blending allows a smooth transition for files with broad spectra 166 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Calibration and ROI Offsets In an ideal world when a CCD camera was attached to a spectrograph the center of the CCD array would coincide with the center of the spectrograph exit plane
182. e 144 OV eEVIe Wise o eee e edited e o ea e ee 144 Spectroscopy Mode pene eite pertes de les Rene eee s 145 Imagine Mode rte ec oe ee io t ess 145 Defining ROI intet era oa fcedere es ete He 146 Examples of Spectroscopy and Imaging ROIS eee 146 Constraints on Defining Multiple Regions of Interest ROIs 147 Methods of Defining and Storing ROIs esee 147 Chapter 12 Correction Techniques eeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeee rennen 151 Iiconleupon ces ie ocs oats ets dos dea oh each neat Aa ceeds lees 151 Background Subtraction ei scout esed sete i ee etd tete a Ee E ek e d provi ERRE E At 151 Acquiring Background Files eese eene 151 Setting Automatic Background Subtraction ee eeseceseceseceseceseeeseeeeneeeneeeneeenaes 152 Background Subtraction with Intensified Detectors eee 152 Elatfield Correction eei eei ete e cts socks ed Hie et paved He eto iat 153 Acquinnp Elathield File ner Re bec e e 153 Automatic Flatfield Correction eese eene 153 CCD Blemishes 5 5 rette dei deett Renee oe ute Ped ET ege d es 154 Creating a Blemish Eie eer eee iet poset He etc tee 154 Cosmic Ray Removal 2 e HER AR ER tes be ER EE RE estt 154 Chapter 13 Spectra Math o iei Cun Sa tsp ce mna Sen desea ua caue cusa cea vss Sean Maca in oe 155 Introduction 7 aen Ee E o e ee
183. e To Last Setting Figure 153 Camera State dialog Procedure 1 Following the intensifier precautions stated in the PI MAX3 system manual turn on the PI MAX3 Then start the WinSpec 32 software 2 Onthe Setup menu select Pulsers to open the Pulsers dialog Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 201 Pulsers Select Active Pulser C Cc SuperSYNCHRO C None OK Figure 184 Pulsers dialog 3 Select SuperSYNCHRO Then click on the Setup Pulser button The SuperS YNCHRO dialog will open SuperSYNCHRO Trigger In Gating Trigger Dut C Internal Threshold 4 Volts Slope Coupling Termination C Positive C AC C High Negative DC 50 Ohms caret Hes Figure 185 SuperSYNCHRO dialog 4 Select the Trigger In mode either Internal in which SuperSYNCHRO free runs or External in which it is triggered from an external source If operating in the Internal trigger mode set the trigger Frequency in Hz 6 If operating in the External trigger mode specify the Threshold Slope Coupling and Impedance appropriate for the trigger source 202 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K SuperSYNCHRO Trigger In Gating Trigger Out Mode Bracket Pulsing Repetitive ON OFF Setup C Sequential Figure 186 SuperSYNCHRO Gating tab page 7 Ifthe PI MAX3 has a Gen II intensifier you can turn Bracket Pulsing On or Off When it is turned On the MCP will be biased OFF except for an interval that
184. e Transfer readout mode is selected and e the file WXvchip opt is present in the same directory as the executable WinSpec 32 program The virtual chip method of data acquisition requires that the chip be masked as shown in Figure 203 Masking can be achieved by applying a mechanical or optical mask or by positioning a bright image at the ROI against a dark background on the remainder of the array In operation images are continually piped down the CCD at extraordinarily high frames per second FPS The mini frame transfer region is defined by an ROI as illustrated in Figure 203 The charge from this ROI is shifted under the frame transfer mask followed by a readout cycle of an ROl sized region under the mask Since the ROI is far from the serial register the stored image is just shifted repeatedly with the readout and the first few images collected will not contain useful data After the readout period the next frame is shifted under the mask and another ROI sized frame is read out The net result is a series of images separated by spacer regions streaming up the CCD under the mask Chapter 20 Software Options 219 Virtual Chip x ed C Normal Mode Enabled Shift Register j Virtual Chip Definition Chip Y Dimension 7 zl Chip X Dimension fio Region Of Interest X Start 1 Y Start 1 a XEnd 10 YEnd D i X Group 1 m Y Group 1 ROI USPSA AA P LE LA AA AA A ALL Load Default Values
185. e Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed the same time with each gn Widthlncrement fp nsec Delay increment p nsec iteration r Fast Decay 7 Slow Decay Exponential is well suited i Time Constant fi E esec mb Time Constant 10 fuec m to fluorescence decay Ut Amplitude 0 i Amghue 0 H experiments where the e e c tun der S tu dy changes View Width Delay Sequence IV Save Sequence Values ToFile Setup File 1 Software Accumulations rapidly at the start of an upto N experiment and then slower 1 H Exposurets and slower following a s OK Cancel Hel logarithmic curve as the Loue pases c COECRRE o experiment progresses The Figure 175 Sequential Gating Setup dialog resulting data points can be 196 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K spline fitted to generate the complete curve so that the decay constant can be calculated even where the data derives from two decay processes occurring simultaneously If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 205 for more information as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog will close and you return to the DG535 dialog 14 Select Bracket Pulsing On or Off Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX camera See your PI MAX
186. e data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values 5 Onthe Parameters tab page if a clipping operation is to be performed select the clipping option as described above For a threshold operation set the threshold level to the desired value 6 Enter the name of the Output Image on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 7 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 181 Cross Section Introduction Selecting Cross Section on the Process menu opens the Cross Section window which allows you to separately display and store horizontal and vertical cross sections of an image Figure 156 shows two X axis cross sections based on the same ROI The upper data is averaged the lower data is summed 198 60 Y 1 l 4708 Figure 156 Example Cross Sections of an ROI Procedure 1 Select Cross Section from the Process Input Parameters Output menu m Mathmatical Type 2 Onthe Input tab page if the correct input image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the
187. e output value for Ifirst and for any intensity lt Imin LO Iis the input value and O is the output value LO O3 is the output value for I3 LO O4 1s the output value for I4 Ilast Olast Olast is the output value for Ilast and for any intensity gt Imax Example The following is a custom mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax represent are input output levels Imin and Imax are 3 and 7 respectively Everything less than 3 gets mapped to 13 the first In Out mapping Everything greater than 7 gets mapped to 12 the last In Out mapping Since input values 3 and 4 are not represented in an In Out pair these intensities will be mapped to 0 3 7 6 13 5 11 7 12 References To explore in further detail the theory and techniques of digital image processing we suggest the following texts 1 Digital Image Processing Gregory A Baxes Cascade Press Denver CO 1984 ISBN 0 945591 00 4 2 Digital Image Processing R C Gonzalez P Wintz Addison Wesley Reading MA 1977 ISBN 0 201 11026 1 3 Digital Picture Processing A Rosenfeld A C Kak Vol 1 amp 2 Academic Press New York 1982 ISBN Vol 1 0 12 1597 301 2 ISBN Vol 2 0 12 597 302 0 4 Digital Image Processing W K Pratt John Wiley New York 1978 ISBN 0 471 01888 0 178 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes Introduction The processes in
188. e reete ete 267 one year on refurbished discontinued products 267 owner s manual and troubleshooting 269 sealed chamber eene 268 SO LWAIE ote ete HS een 268 vacuum integrity sese 268 XP vacuum chamber sess 267 x ray detector eee tete 268 your responsibility eese 269 Wavelength calibration eee 83 display ututs eere ette sies 88 effect of any optical adjustment 83 manual etn 83 Mercury Argon spectrum eeeeeeeeenee 233 method selection 83 modes and units sse 84 procedure gebe iue iei 84 Save as Default button esses 88 WEDS Itenni etos po ERR Re Ugo 270 Wizard Upgrade Device Driver seseeses 261 X axis wavelength calibration spectrum 233 Y T analysis on line process acquisition modes sse 134 areasc iE Ther Ate Cm diet dre 129 quations ete os 129 OVEIVICW e P 129 procedure metet teret 136 YT analysis sess See Y T analysis Z Axis Endpoint eene 111 V 123
189. e the best one To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing Sharpening Functions Parameters tab page Sharpening is also accomplished by mask operations Input Parameters Output in this case parameters entered on the Sharpening Parameters tab page These masks sometimes called Operation high pass filters enhance regions of high contrast User defined while not affecting regions of low contrast Sharpening Procedure Use the following procedure to sharpen an image 1 2 3 High Pass 3 Select Sharpening from the Process menu Enter the Input Image and Output Image names On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values Figure 144 Sharpening Parameters tab page Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 171 Smoothing Functions
190. e the installation in situations where the CD ROM doesn t support long file names WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance provides information on how to repair reinstall and uninstall WinSpec 32 components USB 2 0 Limitations covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface Troubleshooting USB 2 0 provides solutions to communication problems that may occur when operating under the USB 2 0 interface Glossary includes brief definitions of terms used in relation to WinSpec 32 and the system hardware The WINSPEC CHM online documentation contains e information that is in this manual e step by step instructions on how to use WinSpec functions e reference information about WinSpec and its functions and e context sensitive help which describes a screen or menu item that is being pointed to or that is active when a Help button is clicked on 20 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages Placing the mouse cursor on a button and resting it there for a few seconds causes a brief tool tip message to appear that describes the button s function Tool tips are also provided for the individual panes of the Status Bar at the bottom of the WinSpec 32 window Note that tool tips only appear at the desktop level Tool tips are not provided for the buttons on the individual dialogs and tab pages More detailed descriptions for each button at the desktop level are provided
191. e will be cleared from the array while the camera is waiting to acquire data Clearing removes charge from the CCD by clocking the charge to the serial register then directly to ground This process is much faster than readout because the charge does not go through the readout node or the amplifier Note that not all clearing modes are available for all cameras Be sure to check availability of a mode before attempting to set it Clear Never Never clear the CCD Useful for performing readout after an exposure has been aborted Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 47 Clear Pre Exposure Before each exposure clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry This mode can be used in a sequence It is most useful when there is a considerable amount of time between exposures Clear Pre Sequence Before each sequence clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry If no sequence is set up this mode behaves as if the sequence has one exposure The result is the same as using Clear Pre Exposure Clear Post Sequence Clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each sequence and clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set
192. e you have calibrated your 1200 g mm grating on the 275 and the calibration Offset is 2 2057 nm as reported on the Spectrograph Calibrate Offset menu Using the above ROI when you ask for 0 00 nm the 256 pixel ROI is converted to 20 199 nm and the value sent to the 275 is 0 2 2057 20 199 17 98 nm The ROI Offset pixel to wavelength calculation uses the results of the dispersion calibration So if a spectrograph is being calibrated using an asymmetrical ROI the calibration should be iterated at least once Because the ROI Offset is calculated separately from the Calibration Offset once a spectrograph has been calibrated using one ROI the ROI pattern can be changed without affecting the calibration Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes Introduction Several post acquisition mask processes including Edge Enhancement Sharpening Smoothing a Custom Filter and Morphological Erode and Dilation operations are provided in the WinSpec 32 software These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Edge Enhancement xi Edge Enhancement x Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output r Input Image 4 m Output Image Moon4 spe EJ FSI D
193. eI 52 selecting and moving see 53 iude P 52 Grouping in spectroscopy eeeeee 144 Hard disk 208 pigtail ee ge 21 Hardware setup Camera Detection wizard ssss 35 Custom Chip entente tiet 215 Custom Timing eeeeeeeeenene 216 Display tab page eene 44 Interface tab page sse 45 OVELVICW i i teet ota et certe 33 tequirements uen tpe eere pene 21 Hid lamp spe eseeeeeeenenennen 103 High speed PCI interface esses 45 Histograms cumulative nee e 184 post processing essseseeeeeenenreneeeeenne 184 proced re iere ten een 184 standatd 5 heu GeD Rr 184 IK T O address mee eet 45 I O Address 2 amp 3 reet 45 273 IEEE 488 GPIB port esee 193 Image Graph and 3D Graph selection 102 Images labeling eeeeeee 112 Imaging data collection Initial 65 Experiment Setup procedure steps common to all controller types 67 P ntaMAX teen eel 73 procedure for all controllers 75 Skips and Cleanse d eo tetti 66 ST 183 ines neto peine iet 72 temperature control sese 66 Imaging mode serene 143 Information box as active window 107 Install Remove Sp
194. eObject WinX32 WinX32App Dim ExpVB Set ExpVB CreateObject WinX32 ExpSetup Dim Docs Set Docs CreateObject WVinX32 DocFiles Dim Winds Set Winds CreateObject WinX32 DocWindows Dim SpectroObjMgr Set SpectroObjMgr CreateObject WinkX32 Spectro0b Mgr Do Not Edit Above This Line nSEol82 NUM Figure 201 Macro Record dialog 218 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Spex Spectrograph Control WSSpex opt This option adds spectrograph support for the Spex 270M ISA TRIAX 180 ISA TRIAX 190 ISA Installed Spectrographs 4 TRIAX 320 and the Spex Spex232 Retrofit older Spex that have been retrofitted for RS 232 communication Henove selected spectoaiaph m Supported Spectrographs Acton InSpectrum Spex 270M ISA TRIAX 180 ISA TRIAX 190 ISA TRIAX 320 Spex Spex232 Retrofit Communications Port auto Install Selected Spectrograph Cancel Help Figure 202 Install Remove Spectrographs dialog Virtual Chip WXvchip opt Introduction This option is used to set the parameters for Virtual Chip operation a special fast acquisition technique that allows frame rates in excess of 100 fps to be obtained For the Virtual Chip selection be available on the WinSpec 32 Setup menu it is necessary that e the system is a PentaMAX or has an ST 133 Controller e the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 512 FT e the Fram
195. ear panel BNC for triggering other system components The Automate for Single Trigger Kinetics Delay check box will only appear if you have set up the PTG for single trigger kinetics When this box is checked the Delay from TO box will be grayed out and the Delay from TO will be automatically calculatedfrom the gate width gate delay times whenever either or both of these times is changed 200 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K PTG xi Triggers Gating Aux Trig Out Auxiliary Trigger Qut Delay From TO E nsec Ges H Figure 182 PTG Aux Trig Out tab page 13 Click the OK button This writes all of the parameter values to the PTG Note The PTG can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected For more information see the discussion of this feature starting on page 208 SuperSYNCHRO Timing Generator SuperSYNCHRO is a timing generator that has been designed into the PI MAX3 Basic SuperSYNCHRO operation is reviewed in the following procedure Note The gate functions of the PI MAX3 camera are controlled by the SuperS YNCHRO Because the system is equipped with a PI MAX3 camera the Camera State dialog will appear when the software is started Although the software always initially places the PI MAX3 in Safe mode you have the option of restarting with the last mode setting Camera State Camera Has Been Set To Safe Mode Select The Desired Action Keep In Safe Mode C Restor
196. ecified in the original purchase agreement Princeton Instruments is not responsible for installation setup or disassembly at the customer s location Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above and do not extend to any product or part which has e been lost or discarded by you e been damaged as a result of misuse improper installation faulty or inadequate maintenance or failure to follow instructions furnished by us e had serial numbers removed altered defaced or rendered illegible e been subjected to improper or unauthorized repair or e been damaged due to fire flood radiation or other acts of God or other contingencies beyond the control of Princeton Instruments After the warranty period has expired you may contact the Princeton Instruments factory or a Princeton Instruments authorized representative for repair information and or extended warranty plans Physically damaged units or units that have been modified are not acceptable for repair in or out of warranty and will be returned as received 270 10 11 12 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K All warranties implied by state law or non U S laws including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly limited to the duration of the limited warranties set forth above With the exception of any warranties implied by state law or non U S laws as hereby limited the forgoing
197. ecludes collecting data using two software packages at once 254 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K PIHWDEF INI amp SESSION DAT WinSpec 16 and PIHWDEF INI The hardware initialization file PIHWDEF INI is included with 16 bit versions of WinSpec software The file contains all of the hardware settings necessary to get started and is read the first time WinSpec is executed At the end of the first operating session the settings in effect are written to SESSION DAT which is read the next time WinSpec software is operated so that the new session will begin with the same settings that were in effect at the end of the previous one WinSpec 32 and the Windows Registry WinSpec 32 doesn t need PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT because it automatically stores the settings in the registry at the end of each operating session However WinSpec 32 will read the WinSpec 16 PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT if they are copied to the directory containing the WinSpec 32 software This allows users who are upgrading from a 16 bit version of WinSpec to WinSpec 32 to transfer their previous operating settings to the new software However there is a constraint if there are settings in the registry 1 e WinSpec 32 has been operated at least once the software won t read PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT unless the file date is newer than the date of the stored registry settings This problem can be avoided by simply copying PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT to the WinSpec 32 directory be
198. ect the source file s operation and the destination Input A 34 file for the results of the selected mathematical B operation displayed at the top of the dialog Operation B C Additionally you can use the mouse to specify Fae nao an ROI to be processed available on tab pages o aeo A and B Eum b m Source Data and Destination Selection Range B As many as three data files can be involved in math operations and there is a corresponding tab Datatype page for each of them A B and C A and B are Input Files C is always the Output File Every operation requires at least one Input File and an Output File Thus every operation will require using tab pages A and C In those cases where a second Input File or a constant is required tab Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 136 Math dialog page B will also be used see the online Help for detailed descriptions of the individual Math file pages With but a few exceptions the parameters on the three file tab pages are the same Brief descriptions follow Frame If an input file contains multiple frames you can specify the ones to be processed The default is to process all frames You additionally have the option of choosing not to write all of the frames processed to the Output File X and Y Range You can specify the input file pixels to be processed The default is to process all pixels Yo
199. ectrographs dialog box 50 Installation aborting eite eee 28 29 Bate Wire Ct Ver ric ens oett E 27 from FTP site ette nee 29 GigE dryer essi ettet 27 multiple versions of WinSpec 32 251 PC card dtivet 5 oen 25 USB 2 0 driver ioc 26 Installing WinSpec 32 eee 21 Intensifier gain effect on dark charge 152 Interface tab page eoo deter 45 interrupt level 5 rtr emet 45 Type eene ue Ida ee T ANAS 45 Demo egre 45 high speed PCL iieirto ette 45 PCI Timer neheonRU Sep Uem DepPOR 45 Interrupt level seen 45 Interrupt tab page I O ddress ree ERE Een UO 45 I O address 2 and 3 sss 45 Introduction to manual sees 17 ISA interface card driver installation esee 258 Kinetics eese 41 142 L M Labeling graphs and images 112 Laser excitation ce ee essere 55 laser line eee Ee Aretio 84 Least Squares Fit calibration method 89 Linear math operations seeeeeene 157 Log10 math operation 157 Logic 0 PentaMAX output esee 42 Logic 1 PentaMAX output eene 42 Look Up Table form ts inet ees 176 procedure eene ede 175 Macro Record nnne epe fepe 217 Magnification sse 93 Main tenu insere A eter rte cette 31 Manual wavelength calibratio
200. ed but not the individual pulses within a burst When both of these modes are active you must select Main Burst for the Bracket Start Select Bracket Pulsing On or Off Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX camera See your PI MAX system manual for detailed information If you select Bracket Pulsing ON next select the Bracket Start appropriate to your setup Keep in mind that the on off switching of the MCP bracket pulsing is slow taking about 500 ns to turn on and 200 ns to turn off The Bracket Start choices are e Main Main times the bracket start from the main trigger either an external or an internal trigger Select this if the event of interest will occur at least 1 us after the main trigger the 1 us includes the 500 ns required to turn the MCP fully on Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 199 Main Burst Select this if Burst mode is active Brackets an entire burst but not the individual pulses within a burst Pre Trigger Allows you to capture an event that would otherwise occur while the MCP was turning on This selection requires that in addition to the main trigger at Ext Trig In you trigger the PTG by a pulse applied to the Pre Trig In BNC The pre trigger must be at least 525 ns before the main trigger After an insertion delay of approximately 25 ns the MCP will be gated on before the main trigger occurs The main trigger plus the gate delay and widt
201. ed strip and the right arrow key to move to a higher numbered pixel on the strip Then click the Intensity Autoscale key to scale the Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 105 intensity profiles Note that clicking the mouse button at different points on the display will change the pixel selection but not the strip s4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Figure 78 Hid lamp spe 3 D Graph Press the Insert key repeatedly Each time it is pressed the display expands about the cursor position Then press the Delete key repeatedly to contract the display restoring the appearance of the data display Note the cross sectional displays in Figure 78 The vertical cross section profiles the intensity at the same point on each successive strip The horizontal cross section profiles the intensity at each point on the same strip If the large cursor is selected cursor projections will intersect the cross section to show indicate the cursor position These projections may not be visually aligned with the cursor position on the main plot This effect will be particularly noticeable with a long Z axis Because of perspective effects the higher numbered strips will be further away and visually smaller The axes automatically adjust so that they read true for the strip on which the cursor is located However because the cross section profiles expand to use all of the available space they will not be in alignment visually with the cursor The profile shapes will be
202. ed to a different port you will get an error message If this happens check the cable connections g Apply All Settings check that the pulser is powered or try a different Comm port x Cancel Hep Figure 164 PG200 Comm Port tab page 8 Click on the Triggers tab Figure 165 Triggers Gating Comm Port Trigger F Trigger Mod 9 Select the Trigger mode either ai achat ESS 000 E c C Internal in which the PG200 free E bdo e a Mass runs or External in which it is tri d f t l r Delay Trigger r Delayed Trigger Sync Mode gt riggered trom an external source 4 g8 se z C Trigger Gate 10 If operating in the Internal trigger mode set the Trigger Freq uency Auxiliary Trigger Auxiliary Trigger Sync Mode gt in Hz Consult the PG200 Manual to 20 El fuses zb Trigger Gate determine the maximum Trigger e Frequency for a given set of conditions The PG200 Delay Trigger and Apply All Settings Auxiliary Trigger outputs are programmed from the Triggers tab page Lewes e They produce trigger outputs that are synchronized to and delayed from the trigger Trigger Sync mode or from the trailing edge of the gate pulse Gate Sync mode In the Gate Sync mode as the gate pulse changes its position and width the trigger outputs remain synchronized with the gate moving with it In the Trigger Sync mode the trigger outputs do not sweep with the gate but mai
203. elay 134 Start Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndDelay 138 End Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqincMode 142 Increments 1 Fixed 2 Exponential PImaxUsed 144 PI Max type controller flag PImaxMode 146 PI Max mode PImaxGain 148 PI Max Gain BackGrndApplied 150 1 if background subtraction done PImax2nsBrdUsed 152 T F PI Max 2ns Board Used minblk 154 min of strips per skips numminblk 156 of min blocks before geo skps SpecMirrorLocation 2 158 Spectro Mirror Location O Not Present SpecSlitLocation 4 62 Spectro Slit Location O Not Present CustomTimingFlag 170 T F Custom Timing Used ExperimentTimeLocal TIMEMAX 172 Experiment Local Time as hhmmss 0 ExperimentTimeUTC TIMEMAX 179 Experiment UTC Time as hhmmss 0 ExposUnits 186 User Units for Exposure ADCoffset 188 ADC offset ADCrate 190 ADC rate ADCtype 192 ADC type ADCresolution 194 ADC resolution ADCbitAdjust 196 ADC bit adjust gain 198 gain Comments 5 COMMENTMAX 200 File Comments geometric 600 geometric ops rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 xlabel LABELMAX 602 intensity display string cleans 618 cleans NumSkpPerCln 620 number of skips per clean SpecMirrorPos 2 622 Spectrograph Mirror Positions SpecSlitPos 4 626 Spectrograph Slit Positions AutoCleansActive 642 T F UseContCleansInst 644 T F AbsorbStripNum 646 Absorbance Strip Number SpecSlitPosUnits 648 Spectrograph Slit Position Units SpecGrooves 650 Spectrograph Grating Grooves srccmp 654 number of source com
204. elect Toolbars and then Custom on the View menu The Custom Toolbar will appear on the desktop and its default configuration will be as shown in Figure 196 2 You can change position of the Custom Toolbar its layout and the number of buttons it contains Figure 196 Default Custom Toolbar Customizing the Toolbar Although the Custom Toolbar defaults with the buttons shown in Figure 196 many additional buttons are in fact available and can be added to the button using the Customize Toolbar dialog Figure 197 Buttons can be added or removed at any time and the new configuration will be saved when the dialog is closed Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons 5 Statistics Bial cauire Background B ecouie Flatfield y Move Spectrograph v gt Figure 197 Customize Toolbar dialog 211 212 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ee an Available Button Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by clicking on Custom Toolbar in the Setup menu Referring to Figure 197 note that the buttons available for placement on the Custom Toolbar are listed on the left Buttons already on the toolbar are on the right To add an available button to the Custom Toolbar first select it from the left hand list You may have to scroll through the list of available buttons to find the one you want You can choose where to place the button by selecting a button on the right side which will then be highlighted The new button
205. ensitive help for the active tab page or dialog Host computer The primary or controlling computer for a detector Mouse button Allows you to specify a region to be processed using the mouse Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region Note that the Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected MPP Multi pinned phase operation A mode that reduces the rate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more relaxing CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications Also called inverted operation NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory NVRAM contains factory programmed information about the controller and in many cases the camera detector Process button Causes the specified operation or process to be performed The process is performed on the data specified on the Input tab page and saved using the file name and data type specified on the Output tab page PVCAM Programmable Virtual Camera Access Method An exclusive Roper Scientific universal programming interface A set of software library routines that implements a detector or camera s operations in a hardware independent platform independent or virtual suite of function calls Once an application has been written to control one PVCAM enabled camera all PVCAM enabled cameras are then com
206. ensity in A D counts is reported at the X and Y position corresponding to the cursor position If a region is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the region coordinates length and height will also be reported You may have to lengthen the Information box for all this information to appear Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Figure 81 Graphical Display with Information box Note When you open the information box it becomes the active window To perform operations in the data display window such as changing the selected strip you must again make the data display window active by clicking the mouse cursor anywhere in the data box The data window title bar will become highlighted indicating that it is the active window and the cursor positioning functions will become operative again The data displayed in the information box will continue to be updated automatically 108 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ee a Single Strip Open the Display Layout dialog by selecting Layout on the Display menu 2 On the General tab page with Auto Select unselected click on the Display Type Graph radio button and then on OK The single data curve for the strip on which the cursor is positioned will be displayed v4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Figure 82 Single Strip displayed graphically 3 Try operating the cursor positioning keys to demonstrate t
207. equires at least two points defined by pixel and by units Naturally the more points used the more accurate the calibration The points must always be defined by pixel number but nanometers can be changed to another unit if desired Two mathematical models can be used to fit the calibration to the data The first Least Square calculates a linear approximation of the fit by minimizing the sum of the squares of the errors between the fit and the calibration points Linear approximation is generally sufficient The Polynomial method uses a higher order function of the form a bx cx where the order of the polynomial is the highest power of x used The general tule is Cal Peaks 1 Order maximum order 5 If four peaks are active in the Calibrate dialog the order of the polynomial can be 2 or 3 Even if ten peaks are used the maximum order of the Polynomial is 5 up to x9 As a general guide we advise calibrating using the Linear calibration method with widely separated peaks as previous described If the available peaks are clustered a Polynomial fit using the smallest order possible may give a good fit in the region of the calibration peaks but have increasing large deviation the further you get from them In an extreme case there may even be two values for the same pixel a clearly impossible condition that will result in an error message With the Linear calibration method at least two peaks are required to calib
208. er be named Pixel and Strip but rather the new labels 3 Try selecting different fonts to see the effect Only True type or Type 1 Postscript fonts will work correctly Open the Fonts dialog change the various font choices and click on OK twice To return to the original font choices select 10 pt Arial Regular 4 Reopen the Axes tab page and change the axis labels back to their original designations Pixel for horizontal Strip for vertical Version 2 5 K Display Layout Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 x General Range Color Axes a Layout Image Layout Cursor v Horizontal Axis Calibration On C Off Iv Label Units e wavelength nm M Vertical Axis M Label Strip Save as Default Cancel Help Figure 105 Axes tab page Font xl fs Font style O Arial Black Italic Cancel O Arial Narrow AvantGarde BakerSignet T BankGothic Md BT sEffects p Sampe Strikeout Underline EUN Color mmssk Script Westem ha Figure 106 Fonts dialog d the Color of the Axes and Labels Open the Color tab page Note that there is a button for each item to which a color can be assigned and that the current color for each item is indicated in a color swatch to the right of the button The default for the Axis is yellow 2 Click on Axis The color palette will open as shown in Figure 107 Default Display
209. er Reference avelength to Left of View Area Messages E OK Cancel Help Figure 71 Dispersion dialog Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 99 Note In the following steps four data sets will be taken each initiated by you The Start Procedure button initiates the first and the same button named Continue once the first data set has been taken is used to initiate each of the other three After each data set is taken you have the option of adjusting the cursor position on the peak However as previously explained this will not be required or advisable in most instances See the Peak Finder discussion in the Calibration Offset procedure The data sets are taken in the following order 1 Low peak 253 652 at the left of the display 2 Low peak 253 652 at the right of the display 3 High peak 579 066 at the left of the display 4 High peak 579 066 at the right of the display 3 Click on the Start Procedure button e WinSpec 32 will acquire the first data set and display it It will also calculate the Target Wavelength so that the Lower Reference Wavelength peak appears near the left edge of the display The Target Wavelength is the wavelength the spectrograph must move to in order for the reference wavelength to be properly located near the edge of the display e Ifthe peak is outside the display you should enter a Target Wavelength that might be better and click the Reposition button If the peak is too close to
210. er are updated with the Intel Pro 1000 Grabber Adapter Vision High Performance IP Device driver provided by Pleora Technologies Inc If this computer is connected to an Ethernet network via an Intel Pro 1000 card that does not use the Pleora driver the network connection will be broken To restore the driver for the Ethernet card that 1s used to connect to the network 1 Locate the EbDriverTool exe file e Download the EbDriverTool exe file to your computer from ftp ftp princetoninstruments com public software official winx32 v2525 patches e Or open the default Pleora directory Typically it is located at C Program Files Common Files Pleora Technologies Inc The EbDriverTool exe file may be in a subdirectory 2 Run the file 3 When this program executes select the appropriate Ethernet card and under the Action category choose Install Manufacturer Driver from the pulldown menu Appendix H Troubleshooting 261 eBUS Driver Installation Tool File Help Network Adapter MAC Description Current Driver Action 00 1b 21 3d 91 48 Vision High Performance IP Device Driver High Performance IP Device Driver Install Manufacturer Driver D0 1d 09 22 14 5d Vision High Performance IP Device Driver High Performance IP Device Driver Do Nothing Figure 217 Ebus Driver Installation Tool dialog box 4 After making the selection click on Install 5 After the installation you will be asked to reboot the computer You can e Click on
211. er mode e nepote Eee 201 Sync MASTER iene io ten nennen 204 T V Target Wavelength sese 99 Technical support viieni i nek 270 Temperature how done with each controller type 58 66 Temperature control ssseeeee 58 66 Threshold and Clipping procedure 180 Thresholding on line process 127 TIPE TIGS rS eh ately EA Sele ee 188 Time Constant sees 206 Timing Generator Interactive Gate Width and Delay 209 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup 208 TOOL tps oie oe tet eerte iode 20 Troubleshooting eeeeeeeene 257 Mul M 52 Version 2 5 K Upgrade Device Driver wizard 261 USB 2 0 data overrun ssesseeseeeeeeeneeeee eene 259 installation eere teret bete 26 Use for Auto Spectro Calibration checkbox 50 User UNIS ient emper eeren iKi an aT 88 Vertical skips i en 48 142 View Width Delay Sequence 207 Virtual Chip iuit det E em ua 218 W Z Warn When Crossing Laser Line selection 55 Warnings Crossing Laser Line warning to guarantee of ous E 55 Intensified cameras ssssseee 58 65 susceptibility of intensified cameras to light overload damage sss 58 65 Warranties image intensifier detector 00 lee eee 268 ODE YOabo ise ee hy Aik wee nre pur
212. er the new versions 2 5 and higher CANNOT be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec OR by the CSMA software package Start of Header Information 0 2996 Decimal short ControllerVersion short LogicOutput WORD AmpHiCapLowNoise WORD xDimDet short mode float exp sec short VChipXdim short VChipYdim WORD yDimDet char date DATEMAX short VirtualChipFlag char Spare 1 2 short noscan float DetTemperature short DetType WORD xdim short stdiode Byte Offset 0 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 Hardware Version Definition of Output BNC Amp Switching Mode Detector x dimension of chip timing mode alternativ xposure Virtual Chip X dim Virtual Chip Y dim y dimension of CCD or detector date in sec On Off Old number of scans should always be e Detector Temperature Set CCD DiodeArray type actual of pixels on x axis trigger diode 240 floa WORD hor ORD hor hor loa hor loa hor loa hor loa loa loa loa shor shor shor shor shor shor shor shor ct Gt Fh Eh Fh 0 Fh ro Mnw Sw m Cor TAE TUS T E TAR er eee E ren ee er en er EL CE CT Fh H O w CEFR PEPEE ER OF EEEE AARE 4 T LG 5 O K ct ct ct OO BW DMnANnNHDAMHA SZa O o ct WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5
213. era tab page 257 258 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Controller Is Not Responding If this message pops up when you click on OK after selecting the Interface Type during Hardware Setup under the WinSpec 32 Setup menu the system has not been able to communicate with the Controller Check to see if Controller has been turned ON and if the interface card its driver and the interface cable have been installed e Ifthe Controller is ON the problem may be with the interface card its driver interrupt or address conflicts or the cable connections e Ifthe interface card is not installed close the application program and turn the Controller OFF Follow the interface card installation instructions in provided with your interface card and cable the card to the SERIAL COM port on the rear of the Controller Then do a Custom installation of WinSpec 32 with the appropriate interface component selected PCI Interface or ISA Interface depending on the interface card type Be sure to deselect the interface component that does not apply to your system Note WinX versions 2 5 25 and higher does not support the ISA interface e Ifthe interface card is installed in the computer and is cabled to the SERIAL COM port on the rear of the Controller close the application program and turn the Controller OFF Check the cable connections and tighten the locking screws if the connections are loose e Ifthe interface card was installed after Win
214. ere ie eben 52 Selecting and Moving the Grating essere rennen nennen nennen 53 Entering Information for Software Controlled Slits and or Mirrors 54 iv WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Entering Laser Excitation Information ce cescesceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseecsaecaaecsaecsaeenaeens 55 Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 57 trod ctiOm ner eee Ruan teeta ea alu ER 57 Temperature Control 22 eire tee epe UP Ute ee eee e Pee AR Eee cesa 58 Cleans and SKips eet tice niet eet RE tete 59 Size EE 59 Experiment Setup Procedure All Controllers and Unintensified Cameras 59 Experiment Setup Procedures Intensified Cameras eee 63 Data Collection Procedures Intensified Cameras sess 63 Data Collection Unintensified Cameras esses enne nennen 63 Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection eese 65 Introduction Eee p EE B te ee ia t cq 65 Temperature Controls miseen ne ce iR e ites cain sible 66 Cleans and SKips xu eich See ea com eet be eee 66 Experiment Setup Procedure All Controllers and Unintensified Cameras 67 Experiment Setup Procedures Intensified Cameras eee 71 Data Collection Procedures Intensified Cameras essere 71
215. esh rate To obtain the fastest possible refresh rate simply operate with the axes and cross sections both switched off View menu and with the Zoom factor set to 1 1 Note that the Zoom 1 1 button on the Data Window toolbar is only present when viewing an image To check the refresh rate click on the Status bar bottom of screen Collection Status pane which is immediately to the left of the Timer pane right end of Status bar The refresh rate will be displayed in the Collection Status pane Do not confuse the screen refresh rate with the data collection rate Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 103 Data Displayed as a 3D Graph Data files can be opened as 3D graphs from the Open dialog Figure 75 shows a 3D graph with five data strips Figure 74 on the previous page shows a 3D graph with two data strips Both examples illustrate the behavior of the Auto Select algorithm as discussed on page 101 The following paragraphs contain procedures for opening and displaying data in graphical format s five strip SPE 1340 X 5 X 1 re C E NN Figure 75 3D graph with five data strips Displaying Hid lamp spe The data file used in this exercise is Hid lamp spe one of the data files supplied with your WinSpec 32 software 1 From the File menu select Open The Open dialog Figure 76 will appear allowing you to select the image to be opened The Look In box provides a browser function so that the directory where the images are
216. est point Figure 67 shows three possible peaks and illustrates the action of the peak finder in each case Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 95 Figure 67 Peak Finder Examples Peak A is perfectly symmetrical As you would expect dividing it into two equal areas and locating the cursor at the intersection of the divider with the peak will put the cursor precisely at the highest point Peak B on the other hand is not symmetrical but rather extends further to the right than to the left As a result the final cursor position is a little to the right of the highest point This is the correct peak location Any attempt to improve it by manually moving the cursor to precisely the highest point will degrade the offset computation Note that moving the cursor immediately changes the reported Error Do not assume that this means the cursor wasn t optimally located Rather it indicates a possible optical problem and the spectrograph may need to be realigned Peak C is like peak A but is accompanied by a number of noise spikes The peak finder is quite sensitive and might well select one of these spikes as the real peak and incorrectly place the cursor on the noise spike as shown in C If this happens the correct action would be to manually adjust the cursor position to the right so that it is on the true peak before going on Doublets are also a problem At any stage of the calibration procedure the peak finder might find the wrong peak of
217. et eie dera 112 Data Displayed as an Image sees nennen nennen tnter 116 Displaying Circuit Spe eet e n cte Hebe Dent aa e E Hg tL sate sed coi o Pha 116 Changing the Brightness Range eese nennen 117 Brightness Contrast Control 2 eie eei eftt eite tope tt eerie a 118 Selecting a Region of Interest arem eeaeee eee e ie o nennen 119 Opening the Display Layout dialog eee eee essecsseceeceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeenaeenaes 120 Viewing Axes and Cross Sections ssessssseeeeseeeeeee eene 120 Information DOXx u omnet pte ee ete pL ep a t petet e gp Let E eaa 121 Autoranging the Intensity in a ROI eese 121 Relabelmg the AXES eenen enre e tte ete ae et ede LE eget pet ott 122 Changing the Color of the Axes and Labels eee 122 Specifying a New ROI and Intensity Range esee 123 Displayme Z 5 lice e ter etre eU dae diee eo eon 123 Part 2 Advanced Topics 125 Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes sees 127 IntrOducti On nens n at n E ae rise BEER YURIR Ree ie sete eme aks 127 On Line Thresholding 2 2 5 2 ioo iae tee p Hp e ee aede 127 D scriptiOnD nete oce ec eh ee e nes a a Ae e ss IEEE Eds 127 Parameters Heuer Rte eee etse te as 128 Proced re 4e RE tede esee teme eet de SE Ree 128 On Line Absorb nce oxi deed onu aias 128 Descript
218. expected effects For example if you save a graph as a tif file and then open the file with an image editor you will see the data presented as a single strip image not as a graph Figure 55 Save As Data Types 4 Click on OK to save the file or Cancel to close the Data File Save As dialog without saving the file Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 81 Data File tab page Experiment Setup The Data File tab page provides you with ADC Timing Processes Save Load additional control and flexibility in naming and Main DataFie ROI Setup Data Corrections saving newly collected data Because the Data File Name j settings on this tab page are applied to data Nme SS acquisition not post processing make your entries before acquiring data The auto save mu increment File Nare auto name and auto increment features allow 7 Enable Current Value o g you to acquire data and save it according to the I filename template you define Also you can E i take advantage of the multiple open windows N Existing Files V AutoSelect functionality and specify that each new data run F Confim before overenting FLOAT opens a new window on the display window up ee Auto save and prompts Ask whether to save unsaved files v Use a new window for each run Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 56 Data File tab page Closing a Data File An open data window can be
219. f frames have been programmed it remains low until all have been taken then returns high Not Scan Reports when the controller is finished reading out the CCD array NOTSCAN is high when the CCD array is not being scanned then drops low when readout begins returning to high when the process is finished Shutter This signal is low when the shutter is closed and goes high when the shutter is activated dropping low again after the shutter closes In Gated operation SHUTTER is the correct choice and the signal should be applied to the inhibit input of the pulser to prevent pulsing during readout Shutter Comp Time Pre Delays the acquisition until the shutter if present is fully open The setting range is 0 to 30 ms For single strip spectroscopic measurements a setting of 0 is recommended RS170 Type Selections are NTSC US video standard and PAL European Show Custom Chip Advanced feature See Custom Chip discussion on page 215 Show Custom Timing Advanced feature See Custom Timing discussion on page 216 Anti Blooming THM 1024x1024FT CCD array Checking this box activates this CCD array s anti blooming feature Load Defaults From Controller Pops up the Load Factory Defaults From NVRAM dialog so you can repopulate the fields and selections with the values stored in the controller s non volatile RAM Launch Camera Detection Wizard Pops up the Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog so you can set up a new camera
220. fore operating it the first time If that opportunity is lost a newer SESSION DAT can be created by booting the 16 bit WinSpec software and then exiting the program in the usual manner Similarly a text editor could be used to open edit a copy of PIHWDEF INI and then save it so that it has the current date Uninstalling and Reinstalling If you suspect any of the WinSpec 32 files have become corrupt you should first delete all WinSpec 32 files then reinstall the software from the CD or the FTP site Follow the steps below to remove WinSpec 32 Note that some files may remain They will have to be removed manually To uninstall WinSpec 32 from your computer 1 Open the Windows Control Panel 2 Double click on Add Remove Programs 3 Highlight the WinSpec 32 version to uninstall and click on Add Remove Notes 1 The directory in which WinSpec 32 was originally installed will remain as will any files it contains that were not placed there during the original installation 2 The Data directory created during the original installation may also be deleted Any data files you want to save should be copied to a safe location before uninstalling 3 The Version and User identification will be removed from the registry However the registry also contains much information that was placed there in the course of setting up and operating the software That information will remain and will be available for use if WinSpec 32 is later reinstalle
221. formation PI MAX3 Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Gate mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gated mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your PI MAX3 manual for detailed information Data Collection Unintensified Cameras The following data collection procedure works for all Acquisition Calibration Toc controllers An underlying assumption is that a suitable light Experiment Setup source is available Although fluorescent room lighting may be Tabus adequate it will probably prove more instructive to use a Acquire standard lamp such as a mercury argon lamp that provided the dad Ideo Focus spectrum illustrated in Figure 39 Hardware 1 Select Focus from the Acquisition menu Figure 38 to i sii to s P Easy Bin begin collecting data An acquisition can also be started by Step and Glue clicking on the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog Readout Time or by clicking on the Focus button on the Custom Toolbar Data will be continuously acquired and displayed Acquire Background Acquire Flat Field 2 While observing the displayed data adjust the system optics Video for the best possible spectrum lines as high and narrow as Pulse Counter possible Figure 39 shows a typical mercury argon spectrum Your results could appear different depen
222. fter the edges of SyncMASTERI Width Delay Figure 190 Trigger Out tab page e If you will be using the Aux Out signal from the SuperS YNCHRO to trigger a piece of equipment enter the Auxiliary pulse width needed to trigger the equipment Then enter the pulse delay time The delay is based on TO in effect it is a delay from Sync MASTERI1 which also starts at TO 11 Click the OK button This writes all of the parameter values to SuperS YNCHRO Note If you are acquiring data and decide that some of the trigger or gating parameters need to be changed you must stop data acquisition first Then you can make the changes and restart data acquisition Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 205 Sequential Mode Parameters Gate Width Gate Delay Number of Spectra Start zi nsec Start 1 5625 zi nsec E 5 zd End 5 nsec End 201 a nsec MV Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed m Increment Type Fined Width Increment o nsec Delay Increment 4 96594 nsec Fast Vecsey Slow Decay Time Donstamt us Time Constant 410 use E Anplitude Emplitude fic E View Width Delay Sequence Iv Sequence Values To File Setup File C Exponential m On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for Exposure s Cancel Help Number of Images With
223. h a single row will be shifted vertically This information is based on the value in the Vertical Shift box The higher the value in that box the longer the vertical shift time Note If you are using a PVCAM supported camera the Vertical Shift rate is expressed in nsec row Use the up down arrows to change the Vertical Shift rate Vertical Shift Determines the speed of the image transfer from the exposed area of a frame transfer chip to the masked area Also sets the speed of image transfer when operating in the Kinetics mode Setting a lower value increases the shift speed A higher value gives a slower shift If the shift is too fast not all of the charge will be transferred If too slow image smearing will be increased due to the exposure that takes place while the transfer is in progress The default value gives good results in most measurements Note If you are using a PVCAM supported camera this parameter is hidden because the shift time is being adjusted via the Vertical Shift nsec row up down arrows Window Size Determines the height of the window for Kinetics mode The window size must be at least 1 row and less than or equal to the maximum number of rows for the array MPP This checkbox may appear if the CCD array is designed for MPP multi pinned phase operation When this box is checked the array will be run in MPP mode Some MPP capable arrays can also be run in Non MPP mode MPP box is unchecked Running in Non MPP
224. h parameters determine the photocathode gating and the MCP turn off Because the MCP is gated on earlier it is on for a longer period of time and therefore there is a slight loss of on off ratio However you would be able to capture a non repetitive event Anticipator Select this if the experiment is repetitive driven by an external trigger at a constant frequency and the event of interest would occur before the MCP has fully turned on It is critical that the trigger pulse be as jitter free as possible since the anticipator circuit will look at the pulse repetition rate for the first pulse to pulse period and then anticipate each of the subsequent external triggers in the series In this way the bracketing pulse is timed to lead the photocathode gate pulse by the anticipate time entered in the Anticipate By field The on off ratio in the UV is retained For proper operation the bracketing pulse must begin at least 500 ns before the gate pulse The minimum Anticipator Time is 500 ns or the minimum PI MAX bracket lead time from EEPROM minus the minimum Gate Delay time For example with a minimum Gate Delay time of 200 ns the minimum Anticipator time would be 300 ns 12 The Aux Trig Out tab page sets the delay time of the Auxiliary Trigger Output with respect to the PTG trigger time The minimum delay is 24 ns and the longest is 10 ms The resolution is 0 04 ns The auxiliary timer s output is available through the Aux Trig Out r
225. he Output tab page Figure 154 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 179 180 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Threshold and Clipping Clipping an image causes pixels outside the specified range to be changed When Clip High is selected all pixels with values greater than the Clip High value will be changed to the Input Parameters Output Clip High value When Clip Low is selected aparatin all pixels with values less than the Clip Low Threshold value will be changed to the Clip Low value o me Selecting Clip Both will use both Clip High Cb Bud and Clip low values during the same processing step Input Values The Threshold function converts an image to Threshold Value o binary black and white All intensity values below the threshold setting are zero black All LowClip those above become ones white High Clip Il d Procedure 1 Select Clipping Threshold from the Process menu Apply Close Help 2 Onthe Input tab page if the correct input E Eug E image does not appear in the Input Image Figure 155 Threshold and Clipping box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button to the right of the field Parameters tab page 3 Onthe Input tab page select th
226. he n d NEN i array may result in the best cleaning of the array the tradeoff is that there may be a significant delay between the receipt of a start exposure signal NOTSCAN signal at the SCAN BNC Ese cse gs goes high and the beginning of the actual exposure This delay occurs because the current clean cycle must be completed before a start exposure signal received during the cycle will be implemented Typically the default setting is much smaller and in time critical experiments the setting should be 1 or 2 Figure 119 Cleans Skips tab page The Number of Cleans value is usually set to zero 0 These are additional clean cycles that can be required after a start exposure signal is received and the current clean cycle has finished The maximum value for this entry depends on the controller For example the range of values for an ST 133 is 0 7 and is 0 255 for an ST 138 Continuous Cleans Clean cycles will always occur but an additional Experiment Setup cleaning function called Continuous Cleans is provided l l when the start of exposure is tied to an external trigger G e the experiment is being run in External Sync Timing Mode timing mode Extemal Syne I Continuous Cleans Figure 121 shows the timing diagram for an experiment Sher Cont with External Sync trigger active on the negative edge cla E 2 5 Note that the timing diagram shows two possible setups for the shutter
227. hed Figure 30 Temperature dialog Notes 1 The ST 133 additionally has a Temp Lock LED on the Analog Control module at the rear of the controller that visually indicates when temperature lock occurs 2 Ifyou are using the USB 2 0 interface or have a PVCAM based system with internal controller the Detector Temperature dialog will not display current temperature information while you are acquiring data Temperature Control for Other Systems ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 Controller Change the dial setting on the front panel of the Controller PentaMAX Set the temperature on the front panel of the Temperature Power Supply unit Micro View Not user settable Temperature is solely under software control Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 59 Cleans and Skips With some controllers specifically the PentaMAX ST 130 ST 133 ST 138 and internal controllers there is a Cleans Skips tab page in the Hardware Setup dialog Cleans are used to reduce charge buildup on the CCD array while waiting to begin data acquisition refer to Chapter 10 for more information Skips are used when the Region of Interest ROD is smaller than the full chip they allow binning and quick traversing of the rows that precede and follow the ROI For the procedures that follow load the default values for these parameters by bringing the Cleans Skips tab page to the front and then clicking on Load Defaults followed by Yes Exception With a P
228. heir effect The left right arrow keys move the cursor along the strip and the up down keys move it from strip to strip The Home and End keys move the cursor to the strip ends and Shift Home and Shift End move it the first strip and last strip respectively The Insert and Delete keys expand or contract the data about the cursor position 4 Restore the 3D display by selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout General tab page Cursor The cursor s appearance and behavior are a bit different with graphical plots than with image plots as detailed in the following table Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs Selection ImagePlot Graph 3DGraph None NoCusor NeCuse NoCuse Small cross both Small cross left right Small cross left right mouse and arrow keys arrow keys select pixel arrow keys change can place cursor at any on strip up down selected pixel on strip pixel on image Home arrow keys select strip Home key moves to and End keys move to be displayed first pixel End key to cursor to end points on Home key moves to last pixel Up down strip Shift Home first pixel End key to arrow keys move moves cursor to first last pixel cursor from strip to strip Shift End strip Shift Home moves it to the last moves to first strip Displaying the Data Large cross rays extend to edges of data set with projections through the cross sect
229. here you want the 1Omorestrip SPE yA 300i sPI stored file to go In the 1 strip SPE AA 3stip SF example illustrated the eat M trs file name is TESTFILEI l and it will be stored in a gt directory named Data If filename flestiet the filename doesn t automatically appear in Save as type Wink Data spe Canon v LL the browse box type it in The file type should be Figure 37 File Browse dialog WinX Data spe Click on the Save button to save the entered information and return to the Experiment Setup dialog Click on OK This will close the Experiment Setup dialog Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 63 Experiment Setup Procedures Intensified Cameras Refer to your PI MAX or PI MAX3 system manual for experiment setup instructions Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Data Collection Procedures Intensified Cameras WARNING Refer to your camera system manual for data collection instructions PI MAX and PI MAX2 Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Shutter mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gate mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your PI MAX manual for detailed in
230. hological operations are also accomplished by Input Parameters Output mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Morphological Parameters tab page There are two basic morphological mask operations Erode and Sepia jab sa C User defined Erode C Dilate Dilate The effect of the Erode process is to reduce Block Wu e the size of a white region while Dilation increases ole it All the options except for Block and User Defined C Vert ie EA C 5 diagonal Iterations perform the operation in a specific direction only s mE Block performs the operation in all directions Kernel Note Depending on the software version E p m Iterations and the Open and Close functions may be grayed out as in Figure 147 If these features are not grayed out Open is a number of erodes specified by Iterations followed by the same number of dilates Close performs the dilates first Mouse Apply Close Help and then the erodes Figure 147 Morphological Examples of some morphological operations follow Parameters tab page References are found at the end of this chapter In each case the same binary image is shown to the left and the morphologically processed image is shown to the right RA Figure 148 Original Image left and Dilated Image right e Figure 149 Original Image left and Eroded Image right Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 173 k L Figure 150 Original Image
231. hs 2 exposure Pis 4 xDimDet 7 6 mode 8 exp sec pe 0 asyavg 14 asyseq 16 yDimDet fe T8 date 10 20 ehour ra 30 eminute 32 noscan JK 34 fastacc ce 36 seconds Pad 38 DetType 40 xdim 42 stdiode 44 nanox 46 calibdio 10 50 fastfile 16 90 asynen 106 datatype 108 set TRUE calibra for YT data file tion type 1 time unit calibration type element number data time factor start time set to 1 if data should be reversed 0 don t reverse Decimal Byte Offset num of physical pixels X axis number of accumulations per scan if 32767 set to 1 and see lavgexp below 668 exposure time in milliseconds if 32767 set to 1 and see lexpos below 660 Detector x dimension of chip timing mode alt rnativ xposure in secs number of asynchron averages number of asynchron sequential y dimension of CCD or detector date as MM DD YY Experiment 1 Experiment 1 if noscan Time Hours Time Minutes as binary number of multiple scans 1 use lnoscan Exp riment Time Seconds as binary CCD DiodeArray type actual 4 of pixels on x axis trigger diode calibration diodes name of pixel control file asynchron enable fl experiment data type FLOATING POINT 0 1 LONG INT lag 0 off EG ER as binary Version 2 5 K x x
232. ial mode 198 continuous linear mode sss 198 Interactive Gate Width and Delay 209 Interactive Trigger Setup sssss 208 Operation of eet peo tet tes 196 repetitive gating setup 197 sequential gating setup sse 197 slope threshold termination amp gate delay from 197 triggermode erp etecie tette etie 197 Pulser operation esseseeeeeeenennene 189 PVCAMLINI eot 26 257 260 R S Reference Wavelength esses 97 Registty ree ten pete 254 Registry file on oe PRU 251 Reinstallation of WinSpec 32 esses 254 ROI defining a single region sess 149 graphical input MOUSE eee eect reer 150 image DINNING seen 145 UNAGING mode kyssi ettet 143 s tup mode eret reperies 143 Spectroscopy oei a mter edis 145 spectroscopy mode ssssseeeenene 143 Roper Scientific FireWire driver installation 27 Roper Scientific GigE driver installation 27 Roper Scientific USB2 driver installation 26 R5170 cct ined tete ice 43 RSCGonlig exe a onset See eem 260 Save As dialog box 80 Save as Type os er eene 80 Save Sequence Values to File 207 Saving data files endete 80 Saving temporary data files
233. ice list for details CC 100 Closed coolant circulator not a chiller designed for TE TEA or ICCD cameras UV Lens f 1 2 catadioptric lens only for ICCD or PI MAX cameras CCD Array Designators In the past the designators in the following list were often used on camera serial labels to identify the CCD array in the camera B Back illuminated CCD DDA Dual diode array CCD F Front illuminated CCD in many cases no letter is used E CCD made by EEV T CCD made by Thomson K CCD made by Kodak H CCD made by Hamamatsu HS High speed MicroMAX system runs at 5 MHz FT Frame transfer detector M MPP multi pin phasing CCD P Usually CCD offered exclusively by Princeton Instruments PDA Photodiode array R Deep depletion Usually refers to SITe arrays also see TK TK CCD made by SITe formerly Tektronix sometimes labeled S UV UV to VIS standard lumogen coating for UV response to 195 nm 232 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K UVAR Permanent UV to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome VISAR Permanent VIS to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome Y Interline CCD made by Sony 1 grade 1 CCD 2 grade 2 CCD 3 grade 3 CCD 64 array format is 1024 x 64 pixels 100 128 256 400 512 576 768 782 1000 1024 1100 1242 1280 1300 1317 1340 array format is 1340 x 100 pixels array format is 1024 x 128 pixels 256 element linear array ar
234. ich begins on page 75 1 Select Video from the Acquisition menu This will allow live data to be displayed on your video monitor a Set LUT m Exposure Control fo ooo sec Set Exposure r Focus Control RUN STOP Cancel Help 0 000 Seconds Zoom Par lix 2 4x CCC CCC ec amen S20 eek 3 Binning Decimation Hardware LUT 1 Gamma Set LUT Cancel Heb Figure 50 PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog 2 Select Video Focus from the Acquisition Menu The Interactive Operation dialog that will be displayed depends on the PentaMAX version Version 5 and higher will 74 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K display the righthand dialog shown in Figure 50 Earlier versions display the lefthand dialog Note the Hardware LUT field This selection sets the scaling of the video display only Unless the signal is very weak the best LUT choice will be Gamma Click on the RUN button in the Interactive Operation dialog Data acquisition at the fastest possible rate will commence immediately and the image will be displayed on the video monitor Note that the image will not be displayed on the computer monitor while the Interactive Operation dialog is open Focus the system optics and if necessary adjust the Exposure Time in the Interactive Camera dialog for the best viewed image The exposure time will be the same as that
235. ie et ceti 191 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog eee 191 Sequential Gating Setup dialog eere 192 Camera State dialog itte eerte tee Ett ent 193 DG535 dialog utenti nene e It e rte ne ect He ert eee 193 DG535 Comm Port tab page sees 194 DG535 Triggers tab page eet dette et obere cete 194 DG535 Gating tab page 5er re Rente rte dte ere ete heces 195 Repetitive Gating Setup ios tetti eid ei ete ee ect E ERa E atea 195 Sequential Gating Setup dialog serene 195 Camera State dialog eei petente Rd 196 P lsers dial s 4 n eet erede tee Ett es 196 PTG Triggers tab page et dee e ct eet etg 197 PIG Gating tab page eee eee bee idee es 197 Repetitive Gatin Setup eere cte ente ette ee ee Ee cep oot eec eene 197 Sequential Gating Setup box ener 198 PTG Aux Trig Out tab page eee ect teet centia 200 Camera State dialog eterne ese ett tese 200 Pulsers dialog nectit pete tecti ptem detras 201 SuperSYNCHRO dialog 4 e eter rte ote 201 SuperS YNCHRO Gating tab page esseseeeeeeeeeeeerenren ene 202 SuperS YNCHRO Repetitive Gating dialog Internal Trigger on left External Trigger on Tient serre tete ertt Re a Eire gies ect re dte ee ete ose 202 SuperS YNCHRO Sequential Gating dialog Internal Trigger 203 SuperS YNCHRO Sequential Gating dialog External Trigger 204 Trigger Qut tab page
236. ies and Number Of Samples Exposure Time close the dialog 60 a fi 00 mSec Aquisition Mode Average Snapshot C Focus 10 Initiate data acquisition As the data is acquired Y T points will be computed and stored If multiple equations were Display Parameters defined they would be computed in order and there would be a separate Y T curve for each Selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout Main SelectAll page would allow all of the curves to ee be viewed simultaneously If the selection is Graph only one would be visible The keyboard cursor up down arrow keys can be used to select the Y T curve to be viewed and the Info _ Cancel Lose box shows which strip is being displayed Figure 116 YT Setup dialog ASCII Output File Description The ASCII Output process allows you to select and set parameters for saving the data to an ASCII file The ASCII Output Setup dialog Figure 117 allows you to specify the delimiter and the line termination character to be used when the data is stored in ASCII format The choice of delimiter and termination character depends on the requirements of the program into which you will be importing the data When storing the file WinSpec uses the filename and location parameters entered on the Experiment Setup Data File tab page Parameters Delimiter Select one of the following as the delimiter to be used Delimiter C C Semicolon omma C Tab Space T
237. if number of pixels needs to be changed If you are doing binning the number of pixels digitized after hardware binning is complete must be an even number Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning 145 2 The focal plane array FPA used in the 2 D OMA does not support hardware binning but does support ROI selection For this array any binning must be performed via the software binning function or as a post acquisition process Software Binning If blooming is an issue you can use software binning instead of hardware binning Software binning is activated by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page While software binning will prevent saturation of the CCD chip shift register pixels it is not as fast as hardware binning Note The binning that is set up on the ROI Setup tab page occurs while data is being acquired You can also perform post acquisition binning on previously acquired data For more information see Binning and Skipping page 182 Spectroscopy Mode X axis binning can be used in spectroscopy mode to improve the signal to noise ratio However in many instances a longer exposure time higher light level or use of an intensified system may prove to be better ways of improving the signal to noise ratio in that they don t degrade the resolution As stated earlier Y axis binning is the key factor that distinguishes spectroscopy readout from imaging readout In spectroscopy all pixels in each column of an
238. igure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 X WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Dijo cT 271 Figures Opening WinSpec 32 from the Program Manager eene 30 Splash Screen e dr cette sett ite ree b liebe eee ge 31 Main WinSpec 32 window eese ener rennen nen 31 DSOTUPANENU EE 33 Possible System Configurations eese nennen 34 Air Cooled System with Internal Controller Diagram 34 Liquid or Air Cooled System with External Controller Diagram 35 Cryo Cooled System with External Controller Diagram 35 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog eese 36 Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware dialog 36 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome Manual selected dialog 37 Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk dialog 38 Camera Detection Wizard Test Image dialog
239. igured you can print the active window simply by selecting Print from the File menu shortcut Alt F P or by clicking on the Print button in the standard toolbar 2 Color mapping to the printer may differ from that shown on the screen To obtain the desired output color mapping you may wish to do a screen capture and then paste the image into a graphics program for final adjustment before printing Print Preview The Print Preview function gives you a quick idea of how the printed image will look It produces an on screen print that looks as closely as possible like a real print allowing changes in the printer setup to be made quickly and conveniently Figure 162 illustrates the Print Preview window Chapter 17 Printing 187 x 4 WinSpec 32 Hid lamp spe f Print Next Page Hes To Rage LZoomin_ Zoom Dut Close Z 1 4838 er005 Hidlamp spe 701 X40 X 1 X 310 Y 36 Page 1 ose eg o ee fe pe pen rc Z Figure 162 Print Preview window The button functions are as follows Print Opens the Print screen so a print can be initiated Next Page If the file contains multiple frames each one will occupy a different page The Next Page button allows you to step forward sequentially through all available pages If the file contains only one image the Next Page button will be grayed out Prev Page Allows you to step backwards sequentially through the pages of a multiple image fil
240. imum The check box allows the Maximum threshold function to be switched ON checked or OFF unchecked When the function is ON you can enter the maximum threshold level This can be any positive or negative value in the range of possible intensities provided the setting is higher than the Minimum setting This setting will be retained when the function is switched OFF When the Maximum threshold is ON and data is being acquired any intensity value above the set value will return a 0 When it is OFF all intensities higher than the Minimum will return a 1 Note Background subtraction can force negative values Procedure 1 Select On Line Thresholding on the Experiment Setup Processes tab page The Online Thresholding Setup dialog will open Set the Minimum and Maximum threshold enable status and set the threshold values Click on OK to save your entries and close the dialog Then click on Acquire or Focus to initiate data acquisition On Line Absorbance Description Absorbance is defined as the Log base 10 IR I where IR is the reference spectrum and Iis the sample spectrum Absorbance is also defined as the log of the inverse of the transmission Thus increasing absorbance means the transmission is decreasing and an absorbance of zero means that IR I Absorbance Setup x Live Reference Strip fi a C File Name El Cancel Help Figure 111 Absorbance Setup dialog Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisitio
241. in terms of y and y Note that the wavelength at the center of the exit plane does not depend on the focal length f However the wavelength at points off center depends on both the focal length and the detector angle the angle of the image plane relative to the plane perpendicular to the spectrograph focal axis at the center of the image plane see Figure 207 For some wavelength relatively close to A at the same grating angle X d m sin a sin B d m sin o sin B amp d m sin vy y 2 sin y y 2 amp 3 The angle amp depends on the focal length f the detector angle 6 and the distance of from the center of the image plane nx where n is the number of pixels from the center and x is the pixel width the relationship is given by tan amp nx cos 9 f nx sin 5 as shown in Figure 207 4 When the image plane is perpendicular 0 and this reduces to tan amp nx f Using the known parameters of focal length f detector angle 5 number of pixels from center n and pixel width x first calculate the angle amp from equation 4 The grating angle y can be calculated using the known parameters center wavelength A diffraction order m grating grooves per mm 1 d and inclusion angle y from equation 2 Finally the wavelength at pixel n is calculated using equation 3 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration nx gt distance from center
242. inSpec 32 software either by using the spectrograph stepper motor position Spectrograph calibration or by performing a wavelength calibration Spectrograph calibration described in Chapter 7 precisely calibrates the movement of the spectrograph gratings Wavelength Calibration is good for one position of the grating only Once you move the grating by hand or by controlling the stepper motor a different wavelength calibration must be performed for that spectrograph position Note Even after the spectrograph setting is fixed moving the sample refocusing or almost any adjustment of the input optics can have an effect on the wavelength calibration For the most accurate calibration possible Princeton Instruments recommends recalibrating the system after any optical adjustment Changing the WinSpec 32 Calibration Method Switching between Wavelength Calibration and Spectrograph Calibration is controlled using the Usage dialog This dialog determines whether calibration is turned on or off and which type of calibration is used The display can be calibrated by controlling the stepper motor of the spectrograph called Spectrograph Calibration discussed in Chapter 7 or the display can be calibrated for a fixed spectrograph position by entering the position of known peaks from a known source such as a mercury or neon lamp The calibration of the spectrograph for a fixed position is called Wavelength Calibration and is described in this chapter
243. ing This option is required if you are using two gratings with the same groove density If for example you have two gratings with 300 grooves mm one blazed at 300 and one blazed at 500 you could enter BLZ300 and BLZ500 in the Name boxes as identifiers These are the Acton default names Then when you subsequently go to the Move Spectrograph dialog to select the active grating they would then be listed as 300 BLZ300 and 300 BLZ500 and there would be no possibility of confusing them If significant backlash occurs when moving the selected grating check in the Required box and then enter the number of steps required to correct for the backlash If your spectrograph has more than one turret replace the turret change the Current Turret value and enter the new grating information WinSpec 32 will store and recall the different sets of grating information for each turret Note that there is a checkbox for displaying a warning during a grating change Since the time to change a grating can vary widely depending on the spectrograph this message could be very helpful If two rates are available for your spectrograph you can also choose the rate either faster slew or slower scan The actual rate will depend on the spectrograph Depending on the spectrograph manufacturer and model there may be a difference in wavelength setting accuracy for the two speeds Selecting and Moving the Grating Once the required groove and turret information
244. ing the Cleans Skips tab page to the front and then clicking on Load Defaults followed by Yes Exception With a PI MAX camera Cleans should be set to 1 and Strips per Clean to 4 Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 67 Experiment Setup Procedure All Controllers and Unintensified Cameras 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog Figure 41 from the Acquisition menu or by clicking on the amp button on the Custom Toolbar On the Main tab page set the following parameters Exposure time 0 1 second Number of Spectra Images Use Full Chip selected Accumulations 1 Amplifier if available High Capacity If this is a reported only parameter set it by selecting FAST on the ADC tab page Avalanche Gain Cameras with electron multiplying CCDs Set to 0 initially and disabled Enable and increase the gain for low light level images Experiment Setup ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections m Exposure Time Number of Images fi CCD Readout Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest X 653 Y 492 Readout Dimensions r Accumulations Number fi Amplifier High Capacity Low Noise r Avalanche Gain Gain 10 E Enable zi Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Figure 41 Experiment Setup Main tab page On the Timing tab page Figure 42 set the following parameters
245. interconnections to an optional coolant circulator an optional external shutter and spectrometers 33 34 WinSpec 32 Manual WinSpec 32 DLLs Snap Ins Macros PVCAM Interface Card Controller external or internal Liquid Cooled Air Cooled Cryo Cooled cco CCD CCD Camera Detector Camera Detector Camera Detector eee bas 5 Cables and Hoses Coolant Circulator I i Optional User VO m Ses pias eh Interface Cable m AC Power Cord 258888 Detector Controller Cable e a a a Shutter Cable Z z Coolant Hose Figure 5 Possible System Configurations USB or Data Cable Camera with internal controller 110 220 Optional External Shutter l EXPERIMENT Spectrometer l Computer Figure 6 Air Cooled System with Internal Controller Diagram Version 2 5 K Power Supply 110 220 Chapter 2 35 Basic Hardware Setup 110 220 Computer 110 220 Detector Controller Interface cable p 4 TAXI or USB 2 0 1 Inlet Shutter pis m m 110 220 Coolant ioue Detector Circulator gt I i I Detector Serial Com UD StS J i or USB 2 0 l l Controller E a Spectrometer E T e VETEN Detector r Peet Shutter EXPERIMENT Spectrometer Vl or m m 4 m l S T Detector Controller Interface cable TAXI or USB 2 0 11
246. interface Therefore we recommend replacement of the USB 2 0 interface module with our TAXI interface module and Princeton Instruments PCI card If this is not the case and data overruns continue to occur contact Customer Support see page 270 for contact information 260 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Error Creating Controller message This message may be displayed if you are using the USB 2 0 interface and have not run the RSConfig exe program see previous topic if the PVCAM INI file has been corrupted or if the ST 133 was not turned on before you started WinSpec 32 and began running the Hardware Setup wizard WinView 32 INFORMATION 4 WinView 32 INFORMATION 4 Error Creating Controller Error 183 Error Creating Controller Error 129 Figure 216 Error Creating Controller dialog Error 129 Indicates that the problem is with the PVCAM INI file Close WinSpec 32 run RSConfig make sure the ST 133 is on reopen WinSpec and begin running the Hardware Setup wizard Error 183 Indicates that the ST 133 is off If you are running the Hardware Setup wizard when this message appears click on OK turn on the ST 133 and on the PVCAM dialog make sure Yes is selected and then click on Next The Hardware Setup wizard should continue to the Controller Type dialog Ethernet Network is not accessible When the Princeton Instruments software is installed all Intel Pro 1000 interface card drivers found on the host comput
247. ion 4 iae ep eie d ne he ede cete ce 128 Procedure iste HR ete ciate shades re EE t ats tege SUR eere as 129 One Lime VT ero tee UN EH Rer ER Ee Nee E Reo e Ee RA one 129 D SsGriptiOn 2 i rte ue oe e Ee aee e ce ttp ed tco dep eie te 129 YT Area and Equation Setup cin et ek eee eme erede co tede eoe de 130 XE Setup utet gerer ital ded ERR Het de 134 YT Analysis Procedure ted eee teme ertet de SP eee 136 ASCH Output File sner 2 inte ne PER e ntes eg oa dad eletto ern 137 Description im eie eh Rede 137 vi WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ParamieterS onde eoe pene nee Hlc ER tee e Re et da ee Re Erde dd 137 Procedure ete ER WR ete Eo ce i bets 138 Chapter T0 Cleaning rogue aou aue Cua e aevo uu eoo eoe do n Ce Re Dra oe cae dsc doen aan doe 139 Iigoniesteo TEE 139 c IeaniCyeles eere ene erat pite 139 Continuous Cleans deei ute Ete p nett Hee pie regen e t bep e Rates 140 Continuous Cleans Instruction neret 142 ROIs and Cleaning 22 er e b tee etie Le p a t pee etes beide da 142 Kinetics and C leaning innere ree hee e Ede depu peregre 142 Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning eeeeeee creen 143 OVET VIEW seem ien ette ee coitus ee ay cheese oci toe et teer s 143 General esp egens i eR dee eet 143 Spectroscopy Mode ree teen eee pec eiiis cedente belies s 144 Imagine Mode sss eee Ro ed HR e oed Ho See 144 Binning Group and Height parameters sees nen
248. ion may be issued to incorporate such change Table of Contents Part 1 Getting Started 15 PEF OOUC HOM ipee p Tc TA 17 Summary of Chapter Information sees nre 17 Part 1 Get np Started so eter ee eee etait eles 17 Part 2 Advanced TOpICs i iiir eb eee ed ie Hate le Posta 18 Part 3 RefereBce s deer ee eret hp eee Pe Do ree eae RED Tea 19 Online Help 5e pi den tte ee feet o tee de e te EH Rt cepe E ee UR Lure eae 19 Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages cssceseceseceseceseceseceseeeseeecaeeeaeeeaeecaaecaaecsaecnaeeaeens 20 Additional Documentation intei tt eene eet EU e iege Re Lise ic re bs dee 20 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 21 System Requiremients 2 2 dede de UHR e Leer He ege ed toe toe 21 Hardware Requirements 2 teste belt temere E dnte 21 Operating System Requirements sese ener nennen nennen nene 23 Your System Components eee aiiiar teet thee a tenenti seta en ntn E ne enn 23 Installing the PCI Card Driver dete eui Ced ee dedere recede 25 Installing the USB 2 0 Card Driver we cece ceeeceseceseceseceseesseeeeneeeaeeeseecaaecaaecsaecnaeenaeen 26 WinSpec Version 2 5 25 and later esses 26 Installing the FireWire Card Driver eeeesesseeeseeeeeeeeneen eene ennemi 27 Installing the GigE Ethernet Card Driver
249. ion profiles if displayed Both mouse and arrow keys can place cursor at any pixel on image Home and End keys move Same as Small Cursor and Graph combination 109 Shift End to last Strips may all be from same frame or each may be from a different frame Same as Small Cursor and 3D Graph except that cursor ray projections through the cross section profiles are provided These will not necessarily be visually aligned with the cursor cursor to end points on strip Shift Home moves cursor to first strip Shift End moves it to the last strip Strip Selection As described above when displaying data as a graph the up down arrow keys can be used to select a higher or lower numbered strip This is true if displaying multiple strips or a single strip For additional utility where a large change is required Shift Home can be used to move the selection to the first strip and Shift End to move it to the last one Four of the Custom Toolbar buttons similarly allow the selected strip to be changed when data is displayed as a graph K Selects the first strip Selects the last strip 2 Selects the next strip Selects the previous strip These buttons have no effect on the strip selection when viewing data as an image Instead they select the first last next and previous frame respectively if the data set contains multiple frames Note When displaying the data as a graph to view data from multiple fr
250. ions subdialog The simplest way to label a display would be to place the ROI where the label should appear the origin starts at the top left corner of the ROI box right click inside the ROI box type the label text and click OK Figure 90 Label text entry box Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 115 s4 Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 This is the label Hg Argon Figure 91 Data with Finished Label Figure 90 shows a label as entered in the label text entry box Figure 91 shows the same label as it will appear with the data after clicking on OK Generally it is advisable to save the label in a comment field otherwise once the label is printed and the display is closed the label will be lost In fact once the label is on the display it cannot be edited However if it has been saved it can be edited as follows Erase labels Call up the display label menu Load the label Edit the label in the edit box Check the Save Label box to save the changes 6 Click OK to print the corrected label Uy Dep dorm Labels are printed with the same font as is used for the axes To change fonts use the Display Layout Axes dialog and select Fonts this works even if axes are not displayed To reposition the label move or resize the ROI and Edit box before you click on OK Moving the box however requires that you position the mouse very near the edge of the box because further in the Edit box will capture the mou
251. iously installed the Application Maintenance dialog Figure 210 will be displayed i WinSpec 32 Setup 2 5 25 2 Application Maintenance Select the maintenance operation to perform Change which application features are installed Displays the Select Features dialog which lets you configure individual features agog B C Repair Reinstall missing or corrupt files registry keys and shortcuts ET Preferences stored in the registry may be reset to default values C Remove 3 Uninstall VinSpec 32 from this computer Wise Installation Wizard R Figure 210 Application Maintenance dialog 4 Select the Modify radio button and click on Next i WinSpec 32 Setup 2 5 25 2 Select Features Please select which features you would like to install i Feature Description Documentation SampleData Diagnostic Programs Spectrograph Suppot Pulser Support Snapins PI Screen Saver Visual Basic Interface Y This feature will remain on your local hard drive Ihis teature requires UKB on your hard drive It has 6 of 10 subfeatures selected The subfeatures free up 168KB on your hard dri Wise Installation Wizard R Figure 211 Select Features dialog 5 On the Select Features dialog click on the feature you want to install or uninstall and select the appropriate action from the list 6 Thenclick on Next and follow the instructions on the dialogs A
252. is not transferred However it has an advantage in that the full resolution of the image is retained Many text editors and graphics programs allow images to be pasted directly from the clipboard Paint Shop Pro a shareware program is one example of an inexpensive program that can edit and save clipboard screen shots 1 Open the application Open a new file within that application 2 Select Paste from the Edit menu This will place the contents of the clipboard into the application If the image seems cut off try opening a bigger blank image before pasting the clipboard The image is now an 8 bit color or grayscale image 3 Crop the image if desired This feature is available in almost any image editing program 4 Select Print from the File menu Print the file Save the file if desired TIFF is an excellent image format for either grayscale or color shots Note Screen capture images lose the high dynamic range of the original The Copy function Ctrl C retains the full resolution of the data file Saving as TIF and Printing It is also possible to save an image file directly to 8 bit Tif or 16 bit TIFF format by using the Save As function on the File menu The resulting file could then be copied to a graphics editing program for further processing and then printed Images saved as 8 bit Tif can be opened with a variety of programs for example Imaging for Windows Kodak Microsoft Paint Jasc Paint Shop Pro or Ado
253. isplayed when the file is opened check Auto Select Leave Auto Select unchecked if you want to retain control over whether the data will be displayed as an Image Graph or 3D Graph TI WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Auto Select is the factory default selection In addition one of the three radio buttons Image Graph or 3D Graph will be selected but grayed out if Auto Select is checked If Auto Select is unchecked the grayed out selection will become active and govern how the file is opened e When Auto Select is checked the way the data is displayed depends on the number of data strips it contains gt If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image such as that shown in Figure 96 page 117 gt If there are at least three data strips but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 75 page 103 If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips as shown in Figure 74 page 102 Asingle strip will always be plotted as a simple X vs Y plot Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shifts position as required to read true for the selected strip e If Image is selected all data points will be plotted as a function of the strip and pixel number e f 3D Graph is selected multiple data strips will be plotted as a function of inten
254. ke the Experiment Setup following selections ADC Timing Processes Save Load Auto Increment File Name Main Data File RO Setup Data Corrections Enable should be OFF liens Overwrite Append Existing Name E Files Select Overwrite data file will overwrite an existing file having the same name s v Enable Current Value fio 4 Overwrite Confirmation Check this box so that you will be warned that the specified file a name is already in use If not Iv Confirm before overwriting Float z checked the old data file will be Auto save and prompts overwritten by the new one No ask whether to save unsaved files warning is provided Data Type AutoSelect Should be selected Auto save and prompts Select Acme _Focus Lancel Heb Don t auto save or ask to save With this selection you won t receive a prompt when a file is closed as a result of starting a data collection A prompt will still be issued if you close the file explicitly and it has not been saved since being collected Use a New Window for each run Leave unchecked Auto Increment File Name r verwrite Append Data Type EAMON Existing Files V AutoSelect M Use a new window for each run Figure 36 Data File dialog Click on the button to the MSEE xl right of the Name field Swen cos eaae This will open a browse IET cu box Select the directory 1035strip SPE 4 2stip SE w
255. ks increasingly smaller the region preceding and following the region of interest is traversed as rapidly as possible while minimizing risk of the shift register saturation Minimum Block Size Sets the size in rows of the skip blocks that immediately precede the data The default value will generally give good results Number of Blocks Sets the number of binned skip blocks preceding and following the region of interest The default value will generally give good results Note The 2 D OMA array does not support vertical skips and all of the rows on the array are read out and converted before the non ROI information is discarded The default Vertical Skips settings of Minimum Block Size 2 and Number of Blocks 5 while appearing to work will result in invalid data Instead you must change these settings to 1 and 256 respectively for the 2 D OMA array Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 49 Setting up a Spectrograph WinSpec 32 allows you to control several types of spectrographs More than one spectrograph can be installed in the system at one time The total number of spectrographs is limited only by the number of free communication ports The following spectrograph operations can be performed after you define your spectrograph e moving a spectrograph grating e automatic calibration of acquired data according to the spectrograph position e changing to a different grating for some spectrographs and e changing the e
256. l Trigger on left External Trigger on right Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 203 Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog will appear In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly Fixed or exponentially as the measurement progresses Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses In any case if the measurement is to be done in the Sequential Gating mode set the gating parameters as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog will close and return you to the SuperS YNCHRO dialog Sequential Gating Setup Gate Width Gate Delay Number of Spectra Stat 5 usec v Stat usec v zd n Gus E H ues End 201 H uec Iv Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed Increment Type G Fred Width Increment 0 nsec Delay Increment 5 usec Exponential fio x see m View Width Delay Sequence Save Sequence Values To File On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for 1 1 Exposure s Can
257. l customers should contact their local Princeton Instruments authorized representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www princetoninstruments com Limited One 1 Year Warranty on Refurbished or Discontinued Products Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of the CCD imaging device which carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED this product against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after shipment During this period Princeton Instruments will repair or replace at its sole option any defective parts without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to return the product to Princeton Instruments International customers should contact their local Princeton Instruments representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www princetoninstruments com XP Vacuum Chamber Limited Lifetime Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants that the cooling performance of the system will meet our specifications over the lifetime of an XP style detector has all metal seals or Princeton Instruments will at its sole option repair or replace any vacuum chamber components necessary to restore the cooling performance back to the original specifications at no co
258. le is added pixel by pixel to the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to add a A Operation B fc constant entered on the B tab page to LINEAR _ NON LINEAR each point on the A file with the results Addition C Logl written to the C file Subtraction C Natural Log C Multiplication rig F Subtraction The B file is subtracted pixel by AN 5 dst om n quare pixel from the A file and the results are FIMIN IM MN written to the new file It is also C MAX possible to subtract a constant entered on the B tab page from each point on por ee t the A file with the results written to the P E C file C Exclusive OR TE Pie BINARY Multiplication The A file is multiplied pixel PT by pixel by the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to multiply each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file Apply Close Help Figure 137 Operation tab page Division The A file is divided pixel by pixel by the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to divide each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file MIN The A file is compared pixel by pixel with the B file and the smaller of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B
259. lecting data An acquisition can also be started by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button on the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen and on the video monitor 2 To store the most recent image click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page 3 If you want to initiate data acquisition select Focus again To store the new data to disk repeat Step 2 This completes initial data acquisition with an ST 133 Controller PentaMAX Controller The procedure that follows for the PentaMAX Controller is in two parts Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized focus mode operation should be ended and data collection performed Focusing This procedure applies for Interactive Camera Operation x a PentaMAX system that Hardware LUT r Exposure Time r Pattern includes a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC of the PentaMAX If your system doesn t include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section wh
260. ler and rotatable ConFlat flange Designed for direct imaging of very low energy X ray lt 30 eV ProEM EMCCD electron multiplying CCD Optimized for both traditional CCD and on chip multiplication gain operation Internal controller Air and liquid cooling Vacuum guaranteed for the life of the camera Quad RO High performance X ray system Systems can effectively provide X ray photon counting capability with up to 16 bit dynamic range 1 1 fiberoptic taper and multi port output Thermoelectric cooling SPEC 10 High performance spectroscopy system Wide variety of CCD arrays Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available SPEC 10X P High performance spectroscopy system with XP lifetime vacuum This system can be thermoelectrically air cooled down to 80C and has software selectable six speed digitization up to 2 MHz SpectruMM Name used for some ST 133 based spectroscopy systems with an RTE head TriVista Consists of three imaging corrected Acton Research spectrographs that can be used in single double and triple configurations May incorporate PMT detectors and or one or more Princeton Instruments CCD detectors VersArray High performance general purpose imaging system Wide variety of CCD arrays in imaging formats Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available VersArray High performance low light imaging system for astronomy MCP readout pressure sensitive paint PSP wind tunnel testing semiconducto
261. llion pixels Collecting larger images at full frame or at high speed may require 128 Mbytes or more of RAM e Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage Collection of large images may require additional hard disk storage depending on the number of spectra collected and their size Disk level compression programs are not recommended 21 22 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ATTENTION Not all computers are able to satisfy the software and data transfer performance requirements of Princeton Instruments systems If you purchased a computer through Princeton Instruments it will have already been tested for proper operation with a Princeton Instruments system and will have the Interface card installed Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory required will depend on desired display resolution Two button Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse e Host Computer USB 2 0 Protocol AT compatible computer with Pentium 3 or better processor that runs at 1 GHz or better Native USB 2 0 support on the motherboard or USB Interface Card Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCI is recommended for desktop computers and the SUG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 is recommended for laptop computers Minimum of 256 Mb of RAM
262. ls vertically and horizontally 146 WinSpec 32 Manual Defining ROIs Version 2 5 K TIP You can acquire a full chip data set without losing your ROI definitions To do so simply click on the Use Full Chip radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page As long as Use Full Chip is selected the ROI setup parameters are ignored and data collection will result in full frame data sets To switch back to a defined ROI pattern click on the Use Region of Interest radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page Examples of Spectroscopy and Imaging ROIs Figures 125 129 show possible ROI patterns Note that the patterns in Figure 129 demonstrate varying size ROIs a feature of Imaging Mode CCD Chip defined ROI pattern Figure 125 Single Full width ROI CCD Chip ROI Pattern 1 ROI Pattern 2 ROI Pattern 3 Figure 127 Multiple Full width ROIs CCD Chip CCD Chip partial width ROI pattern Figure 126 Single Partial width ROI CCD Chip ROI Pattern 1 ROI Pattern 2 ROI Pattern 3 Figure 128 Spectroscopy Mode Multiple Partial width ROIs defined ROI i computer ROI CIERRE AENEIS defined ROI Figure 129 Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs with Different Widths Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning 147 Constraints on Defining Multiple Regions of In
263. lt of a Laplacian operation on a region of uniform density is zero Boundary features are enhanced by varying degrees Sobel Edge Detection The Sobel edge detection method is more involved but produces greatly enhanced features Number the squares of the subregion of the image as follows Ag Ay Ag A7 A3 As As Ag The replacement for the center cell called R is R X Y2 where X A5 2A3 Ay Ag 2A4 Ag Y Ag 2A A5 Ag 2As A4 Figure 143 illustrates the effect of edge detection on an image i gt Figure 143 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right Edge Enhancement Procedure Use the following procedure to perform Edge Enhancement on an image 1 Select Edge Enhancement from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed Pratt William K Digital Image Processing John Wiley amp Sons New York 1978 pp 487 488 170 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determin
264. lting Data eee 147 Easy Bin dialog iei dae eet ect tertie 148 ROI Setup tab page Spectroscopy Mode see 149 ROI Setup tab page Imaging Mode see 150 Data Corrections tab Palenie nerian aiaia 152 Blemish Pile 5 5 iie et e e vaste d dunes ne ect He et eed 154 MathidialOg eere e bee ed e 155 Operation tab page docs cist it petet eset oe ri rte eee gcn 157 Post Process Glue dialog eee 161 Step and Glue Setup dialog esee ene 163 Input tab page ene eb Rea Pe eee e L o t elo 167 O tput tab page ie citri ettet ete ee RED ete dete 167 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page essere 168 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right 169 Sharpening Parameters tab page essere 170 Original Image left and Smoothed Image right 171 Table of Contents Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure
265. ly described below A mask is an n x n matrix n is 3 for all WinSpec 32 operations that is placed over every n x n subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed in the central position in the output file An example will help illustrate the process The following is the Laplacian 1 mask used to enhance edges Version 2 5 K Edge Enhancement X Input Parameters Output m Operation C User defined Laplacian 1 Laplacian 2 Laplacian 3 Apply Close Help Figure 142 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 Here is an example of a 3 x 3 subsection of an image The middle pixel has the coordinates 100 100 20 20 19 20 21 20 20 19 20 Multiply each pair of corresponding numbers and sum the products 1 x 20 C1x 20 C1 x 19 C1x 20 8 x 21 C1 x 20 C1 x 20 1 x 19 C1 x 20 10 The result is placed at position 100 100 in the output image file The mask is now placed over the 9 pixels centered at 101 100 and the procedure is repeated Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 169 Laplacian Masks The three Laplacian masks on the Edge Enhancement dialog operate just as described above Since the sum of the mask coefficients of the Laplacians sum to zero the resu
266. m speed allowed by the converter If the camera is a PI MAX with a Thomson 512 CCD select FAST ST 130 owners must confirm that their controller s internal hardware jumpers are properly set for the desired speed See the ST 130 manual for details Version 2 5 K Experiment Setup Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load m Timing Mode External Syne Continuous Cleans r Shutter Control Normal Pre Open C Fast Mode Se Delay Time fo c00 3l Seconds I WatFoTTL TTLUme i H Edge Trigger edge Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 32 Experiment Setup dialog Timing tab page Experiment Setup ADC Timing Processes Save Load l Mai DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections Arithmetic Flatfield xj m CCD Blemishes r Cosmic Ray Removal Remove Pai C Temporal Blemish Fle Wane Spatial H SETISIUVIU ve 50 ud Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 33 Data Corrections tab page Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection Type For systems having more than one A D converter both FAST and SLOW will be available Make this selection before selecting the rate or resolution Controller Gain PentaMAX only Set to Gain 3 Resolution Number of bits Choices limited by A D type selection Bit Adjust ST 138 only Set to No
267. m Port the tront Mode Bracket Pulsing Select Repetitive or vd CON OFF Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gating setup dialog will appear Figure 174 In this mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay remain constant over the course of the measurement If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Cancel Download ToDG535 Help Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click Figure 173 DG535 Gating tab page on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog will close and you will return to the DG535 Gate Width See dialog 500 El 7 1000 FS gt Sequential Mode Mai i nsec m If Sequential is selected the r Software Accumulations Sequential Gating Setup dialog Repeat Width Delay for will appear as shown in fi Exposure s Figure 175 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width Cancel Help and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either Figure 174 Repetitive Gating Setup linearly or exponentially as the The measurement Gate Width 7 Gate Del progresses Linear is suited Pot PS umber of to sweeping over a time EE Start 900 zi nsec x Start 1000 nsec x fi interval to locate and recover End owo sec End fiooooo nec e and event that takes place at cente Iv Check Gat
268. manual for detailed information 15 After you have finished setting up the parameters click on Download to DG535 This writes all of the parameter values to the DG535 16 Click on OK to close the window Note The DG535 can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected Programmable Timing Generator PTG Unlike the PG200 and the DG535 the PTG is not a free standing instrument but rather a plug in module designed for installation in a special version of the ST 133 Controller This novel and highly integrated approach to timing generator design with its advanced high speed electronics low insertion delay and programmable functions achieves superior performance as the ultimate gate controller for the PI MAX Intensified Camera Basic PTG operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The gate functions of the PI MAX camera are controlled by the PTG If the system is Camera Has Been Set To Safe Mode equipped with a PI MAX camera the Camera Select The Desired Action State dialog Figure 176 will appear when the Keep in Sale Moda software is started Although the software always initially places the PI MAX in Safe mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting OK Shutter Mode or Gate Mode Ex C Restore To Last Setting Figure 176 Camera State dialog 1 Following the intensifier precautions s
269. me The currently selected Controller Type Camera Name is displayed in this field If you change the controller that is being used in the system choose the correct name from the selection list displayed by clicking on the button at the end of the field Appendix A provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and CCD arrays Note After you have selected the Controller Type you can load the default settings for your controller camera and CCD array by clicking on Load Defaults From Controller if this button is present Controller Version In the case of the ST 133 and PentaMAX controllers different versions have been released having different capabilities The available software selections will correctly reflect these differences when the proper version number is specified in this box Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 41 Camera Type The selected Camera Detector CCD Type is displayed in this field Clicking on the button at the end of the box drops the selection list so that the selected type can be changed if necessary Note that the listed camera types depend on the controller selection requiring that the controller type be specified first Shutter Type There are six None If the camera has no shutter frame transfer or interline CCD array and is not an Intensified camera select None Small A small shutter is one that is typically 25 mm or smaller in diameter This setting represents a shutter compensation time
270. me detail in Tips and Tricks section of the PI MAX PI MAX2 or PI MAX3 system manual 206 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed If this box is checked and you specify a gate width or delay outside the allowable range a warning message Figure 191 will be displayed Clicking Yes will cause the parameter in question to be set to the limit value Clicking No will cause the parameter setting to be retained but the actual value will still be the applicable minimum or maximum If the box isn t checked the applicable minimum or maximum will be established automatically WinS pec 32 7 The Ending Pulse Delay Of 13 Is Less Than The Minimum Of 21 Do Y ou Want To Reset This Value To The Minimum Figure 191 Range Limits Exceeded Warning Fixed Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay is the same from shot to shot The actual increments depend on the specified starting and ending values and on the Number of Images The increment values are calculated and reported in the associated fields Exponential Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay changes from shot to shot The precise delay and width of each shot with respect to To is determined by the values entered for the Fast Decay and Slow Decay Time Constant and Amplitude parameters In fluorescent decay experiments for example there will t
271. me of the slower of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the fast decay Amplitude Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the slow decay with respect to the fast one For example if you know that the amplitude of the slow decay signal is typically one fifth the amplitude of the fast decay signal you could enter 1 for the slow decay amplitude and 5 for the fast decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering slow and fast amplitude values of 1 and 5 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 10 and 50 View Width Delay Sequence Opens a dialog listing the currently Width usec Delay usec programmed sequence of gate width 5 000000000000 1 000000000000 and gate delay values 5 000000000000 6 000000000000 5 000000000000 11 000000000000 5 000000000000 16000000000000 Save Sequence Values to File When this box is checked the sequence values will be saved on completion of the run The values saved are those actually used to take the data The file could be recalled later and used for data normalization or othe
272. ming the steps in this order is absolutely necessary for correct calibration Theoretically if you were to move your spectrograph to the zero order peak or any other known peak the peak would fall exactly on the center of the array In the real world the mechanical tolerances of the mounting will probably result in the peak being a few pixels off The Offset procedure that follows allows you to correct for this small offset error 1 Select Info on the View menu The Info dialog should be visible This will help indicate the Selected Grating 1200 status of spectrograph movement and data KEENE collection Wavelength Pe zi Offset Value o 2 Inthe Spectrograph Calibration dialog click on E a nm the Offset button This will open the Offset TA eee dialog Figure 66 3 The dialog that appears has a Reference Instructions Wavelength entry box This is the wavelength Make sure that Cursor is on top of Peak move if necessary then where the spectrograph is set for the offset Click OK if Error is acceptable or Click Continue to calculate new Offset measurement All Acton spectrographs use the zero order that is a setting of 0 Messages 4 Click on the Start Offset Procedure button E ee The spectrograph should now move to the reference wavelength and data acquisition will OK Cancel Help commence Then a peak find will be performed and the resulting data will be displayed Figu
273. mode may result in higher dark current in addition to larger full well capacity Note MPP capability reduces the rate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more and thus relaxes CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications LOGIC OUT Output The choices for the signal provided at the controllers SCAN Output connector vary based on the selected Controller If the LOGIC OUT field doesn t appear on the tab page the choice of output may be done via an internal jumper for information on how to set the jumper contact factory Tech Support Depending on your system the following choices may appear in the drop down list Cleaning This signal is high when an array Clean cycle is in progress and otherwise low Logic 0 Establishes a TTL logic 0 at the Logic Out connector Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 43 Logic 1 Establishes a TTL logic 1 at the Logic Out connector Note LOGIC 0 and LOGIC 1 can be used to control an external device using the application software Not FT Image Shift This signal is low when a frame transfer shift is in progress and otherwise high Not Ready After a Start Acquisition command this output changes state on completion of the array cleaning cycles that precede the first exposure Initially high it goes low to mark the beginning of the first exposure In free run operation it remains low until the system is halted If a specific number o
274. n 83 274 WinSpec 32 Manual Math A B and C tab pages cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 data types DY aio si sie ieee CREUSE E 156 1lO8t x eti EEE eret eee 156 int156 long Ae ahus bite tisiite iia ins Saks 156 pinnam et 156 fil tab pages cese n 155 operations single file one Ree 156 single file and constant eee eee 156 Parameters data type seen cnn nre 156 display result sse 156 Frame isse beca eite 155 Input Output file name eee 155 X and Y Range osse ceteris 155 procedure u sve 159 Mathematical Models wavelength calibration sess 89 MAX math operation ssseeeereee 157 Memory requirements essere 21 MIN math operation seseeeenene 157 Morphological parameters one nem etre aes 172 proced re 2 ene doeet 173 Mo se Cursor M 31 Mouse requirement essen 22 Multiplication math operation 157 N O Natural Log math operation sss 157 Non Linear math operations esses 157 NOT math operation eseeeeeene 158 NOTREADY signal esee etm tet 43 NOTSCAN signal eee 43 Number of Images sese 205 Offset Adjust and Dispersion parameters 91 On CCD Accumulations esee 208 On line data acquisition processes absorban
275. n Version of SW creating this file newl20 Type II 2 old120 Type I 3 ST130 4 ST121 5 ST138 6 DC131 PentaMax 7 ST133 MicroMax SpectroMax 8 ST135 GPIB 9 VICCD 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 1 if flat field was applied Kinetics Trigger Mode label Name of Pulser File with Pulse Widths Delays for Z Slice Name of Absorbance File if File Mode Number of Times experiment repeated Number of Time experiment accumulated Set to 1 if this file contains YT data Vert Clock Speed in micro sec set to 1 if accum done by Hardware set to 1 if store sync used set to 1 if blemish removal applied set to 1 if cosmic ray removal applied if cosmic ray applied this is type Threshold of cosmic ray removal number of frames in file max intensity of data future min intensity of data future y axis label hutter type shutter compensation time readout mode full kinetics etc window size for kinetics only clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer computer interface eisa etc May be more than the 10 allowed in this header if 0 assume 1 an isa taxi pci if multiple controller system will have controller number data came from This is a future item Which software package created this file number of ROIs used if 0 assume 1 left x start value right x value amount x is binned grouped in hw top y start value
276. n Experiment Setup Main tab page Full Chip dimensions If your camera contains a large array such as a 2048x2048 array and the DMA buffer size 1s too small there will not be enough space in memory for the data set 4 Open Setup Environment Environment dialog Increase the DMA buffer size to a minimum of 32 Mb 64 Mb if it is currently 32 Mb or 128 Mb if it is currently 64 Mb click on OK and close WinSpec Reboot your computer Restart WinSpec and begin acquiring data or focusing If you see the message again increase the DMA buffer size Appendix H Troubleshooting 263 Serial violations have occurred Check interface cable WinSpec 32 ERROR X Serial violations have occurred Check interface cable Figure 219 Serial Violations Have Occurred dialog This error message dialog will appear if you try to acquire an image or focus the camera and either or both of the following conditions exists e The camera system is not turned ON e There is no communication between the camera and the host computer To correct the problem 1 Turn OFF the camera system if it is not already OFF 2 Make sure the Detector Controller cable is secured at both ends and that the computer interface cable is secured at both ends 3 After making sure that the cables are connected turn the camera system power ON 4 Click OK on the error message dialog and retry acquiring an image or running in focus mode Note This error message
277. n Processes 129 The Absorbance Setup dialog allows either of two absorbance modes to be selected depending on the reference used The reference signal Ip can be either live Live Reference Strip selected or taken from a file File Name selected and entered If live then the experiment generally will have 2 strips one reference and one sample there can be more than 2 up to n with 1 reference and n 1 samples Any strip in the ROI can be selected If taken from a file then the file must have the same dimension as the live data and in this case every strip in the file will be the reference for the corresponding strip in the live data The button at the right of the file name entry box opens a browser to facilitate locating the file The largest signal for absorbance live is when the reference is full scale and the sample is 1 and you are using an 18 bit A D With this configuration the largest signal for absorbance live is the Logio 262 144 1 5 42 The software therefore limits the signal to 5 5 If the sample goes to zero or negative background subtract 5 5 is used as the answer In the live mode because IR equals I for the reference strip this strip will always have an absorbance of zero Procedure 1 Select On Line Absorbance on the Experiment Setup Processes tab page The Absorbance Setup dialog will open 2 Set the Minimum and Maximum threshold enable status and set the threshold values 3 Click on OK to save your
278. n at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values 5 Load the LUT LUT files must be of the type TXT The file name can be entered directly or selected by using the browser clicking on the button at the end of the field opens the browser 6 Click on the Create Binary LUT button to convert the text LUT to binary 7 Click on Apply to begin convert the input data values to the output values specified per the LUT 176 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Look Up Table Formats The contents of a look up table text file are entered using an ASCII text editor and the file is saved with a TXT extension The format used within the file depends on the type of remapping one to one remapping of intensity levels or a user defined selection of input to output values Format 1 This format is for a one to one mapping of intensity levels Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter The subsequent values are supplied one output value per line The mapping assumes that all of the input intensities in the specified range are represented by an output value Therefore the number of output values in the text file must cover the range Imax Imin 1 Input levels below Imin are mapped to the value of Ofirst and input levels above Imax are mapped to the value of Olast Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ofirst Ofirst is the output value for Imin
279. n calculations will be performed how many will be performed and on which acquired data they will be performed 130 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Each time equation calculations are performed one Y T analysis value is produced for each equation For example in a one hour experiment with one Y T equation and a Y T sample time of one minute at the end of the hour a Y T analysis curve sixty points in length would have been taken and stored If two equations had been defined for the same experiment at the end of the hour there would be two Y T curves each sixty points in length An additional Y T curve for the time will always be provided as well These Y T curves are stored and can be displayed printed or processed the same as any other data Note With on line YT the raw data is preserved Two data sets are acquired and displayed the raw data and the YT data associated with it YT Area and Equation Setup Before activating on line YT analysis you must define the area s to be monitored and enter the equation s to be used to perform Y T analysis of spectral data as it is acquired Select YT Setup from the Acquisition menu and begin entering areas and equations You can enter as many as eight areas and four equations For any given analysis you can use previously stored equations or define new ones Y T analysis will not take place unless the On Line YT check box on the Experiment Setup Processes dialog is checked Note In
280. n eS epe ana d Se eee 155 Source Data and Destination Selection eseeeseeeeeeeeeeneee nennen 155 Operations petet gre wee bre eee et eae a ee 156 Operation Descriptions sissen inon tpe egere eee eatin ed Aa at deaths 157 Linear Operations nni de ate tinted ete else tante eee oett eee 157 Non Linear Operations 2 5 22 2 0 41e decederet ete tied ee eee to 157 Bitwise Operations een ee epe e eene hd ede ce ette 158 Binary Operations s 33 cei sided ies se He aet tyre ERR eere ata 158 Procedure eed eae RR ne tnde esito TEE T 159 Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra sissies cir Core bee zu Due ae ioco Feder YT Reeve p eue nnmnnn Ra 161 Introduction ea RR EH e Cede em ceo eite e d cu eese 161 Table of Contents vii Nini c 162 Theory isdem E tuae be e P ae ele 164 Calibration and ROLL Offsets ie eet ettet oo dened etes eee pete ote ghee 166 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes eese 167 Introduction oie ter tte tpi eei eter piste 167 Input tab Page 5 ie ete ped Ue liie a e Eee pet taeda 167 Qutput tab page iere tere e Dee tette npe ben Pn petes Meet ose 167 Edge Enhancement 2261 521 be efe teet pL gp Ra t eed bet spe Ltd E aani 168 Parameters tab page 5 et It t ER eee ped 168 Laplacian Masks 2 2d timete te Pe ee de E pee pet oed 169 Sobel Edze Detection eter epe REN ete lee eee GO her doe a 169 Edge Enhancement Procedure
281. n only be used to install Princeton Instruments PCI TAXT interface based systems both Princeton Instruments PCI TAXI and PVCAM supported systems can be installed by using the autodetection function previously described The manual function is very similar to the Hardware Detection Wizard but you are not given the opportunity to install a PVCAM based camera In addition unless you want to acquire the optional test image this function does not require that the system be turned on 1 Run WinSpec The Camera Detection Wizard will automatically run if this is the first time you have installed a Princeton Instruments WinX application WinView 32 WinSpec 32 or WinX Test 32 and a supported camera Otherwise if you installing a new camera type click on the Launch Camera Detection Wizard button on the Controller CCD tab page to start the wizard 2 Onthe Welcome dialog Figure 11 select the checkbox and click on Next This wizard will attempt to detect the camera system you are using Please make sure your system is connected to the computer and powered on before proceeding Cancel Help Figure 11 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome Manual selected dialog 3 In most cases you will not be getting a New System Configuration Disk with your system Therefore the default selection is NO If you do have such a disk you would select YES and follow the directions for loading the information from that disk Click on N
282. nce 251 Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations sess 255 Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 sess 257 Appendix l Glossary sese 265 223 224 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference Use the cross reference table below if you need to determine the controller type and or camera CCD type used by your system This table is based on the Princeton Instruments brand systems that are currently being sold by Roper Scientific Inc Many of these systems incorporate non volatile RAM NVRAM that has been factory programmed with the default hardware setup parameters for the controller camera and CCD array included in your system If you know the controller type used by your system you should be able to download these default parameters However if this functionality is not available for your system you will need to manually enter the information Note Because Marconi changed its name to e2v you may see CCD types with the prefix MAR EEV or e2v These CCDs are manufactured by e2v Controller Type Camera CCD Type 2D OMA V 320 ST 133 5 MHz XEN 320 I PentaMAX Gen II or Gen III PentaMAX EEV 512x512FT MicroMAX 512EBFT ST 133 EEV 512x512FT CCD57 MicroMAX 782Y ST 133 PID 582x782 MicroMAX 782YHS ST 133 5 MHz PID 582
283. nd hardware Before installing the PCI card in your computer turn the computer off Follow the instructions supplied with your computer for installing an internal card and install the PCI card After you have secured the card in the computer and replaced the cover turn the computer on When Windows boots it will try to install the new hardware If it cannot locate the driver you will be prompted to enter the directory path either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI WinSpec 32 automatically put the required INF file into the Windows INF directory and put the PCI card driver file in the Windows System32 Drivers directory Windows PCI INF Filename PCI Device Driver Name Version Located in Windows INF Located in Windows System32 Drivers directory directory Windows XP rspi inf in WINDOWS INF rspipci sys in WINDOWS System32 Vista 32 bit for example Drivers for example The INF directory may be hidden Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations 26 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Installing the USB 2 0 Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows XP and Vista 32 bit to install software and hardware Before installing the Princeton Instruments USB2 Interface we recommend that you defragment the host computer s hard disk This operation reduces the time the computer spends locating files Typically the defrag utility Di
284. nd implements changes made to the Custom Toolbar Reset Restores the default Custom Toolbar configuration Help Opens the context sensitive help for the Custom Toolbar Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings 213 Move Up Together with Move Down Move Up determines the position of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves up one position Move Down Together with Move Up Move Down determines the position of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves down one position 214 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Chapter 20 Software Options Introduction The WinSpec 32 options described in this chapter can also be purchased from Princeton Instruments Contact Princeton Instruments Customer Support for order information Custom Chip WXCstChp opt Caution Introduction If this option has been installed selecting Show Custom Chip checkbox on the Controller Camera tab page adds the Custom Chip tab page to the dialog The Custom Chip parameters are shown in Hardware Setup 1133 Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Chip Custom Timing Default CCD KDK 512x 768 Rows Parallel Figure 198 The default values To Shift Shift Register Register Columns conform to the physical layout i n
285. need a shorter period change the settings for example enter a smaller Y dimension or use binning in the Y direction and click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button again Click on Close 12 From the Setup menu select Environment Note When setting up for focusing the number of Frames Interrupt should be left at 1 13 14 15 16 17 DMA Buffer Mb By default the buffer size is 8 Mb Using the following formula calculate the amount of DMA memory required Xx Y x Frames x 2 bytes pixel For example the buffer size required for a 47x47 virtual array acquiring 1000 frames would be 47 x 47 x 1000 frames x 2 bytes pixel 2 4 4 Mb If the calculated value is greater than 8 Mb enter the appropriate size Note This value is not enabled until you restart your computer Frames Interrupt If the number of frames is greater than 256 the preprogrammed slot limit for a PCI card increase the number of Frames Interrupt value Use the formula Frames 256 and round the result to the next highest integer to calculate that value For example 1000 frames 256 will result in 3 9 so enter 4 Note This value should be 1 for Focus mode Click on OK after you have finished entering the Environment settings Place a suitable target in front of the camera and click on Focus to verify that the camera is seeing the target Make any focusing gain or other adjustments necessary to fine tune the image Stop running in F
286. ng pixel in the Flatfield file If both Flatfield and Background are selected the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction 154 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K CCD Blemishes Columns specified as bad in the blemish file will be replaced by interpolated data based on the column before and the column after the bad column as data is collected After you click on the Remove checkbox you can select the appropriate blemish file Clicking on the button at the right of the Blemish File Name field opens a browse dialog so you can locate and select a file If you don t have a blemish file but have determined that there are one or more bad columns you can create one to be used Note CCD Blemishes removal may not be implemented in early releases of the software Creating a Blemish File 1 Open an ASCII text editor i CCD Blemish ble Notepad loj xj File Edi Format Help 2 On the first line key in the number of columns on the CCD For example you would key in 1024 if the CCD format was 1024 x256 Press Enter En e n3 D e 4 Foreach CCD column enter either a 0 no blemish ora 1 blemish and press Enter If there was only one blemish and it was in column 10 you enter 9 Figure 135 Blemish File lines of Os a 1 in the tenth row and Os in the remaining 1014 lines 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 5 When you have finished entering the Os and 1s save the file with a BLE extensi
287. ng the areas and entering equations click on OK to save your entries and close the dialog 5 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu and click on the Processes tab 6 Click in the On Line YT check box to turn on Y T analysis and activate the Setup button Y T analysis will take place during any data acquisition run initiated while this box remains checked 7 Click on the Setup button to open the Y T Setup dialog Comment Base Corr Comment e2bherMen Win GHars pem Tio piel New Area_ Hange F rom Mouse Delete Area Baseline Correction Delete cias r Define Equations Equation Equation E4 hare Nom ehas Store Equation New Equation Calculator Delete Equation Cancel Help Figure 114 YT Area and Equation Setup dialog Experiment Setup Main Data File RAI amp etin Nata Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load T On Line Thresholding On Line Absorbance Setup V On Line YT Setup ASCII Output File Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Figure 115 Experiment Setup Process tab page Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes 137 8 Set the Y T Acquisition mode Focus Snapshot or Average and set the Y T Aquisition Parameters Analysis parameters Run Time Computed S ampleTime 3600 d Seconds 60 Seconds 9 Click on OK to save your entr
288. ninstall selected files To do so 1 Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 email techsupport princetoninstruments com WEB http www princetoninstruments com iB CONTINUE Copyright 2004 Princeton Instruments Trenton NJ USA b Future Start the installation program click on CONTINUE click on Install WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 and then click on Install WinSpec 32 for Windows Refer to Figure 208 below Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Installation CD Install WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 IB Install PVCAM BB Exit Installation CD Copyright 2004 Princeton Instruments Trenton NJ USA iB BACK Installation CD Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Install WinSpec 32 for Windows Install WinView 32 for Windows Bi install WinXTest for Windows B Exit Installation CD Copyright 2004 Princeton Instruments Trenton NJ LIS Figure 208 WinSpec WinView or WinXTest Selection dialogs 2 Onthe Enter Password dialog enter the password and click on Next 251 252 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Enter Password This installation is password protected Enter the installation password into the field below Password coren Figure 209 Media Password dialog 3 Because WinSpec 32 was prev
289. no other action it doesn t move the cursor The Label Display action brings up a dialog and opens an Edit box Inside the ROI as shown in Figure 88 114 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K O x Qressseresssrscsssersrsss V s Label Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 x Load Load File comment number Save Label in File comment number p Cancel Remove existing labels Settings Help Figure 88 Label Display action The dialog allows loading a previously saved label from one on the SPE file s 5 comment fields alternatively you can type the label into the edit box The label can be saved into a file s comment field when OK is clicked The source comment field and the destination comment field can be different Clicking Remove existing labels will erase all previous labels from the display before adding the current label The Settings button brings up a dialog with options for the label itself Figure 89 The Display Label Settings Ma ee ad dialog allows you to change the color of im Direction ES OK the label text to choose between an opaque s oll os Cosi white background and a transparent ides Background background and choose whether the labels Remow Transparent Opaque Help are to run vertically or horizontally The opaque background works well with cancel images where the label can get lost inside the image Figure 89 Label Opt
290. nstalled When you click on Run Experiment on the FITS dialog the experiment will begin At completion of the experiment the data will be displayed in WinSpec and a FITS file will automatically be generated and saved Note When this option is installed the FITS exe file is placed in the same directory as the Winspec exe file i WinX 32 FITS File Converter BEI of Run Experiment Display FITS File Convert SPE File s Save Header to File None m Adaline dde m FITS Header Format Standard Custom Primary Data Wiri 32 Data Keyword Value Comment Value Type Add Withee Wate esr Header Add FITS File Header Figure 200 FITS dialog Macro Record WXmacrec opt Macro Record is a convenient method to automate routines and repetitive data acquisition and analysis tasks A macro is created automatically whenever a sequence of operations is performed in WinSpec The recorded macro generates a VBScript file that can be edited to provide maximum flexibility For more information refer to the WinSpec 32 online help and the PDF of the WinX32 Programming for Macro Record manual provided as part of the option package Typically the manual is stored in the WinSpec32 Documentation directory when you install the option Note As part of the Macro option installation the Macro menu is added to the WinSpec 32 menu bar A Macrol m x Option Explicit Sub Main Dim VinX Set Wink Creat
291. nstant offsets caused by the amplifier system in the controller as well as time dependent but constant for a fixed integration time buildup of dark charge Some users collect background spectra with the shutter open including ambient light in their background data The background subtract equation is Raw image data Background Corrected image data When background and flatfield operations are both performed background subtraction is always performed first The equation is the following Raw image data Background Flatfield Corrected image data Below are instructions for collecting and using background data files Acquiring Background Files This operation is similar to normal data acquisition 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the detector has reached operating temperature to ensure stability 2 Setthe same binning parameters ROI and Exposure Select Acquire Background from the Acquisition menu This will immediately acquire a background file using the Experiment Setup parameters only the shutter will remain closed for most applications To acquire a background with the shutter open or if the Acquire Background feature is too restrictive in some other way a background file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected and stored enter the filename in the Background Subtract filename box on the Experiment Setup Data
292. ntain their initial position The Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger outputs are independently programmable Figure 165 PG200 Triggers tab page Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 191 M the Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger Outputs Set the Delay Trigger and Aux Trigger initial delay 2 Setthe Delay Trigger output to be synchronized to either the Trigger or the Gate pulse 3 Setthe Aux Trigger output to be synchronized to either the Trigger or Triggers Gating Comm Pot the Gate pulse Mode 4 Click on the Gating tab Figure 166 C Sequential 5 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button For safety the Gating Mode HV Pulsing selection should be Disabled Gating Mode HV Pulsing Note In setting the PG200 gating E Enabled C Disabled parameters whether for Repetitive or Sequential operation see your PG200 Apply Changed Settings Apply All Settings Manual for pulse width and delay Cancel He limitations Note that gate pulses are capacitively coupled in many Princeton Instruments intensified camera heads so high duty cycles and gate widths longer than 1 ms may lead to reduced gating efficiency Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Figure 166 PG200 Gating tab page Y r Bate Width r Gate Delay Gating setup dialog will appear as shown in Figure 167 In the Repetitive zl fec xl E ir gating mode the Ga
293. ntinue until terminated Average In this mode as in the Snapshot mode you set the Y T Run Time and the Y T Number of Samples that will be taken Also as in the Snapshot mode the Average mode allows convenient Y T analyses of long processes to be easily performed Unlike the Snapshot mode however no data is skipped even though only the specified number of Y T calculations are performed at the computed intervals The difference is that all of the acquired data is stored in a buffer space over each interval When the Y T calculation is performed it is done on the average of all the data acquired over the preceding interval For example if doing a one hour run with once a minute Y T calculations the data buffer would store all of the data acquired for one minute Then the Y T computations would be done on the average of the stored data to develop one Y T point for each equation After that the buffer would be cleared and data storage for the next interval would begin anew As with the Focus and Snapshot modes for Y T analysis purposes if there is more than one data strip only the first data one is available for Y T analysis purposes At the end of our hypothetical one hour run n Y T curves n being the number of equations each 100 points in length will have been acquired and stored These could be displayed in the same manner as for the Y T Focus and Snapshot modes previously described As is the case for the Focus and Snapshot modes data
294. ntrance slit size and or the selected mirror for some spectrographs The following steps explain how to set up a spectrograph You must correctly install a spectrograph before you can control any of its functions through WinSpec 32 l 2 3 Make sure that the spectrograph is correctly connected to a host computer COM port Turn on the host computer and the spectrograph Spectrograph Move Wait for the spectrograph to finish initializing and then boot Define WinSpec 32 If this isn t done although you will be able to eae install the spectrograph it will not be possible to establish Figure 20 Spectrograph menu communications and an error message will result Select Define on the Spectrograph menu Figure 20 This will open the Define Spectrograph dialog Figure 21 On the Main tab page note the Active Spectrograph text entry box If spectrographs have previously been installed the active one will be indicated If no spectrograph has been previously installed the box will be blank Note there is a checkbox that allows you to designate a particular spectrograph as the one that will be used for doing an Auto Spectro Calibration Define Spectrograph x Main atan Laser wavelength f0 nm asenne I wWam When Cros smala Install Remove Spectrograph cect tee Figure 21 Define Spectrograph dialog 50 WinSpec 32 Manual Click on Install Remove Spectrograph This
295. ocus mode Now click on Acquire 222 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Experimental Timing Triggering can be achieved through the software via the Software Trigger timing mode selectable on the Experiment Setup dialog Timing Mode tab page or it can be achieved via the Ext Sync input on the rear of the camera Triggering from the Ext Sync input allows you to acquire a single image per TTL pulse If Software Trigger has been selected back to back collection of the requested number of images will be initiated when Acquire is selected no further TTL trigger input is required Tips If mechanical masking is used the mask can be a static one fixed dimensions in which case multiple masks should be made to accommodate a variety of imaging conditions Alternatively a more flexible mask can be manufactured by taking two thin metal sheets with a square hole the size of the exposed region of the CCD cut in the center For a 512 x 512 pixel CCD array with 15 micron pixels the exposed region would be 7 68 mm x 7 68 mm These masks should be anodized black to prevent reflections in the optical system and they should be very flat These two sheets can then be slid relative to one another to achieve any rectangular shape required The sheets should be placed flat in the optical plane and their openings should be centered on the optical axis Ideally they should be able to move with an accuracy of 2 3 pixels per step 30 45 microns in the X and Y di
296. omputed in order and there would be a separate Y T curve for each Selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout Main page would allow all five to be viewed simultaneously If the selection is Graph only one would be visible The keyboard cursor up down arrow keys can be used to select the Y T curve to be viewed An advantage of Focus mode is that no data is missed A disadvantage is that the amount of Y T data stored can quickly become quite large and much of it might be of limited value when studying a process that is changing slowly Focus mode can be quite useful for making an initial evaluation of a process Inspection of the Y T focus mode results might then suggest more productive Y T analyses that could then be made using either the Snapshot mode or the Average mode Snapshot In this mode you set the Y T Run Time and the Y T Number of Samples that will be taken The Snapshot mode allows convenient Y T analyses of long processes to be easily performed Although data might be taken at short intervals for a long period of time a Y T analysis is only done on the most recent data set at specified intervals Most of the data sets taken over the course of the experiment are skipped For Y T analysis purposes you only have access to the first strip of data if acquiring multiple strips To better understand this process assume an experiment designed to characterize a process that will take about an hour Assume a 0 1 s Exposure Time and a repetition
297. on Files with this extension are recognized by WinSpec as blemish files TIP If you have a long array use a spreadsheet that can save data to TXT files The numbered rows will help you keep track of where you are When you have finished with the data entry save the data to a text file TXT extension and then change the file extension to BLE Cosmic Ray Removal Removes highly localized spikes such as would be caused by cosmic rays interacting with the silicon of the CCD from the data after it is acquired but before it is stored Two different techniques in addition to OFF can be selected The Temporal technique compares a series of spectra and requires no user parameters The Spatial technique compares the data with the set threshold level If Spatial is selected the Sensitivity setting determines how large a data spike must be to be identified as a cosmic ray effect essentially the Sensitivity is a gain setting on the thresholding algorithm A value of 0 will find 0 cosmics while a setting of 100 will be most sensitive A setting of 50 will give good results in most situations Cosmic ray data is replaced by interpolated before and after data Chapter 13 Spectra Math Introduction A variety of mathematical operations can be Math s performed on WinSpec data files This A B C functionality called Spectra Math is selectable from the Process Menu The four tab pages on the Math dialog Figure 136 allow you to sel
298. on tab page the math operations are listed as either Linear or Non Linear The operand s for math operations can be a single file a file and a constant or two files In addition to allowing you to perform these operations on entire files WinSpec also allows you to specify the frames if multi frame and a region of interest ROI When working with a single file the specified operation is performed on each pixel value of A and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Non Linear heading Log10 Absolute Value Natural Log Bitwise Complement Square Root Binary NOT Squared When working with a single file and a constant the operation will be performed on each pixel value of A using the constant specified on the B tab page and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Linear heading Addition Min Subtraction Max Multiplication Bitwise AND Division Bitwise OR Bitwise Exclusive OR When working with two files corresponding pixels from the two files A and B are operated on and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations that can be performed are the same as for a Single file and Constant described above Chapter 13 Spectra Math 157 Operation Descriptions TZ x Circuit spe B C Linear Operations Addition The A fi
299. ontroller High Voltage Power Supplies IIC 100 High voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensified systems for CW operation only Not necessary for ICCD or PI MAX cameras For gated operation of intensified PentaMAX or ITE cameras buy the board version of the IIC 100 called the MCP 100 built into the pulser During manufacture a Model IIC 100 is configured for Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 231 operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types IIC 200 Compact high voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensified systems for gated and CW Shutter operation During manufacture a Model IIC 200 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types IIC 300 Combined image intensifier power supply and moderate performance gating pulse generator Gated and CW Shutter operation PIV version available During manufacture a Model IIC 300 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types Miscellaneous Components OFA An adapter for connecting a fiber optic input to a spectrometer Two versions are available for the best possible f matching see the pr
300. opics Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 On Line Data Acquisition Processes describes data acquisition processes that can be activated to occur during data acquisition These processes include on line thresholding on line absorbance on line Y T and ASCII output Cleaning describes the cleaning features that are used while data acquisition is idle to prevent the buildup of unwanted charge on the array ROI Definition amp Binning describes how to set a region of interest ROD so that data is only collected from the specified portion of the CCD array It also describes binning the summing together of charge from several pixels on the array or in software during data acquisition Simple or more advanced binning options can be configured easily with WinSpec 32 Correction Techniques explains correction options such as background subtraction and flatfield correction Spectra Math covers WinSpec 32 s mathematical processing features Gluing Spectra discusses gluing existing files or combining the data acquisition and gluing operations under spectrograph control Post Acquisition Mask Processes describes digital mask operations that can be performed on the acquired data Discussed are Edge Enhancement Sharpening Smoothing Custom Filter and Morphological functions Additional Post Acquisition Processes describes additional operations that can be performed on an
301. ount of overlap you would like the spectra to have The overlapping data will be averaged for a smooth transition from one exposure to the next In addition to the glued data file the numbered series of individual exposures remain in the computer for later processing 1 Make sure that you have a spectrometer already installed and properly calibrated This stepping and gluing procedure depends on having correct spectrometer calibration Click on Calibration on the menu bar and then on Usage to open the Usage dialog Select Auto Spectro in the Usage dialog Then select the Calibration units nm cm or rel cm Be sure the Save as Default button is clicked ON Then click on OK to close the Usage dialog From the Acquisition menu select Step and Glue The Step and Glue dialog Figure 139 will appear For more information see the online Help for this dialog Note Again you must have Auto Spectro and either nm cm or rel cm selected as the Calibration Units on the Usage dialog Calibration menu in order for the Step and Glue dialog to open Failure to satisfy this prerequisite will generate an error message Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra 163 5 The glued data will be collected as a series of incremental files These files will then Glued Output Data File Name EE be used to create a Gluing Parameters single glued data Starting Value file Enter the name of the File Name Ending Value
302. out Image Layout Cursor dialog will open as shown in Display Type Figure 71 r Axes i Cross Sections Auto Select M Horizontal Horizontal Check and if necessary set oe V Vertical Vertical the following parameter nee selections on each tab page Graph B is A C 3d Graph Keep Window Placement General tab page Display As 3d Graph Auto Select unchecked Axes both boxes checked Cross Sections both N peeps Cancel Hep boxes checked See ER ee Keep Window Placement unchecked Range tab page Initial Autoscale checked Set to Full Range checked Frame 1 Figure 77 Display Layout dialog Color tab page no changes Axes tab page Horizontal axis checked Horizontal label checked Horizontal label string Pixel Vertical axis checked Vertical label checked Vertical label string Intensity 3D Layout 3D Mode Multi strip same frame selected 3D Properties Remove Hidden Line checked other two boxes unchecked Z Axis Endpoint X set to 20 Y set to 40 3D Marker curves Marker Curves unchecked Curve set to 5 Click on OK The Display Layout dialog will close and the data display exclusive of the intensity profiles should appear as shown in Figure 78 Each strip is displayed as a plot of intensity vs pixel number The first strip is at the front and the last strip is at the back Initially the cursor will be at the lower left Use the up arrow key to move to a higher number
303. out by the preamplifier A binning of 1 in both directions reads out each pixel at full X axis resolution A binning of 2 in both directions combines four pixels cutting the X axis resolution in half but quadrupling the light collecting area If the CCD chip shift register is being saturated due to hardware binning 265 266 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K you can use software binning instead by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page Note that software binning is not as fast as hardware binning Cancel button Exits a dialog without performing any processing Any changes to the dialog are lost Close button Closes the dialog or window with no action taken Dark current 1 The charge accumulated within a well in the absence of light 2 The background current that flows in a charge coupled device or image intensifier of a camera system Cooling the photodetector s primary imaging surface i e the CCD s photoconductor or the image intensifier s photocathode can reduce or eliminate dark current Also called thermally generated charge Dark current can be subtracted from an image Gating In an intensified detector system the application of a voltage that switches the image intensifier on and off in very short intervals Gating improves temporal resolution Gating can be controlled by the programmed exposure time Shutter Mode or is determined by the Pulser settings Gate Mode Help button Opens the context s
304. p Eh Settings Search r a Q ve g Run ty Shut Down ay Exploring My Computer Figure 1 Opening WinSpec 32 from the Program Manager While the software is booting a splash screen such as the one shown in Figure 2 is displayed until the software has finished loading and initializing Then the Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 3 From there you can access the program s functions through menu selection Note If this is the first time you have installed and launched WinSpec 32 the Camera Detection Wizard will pop up This wizard allows you to specify the camera system and load the default hardware settings before you can access the menu See Chapter 2 page 35 for more information about the Camera Detection Wizard Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 31 s WinSpec 32 x T le x File Edit View Acquisition Calibration Tools Display TEE rem TA Window Help algal c e ve 3st 21515 eis el For Help press F1 Tu o n eo e n n Figure 2 Splash screen Edit View Acquisition Calibration Tools Display Spectrograph Process Setup Window Help a Snap Ins Tool Bar A Title Bar eire ajel PIN Sandara Tool Par bein j ex p pepe n a gt v Custom Tool Bar Window Control Boxes WinSpec 32 Logo click to access Control menu Main Display Area TimerfClock For Help press F1 Figure 3 Main WinSpec 3
305. p diodes Appendix DQAANMEENNUN YN aaau Qouooouornutuunmo S f ak f f c W f W W W Wi S c Wi Wi S C ORD ydim hort scramble hort ContinuousCleansFlag hort ExternalTriggerFlag ong lnoscan ong lavgexp loat ReadoutTime hort TriggeredModeFlag har Spare 2 10 har Sw version FILEVERMAX hort type hort flatFieldApplied har Spare 3 16 hort kin trig mode har dlabel LABELMAX har Spare 4 436 har PulseFileName HDRNAME har AbsorbFileName HDRNA WORD NumExpRepeats WORD NumExpAccums hort YT Flag loat clkspd us hort HWaccumFlag hort StoreSync hort BlemishApplied hort CosmicApplied hort CosmicType loat CosmicThreshold ong NumFrames loat MaxIntensity loat MinIntensity har ylabel LABELMAX ORD ShutterType loat shutterComp ORD readoutMode ORD WindowSize ORD clkspd ORD interface type hort NumROIsInExperiment har Spare 5 16 ORD controllerNum ORD SWmade hort NumROI struct ROIinfo WORD startx WORD endx WORD groupx WORD starty WORD endy WORD groupy Data Structure 656 658 660 662 664 668 672 676 678 688 704 1490 1506 1508 1510 241 y dimension of raw data O scrambled 1 unscrambled T F Continuous Cleans Timing Option T F External Trigger Timing Option Number of scans Early WinX Number of Accumulations Experiment readout time T F Triggered Timing Optio
306. patible with that application ROI Region of interest A user defined rectangular area a square is common on a CCD that is exposed and processed as an image Shutter Compensation Time The time it takes for a mechanical shutter to open or close This time needs to be accounted for during hardware setup so the software can allow enough time for the shutter to open before starting data acquisition and allow enough time for it to close before reading out the array Warranty amp Service Limited Warranty Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Princeton Instruments us on we our makes the following limited warranties These limited warranties extend to the original purchaser You you only and no other purchaser or transferee We have complete control over all warranties and may alter or terminate any or all warranties at any time we deem necessary Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants this product against substantial defects in materials and or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after shipment During this period Princeton Instruments will repair the product or at its sole option repair or replace any defective part without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option to a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to return the product Internationa
307. pec 32 data type is WinX Data spe Note The directory can be changed by changing the selection in the Look In box The next time the Open dialog is opened the new folder name will appear in the box and its contents will be shown 2 If the Auto Select checkbox is checked deselect it Then select Image From the data directory select the image BANISIUSIG BEL LAU file called CIRCUIT SPE Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The image display Figure 96 may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer Figure 96 Circuit spe Image Changing the Brightness Range 1 Click on 5 95 located beneath the displayed image as shown in Figure 96 You will observe a moderate brightening of the image as it autoscales on the central 90 of the image histogram The brightest pixels with high dark charge and the darkest pixels pixels with low response are ignored 2 Click on the Autoscale button restoring the image to its initial appearance 118 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Brightness Contrast Control Select Palette on the Display menu This will open the Brightness Contrast dialog ni Figure 97 Note that the window includes Brightness O fg 100 Eur a plot of display brightness Y axis versus sonat O MU EP ale Us data value X axis As settings are 50 RS 9 changed the displayed curve change to
308. pectrograph s name will then disappear from the upper window More than one spectrograph can be assigned to a port However only one spectrograph can be active at a time If you have multiple spectrographs assigned to a port make sure that the active spectrograph refer to the Active Spectrograph field on the Main tab page is the one that is or will be physically connected to the port If you plan to install more than one spectrograph for a COM port it would be a good idea to make sure that the connection preferences are the same for all of the spectrographs assigned to that port Click on OK to close the Install Remove Spectrographs dialog If the newly installed spectrograph is the only installed spectrograph the Use for Auto Spectro Calibration box will be checked by default If more than one spectrograph is installed you need to check in the box for the spectrograph that is attached to the active detector The checked status indicates which spectrograph can be automatically calibrated using the Spectrograph Calibration function which requires that the controller take data see Chapter 7 for more information Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup Ports and Comm Parameters If the spectrograph is not connected to COM2 or if there was an error message during installation specify the communications parameters and then assign a COM port to the active spectrograph These steps Define Spectrograph x Main Connect 51
309. play Layout Color Palette eese 123 Experiment SetuplProcesses tab page seeeeeeeeee 127 Online Thresholding Setup dialog eee 127 Absorbance Setup dial g prinistri esere eee essent ertet 128 YT Area amp Equation Setup dialog eee 130 Equation Calculator dialog esee 133 YT Area and Equation Setup dialog eee 136 Experiment SetuplProcess tab page sese 136 Y I Setup dialog un ER e eee teen 137 ASCH Output Setup dialog siisii tonsini eiert inarin 137 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation eee 139 Cleans Skips tab page 2 ier eid ede eie eet EATER 140 Timing Tab page External Sync with Continuous Cleans Selected 140 External Sync Timing Diagram eese 141 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram 141 Cleans Skips tab page Continuous Cleans Instruction 142 Assumed CCD Array Orientation eeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeee een 143 Single Full width ROI 2 ehe reed iet 146 Single Partial width ROL murinani diarie iane ea ais 146 Multiple Full width ROIs eese 146 Spectroscopy Mode Multiple Partial width ROIs 146 Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs with Different Widths 146 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resu
310. ppendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance 253 7 Click on Finish when the WinSpec 32 has been successfully installed dialog is displayed fe WinSpec 32 Setup 2 5 25 2 E oj x WinSpec 32 has been successfully installed Click the Finish button to exit this installation em J Figure 212 WinSpec 32 has been successfully installed dialog 8 Exit from the installation program or choose another program to install perform maintenance on or uninstall Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Future SEE the Installation CD Bi instali WinSpec 32 for Windows Bi Install WinView 32 for Windows instali WinXTest for Windows iB BACK Exit Installation CD Copyright 2004 Princeton Instruments Trenton NJ USA Figure 213 Exit or Install Another Program dialog Installing More than One Version of WinSpec 32 You can install more than one version of WinSpec 32 WinView 32 or any combination of the two on a single computer The install program will automatically create the new directory Caution Do not install both the WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 software packages in the same directory Caution Although several different versions of WinSpec 32 and or WinView 32 can be installed on the same computer without conflicts you should not run more than one version at any one time The manner in which Princeton Instruments software allocates memory for data collection pr
311. r Portrait You can use the default printer or select a specific Source Automatically Select J C Landscape printer from the list of installed devices For WERE OK Caneel information on installing Em EET printer drivers consult the Windows documentation The Options button shows more features of the selected printer driver again a standard Windows feature Figure 160 Print Setup dialog 3 Select the Paper Size and Source The Landscape format where the paper is wider than it is tall is probably the best way to print out data 4 Click on OK to execute the printer setup selections or Cancel to exit the dialog leaving the original settings unchanged 185 186 WinSpec 32 Manual Printing Directly from WinSpec 32 This procedure assumes you have already set up the printer you will be using 1 From the File menu open the Print dialog Figure 161 2 Select the number of copies and pages if a file contains multiple frames each will be printed as a separate page 3 Click on OK to initiate the print Notes Version 2 5 K Print 21x m Printer Name Properties Status Ready Type HP Lasenet 55i 55i MX PS Where PISE LJ5SI Comment HPLJ5SI Software 132 168 44 217 Print to file Print range 4 p Copies 7 C Al Number of copies fi ES Cres gh tef NT Selection BUR spl Cancel Figure 161 Print dialog 1 Once the Print Setup is properly conf
312. r WinXTest Selection dialogs 251 Figure 209 Media Password dialog eese 252 Figure 210 Application Maintenance dialog eeeeeeee 252 Figure 211 Select Features dialogis ierre ni ie iae nennen nennen 252 Figure 212 WinSpec 32 has been successfully installed dialog 253 Figure 213 Exit or Install Another Program dialog eee 253 Figure 214 Cameral in Camera Name Field sere 257 Figure 215 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict dialog sss 258 Figure 216 Error Creating Controller dialog eere 260 Figure 217 Ebus Driver Installation Tool dialog box eee 261 Figure 218 Program Error dialog eese nennen 262 Figure 219 Serial Violations Have Occurred dialog see 263 Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee eene ener 25 Table 2 USB Driver Files and Locations cee ceecesesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaaecsaeceaecnaeenaeen 26 Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs 108 Table 4 Wavelength Calibration Lines in nanometers eee 233 Table 5 Features Supported under USB 2 0 oo eee eeceseceeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeneeenaes 255 Part 1 Getting Started Introduction es 2 20
313. r failure analysis and streak tube readout applications Deep thermoelectric cooling air Controllers ST 121 Diode array controllers shipped with diode array detectors controlled by a PCI card ST 130 Obsolete controller but still supported in the WinView 32 software ST 133 Controller that can run the vast majority of Princeton Instruments brand cameras including MicroMAX PI MAX Spec 10 PI LCX PI MTE PI SCX PI SX OMA V and VersArray Different hardware types are needed to run different detectors for example liquid nitrogen cooled vs thermoelectrically cooled ST 133 2 MHz ST 133 controller characterized by six software selectable ADC rates ST 133 5 MHz ST 133 controller characterized by duplex head cable 230 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K ST 138 Older controller for TE LN ICCD and ITE units It offers a few special features such as hardware accumulator In general this controller is being phased out Cameras Detectors HCTE CCD See NTE CCD and NTE 2 ICCD Standard classic intensified camera requires purging has internal high voltage power but requires external high voltage pulses for gating Controlled by ST 133 or ST 138 LN CCD Liquid nitrogen cooled detector 1 5 liter Dewar is standard can be run with ST 138 or ST 133 LN InGaAs Indium gallium arsenide detector controlled by a ST 133 controller MTE 2 Miniature liquid cooled camera designed for in vacuum chamber operation can be r
314. r purposes 5 000000000000 21 000000000000 5 000000000000 26 000000000000 5 000000000000 31 000000000000 5 000000000000 36 000000000000 5 000000000000 41 000000000000 5 nnnnnnnnnnnn 46 nnnnnnnnnn di b Figure 192 Gate Width Delay Sequence dialog 208 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Setup File Opens the Sequence Values File dialog Figure 193 which v Ask Before Overutiting enables the following IV Notify When File Has Been Saved Ask Before Overwriting If checked you will be queried before a new sequence value file Name overwrites an existing one If unchecked overwriting can occur without warning Notify When File Has Been Saved The file is saved at the end of the data acquisition run You will be notified that this has occurred if this box is checked Use Default File Name If checked the sequence value file name will be experiment file name but with the extension PDW If unchecked you must enter the name in the Name field Name If not using the default name for the sequence value file enter the file name in the provided field The button at the end of the box opens a browser to facilitate assigning the file location 7 Use Default File Name Experiment File Name _PD w Cancel Figure 193 Sequence Values File dialog On CCD Accumulations Sets the number of gates to occur during an exposure Software Accumulations Sets the number of exposures to be taken for each Shot Note
315. r selecting Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu Easy Bin is a simple way of a defining a single full chip width ROI ROI Setup allows you to create multiple ROIs with greater flexibility in ROI location and width Each ROI is defined in the X and Y direction by a start pixel an end pixel and a group height binning factor After one or more regions have been defined and stored data acquisition will use these regions to determine which information will be read out and displayed and which information will be discarded When ROIs are used to acquire data the ROI parameter information for the first 10 ROIs is stored in the data file when that data is saved to disk You can review this information for the active data display by using the File Information functionality accessible from the File menu or from the Display Context menu Notes 1 For Flatfield Correction Background Subtraction etc the images must be exactly the same size 2 References to X and Y axes assume that the shift register is parallel to the X axis and that the data is shifted to the shift register in the Y direction See Figure 124 below Shift Register SOLEETTTTIITITIITITIT AT Wavelength 1 1 4 X Axis 256 1 v4 Hg Argon SPE 1024 X 256 X 1 j Strip Y Axis PRECARE X 577 14 Y 218 Z 1 I 39 1 1024 256 1024 1024 x 256 CCD
316. rate For a Polynomial calibration the number of peaks must be at least one higher than the order of the polynomial This information is displayed at the lower left of the Calibration Setup dialog The lower Points value is the number of peaks required The upper points value is the number available for calibration A peak is available if it has been found its known value has been entered and the adjacent checkbox has been checked 90 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 K Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration Introduction You can calibrate the WinSpec 32 software by either using the spectrograph stepper motor position Spectrograph calibration or by manual wavelength calibration Spectrograph calibration is achieved using the Calibrate selection on the Spectrograph menu and is described in detail in this chapter Wavelength calibration which is only good for one position of the grating is explained in Chapter 6 The spectrograph calibration routine requires you to enter certain default values into a series of dialogs You are also required to have a known source such as a mercury lamp placed near the entrance slit of the spectrograph Once you have completed the following calibration procedure any movement of the spectrograph will be accounted for in the display of spectral information Notes 1 The spectrograph MUST be focused and aligned properly before a good calibration can be achieved Spe
317. rate that is high relative to the Y T Sample Time Since the experiment is expected to last an hour a reasonable Y T Run Time setting might be 3600 seconds Further suppose that you wanted each Y T curve to be 60 points long accomplished by Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes 135 setting the Y T Number of Samples to 60 The Calculated Sample Time would then be 60 seconds In other words a Y T calculation would be performed on the most recent single data set at the end of each minute regardless of how many data sets were acquired during that minute Note The Computed Sample Time interval between Y T calculations indication does not update instantly when the Run Time and Number of Samples are keyed To force the update modify Run Time and then either press the Tab key or click on another control On starting data acquisition after one minute the first Y T analysis would be made with one Y T value computed for each equation defined The timer would reset to zero and begin counting the second minute At the end of that minute the second Y T value would be computed for each equation defined This process would continue for 3600 seconds one hour At the end of that time n Y T curves n being the number of equations each 100 points in length will have been acquired and stored These could be displayed in the same manner as for the Y T Focus mode previously described As was the case for the Focus mode data acquisition will co
318. ray format is 1340 x 400 pixels array format is 512 x 512 pixels or 512 elements for linear arrays array format is 576 x 384 pixels array format is 768 x 512 pixels array format is 782 x 582 pixels array format is 1000 x 800 pixels array format is 1024 x 256 EEV or Hamamatsu or 1024 x 1024 SITe array format is 1100 x 330 pixels array format is 1152 x 1242 pixels array format is 1280 x 1024 pixels array format is 1300 x 1030 pixels Sony or 1300 x 1340 pixels EEV array format is 1317 x 1035 pixels array format is 1340 x 100 400 or 1300 family is exclusive to Princeton Instruments 1536 2032 2500 3072 array format is 1536 x 1032 pixels array format is 2025 x 2032 pixels array format is 2500 x 600 rectangular pixels array format is 3072 x 2048 pixels Appendix B Calibration Lines MERCURY 184 91 507 30 625 14 730 04 194 17 2x253 65 2x312 57 2x365 02 546 07 626 34 760 95 576 96 2x313 17 3x253 65 579 07 394 90 696 54 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Table 4 Wavelength Calibration Lines in nanometers indicates strong line within a wavelength group indicates strongest line for the element indicates 2 or 3 order 233 234 SH313NONVN HLON3THAVM WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K INTENSITY S g 8 g 8 g 3B 8 8 253 652 w 296 728 p 312 567 365 015 404 656 5 ce 435 833 2nd 253 652 507 304 EUR 546 073 576 960 579 066 6
319. re The correct display of the warning depends on all calibration parameters being set correctly Changing or moving gratings may cause the laser to shine on the detector Always block the source when moving or changing the grating to avoid damage 56 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 K Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection Introduction The procedure in this chapter will enable you to begin collecting real data promptly Minimum requirements are assumed If your system is more complex e g requiring consideration of complex timing and synchronization issues you will have to carefully study the other chapters of this manual as well as the manuals provided for the system hardware components before data acquisition that addresses those needs will be possible Nevertheless it is a good idea to begin with the simplest possible operating mode This approach will give you operating experience and familiarity that will prove very valuable when you go to make more complex measurements For additional information about the various menus and dialogs refer to the online Help topics Note that controllers and cameras ordinarily used for imaging are not discussed in this chapter but rather in the next chapter Initial Imaging Data Collection Underlying assumptions for the following procedure are that the hardware installation including mounting the camera to the spectrograph has been completed
320. re 66 Offset dialog 5 Figure 68 illustrates a typical Offset data acquisition The reference peak should appear near the center of the display and the cursor should be near or on the highest point of the peak If the peak is saturated cancel lower the exposure time and repeat the operation The display X axis should be calibrated any units other than pixels If the X axis is calibrated in pixels select the desired units as the calibration units on the Usage dialog opened by selecting Usage from the Calibration menu Peak Finder Before going on you have to make a judgment regarding the location of the cursor on the peak There may be situations where you will need to readjust the cursor position to get it precisely on the correct location Although this should be a relatively uncommon event it could happen and it is important to take a moment to understand how the peak finder works how it may appear to be in error when it in fact it is not and how it could come to be in error and require manual intervention to correct the cursor position The peak finder works by taking the second derivative of the spectrum to find the peaks Each peak found is then divided in two so that the area to the left of the divider equals the area to the right of the divider The cursor is located at precisely the point where the divider intersects the peak Note that depending on the shape of the peak the cursor may or may not end up precisely on the high
321. rections Consult the factory for off the shelf optical masking accessories Running the camera in Free Run mode with 0 0 msec exposure time will result in the fastest acquisition time Under these conditions the acquisition time is limited by the readout time of the ROI exposure time readout time When you return the system to Normal chip mode radio button on Virtual Chip dialog you should also open the Experiment Setup dialog at the ROI Setup tab card and click on the ClearAll button to clear the ROI setup downloaded for Virtual Chip operation If frame acquisition appears to be slow in Focus mode check the Frames Interrupt value on the Environment dialog and reset the value to 1 if it is greater than 1 When processing large stacks of data you may want to use a third party scientific image processing package Due to CCD design you may see some edge artifacts when acquiring data from the entire virtual chip Crop these artifacts by defining an ROI that is slightly smaller than the virtual chip dimensions Part 3 Reference Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 225 Appendix B Calibration Lines esee 233 Appendix C Data Structure essere 235 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration 245 Appendix E CD ROM Failure Workarounds 249 Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintena
322. red speed See the ST 130 manual for details Version 2 5 K Experiment Setup Figure 44 Generic ADC tab page Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 69 Type For systems having more than one A D converter both FAST and SLOW will be available Make this selection before selecting the rate or resolution Controller Gain PentaMAX only Set to Gain 3 Resolution Number of bits Choices limited by A D type selection Bit Adjust ST 138 only Set to No Clip ADC Offset ST 133 5MHz only Use the default setting Analog Gain ST 133 Medium On the ROI tab page Figure 45 select Experiment Imaging Mode WinSpec 32 operated in ADC Timing Processes Save Load Imaging Mode always uses the full chip Main DataFie ROI Setup Data Conections area and ROI considerations do not apply Nau Paten amm No Processes tab page functions should f ImagngMode Spectroscopy Mode be selected For more information about these functions see Chapter 9 page 127 Wavelength r Sli Start zi Start On the Data File tab page Figure 46 make the following selections Eng Auto Increment File Name Enable i Brew should be OFF Overwrite Append Existing Files pecca ENTIA ERST ERE ETE al Select Overwrite data file will re z Cancel Changes I Use Software Binning overwrite an existing file having the same name Overwrite Confirmation Check this Foaie Focus Lancel
323. ree from substantial defects in materials and or workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from shipment Princeton Instruments does not warrant that the function of the software will meet your requirements or that operation will be uninterrupted or error free You assume responsibility for selecting the software to achieve your intended results and for the use and results obtained from the software In addition during the one 1 year limited warranty The original purchaser is entitled to receive free version upgrades Version upgrades supplied free of charge will be in the form of a download from the Internet Those customers who do not have access to the Internet may obtain the version upgrades on a CD ROM from our factory for an incidental shipping and handling charge See Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Warranty amp Service 269 Owner s Manual and Troubleshooting You should read the owner s manual thoroughly before operating this product In the unlikely event that you should encounter difficulty operating this product the owner s manual should be consulted before contacting the Princeton Instruments technical support staff or authorized service representative for assistance If you have consulted the owner s manual and the problem still persists please contact the Princeton Instruments technical support staff or our authorized service representative See
324. references are the same for all of the spectrographs assigned to that port 52 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Specifying the Active Spectrograph If you have installed more than one spectrograph you need to define the Active controlled Spectrograph If there is only one spectrograph that one is the active one If there is more than one than you must designate the active one This can be done via the Define Spectrograph Main tab page the Move Gratings tab page to access click on Move in the Spectrograph menu and via the Calibrate Spectrograph dialog to access click on Calibrate in the Spectrograph menu On the Define Spectrograph Main page the selection is called Active Spectrograph on the Move Gratings tab page it is called Spectrograph to Move and in the Calibrate dialog it is called Spectrograph to Calibrate In all three locations the function is simply to specify the active spectrograph and changing the selection in one location is equivalent to changing it in all three If only one spectrograph has been installed the box won t appear in the Move or Calibrate dialogs but the spectrograph model will be reported Entering Grating Information Once you have installed a spectrograph you may need to enter the grating information for the spectrograph if the spectrograph can t supply them automatically This is information that WinSpec 32 needs to move and calibrate the spectrograph correctly Grating information is supplied autom
325. rements differ from those of previous versions of WinSpec After confirming that your computer meets all hardware and software requirements install WinSpec 32 according to the instructions in this chapter Do not attempt to run the software until you have read Chapters 2 3 and 4 which discuss important hardware setup and data acquisition issues Also it is recommended that you install the Princeton Instruments interface board in your computer before running the software Instructions for installing the interface board are provided in your Princeton Instruments hardware manuals Note If your computer and system were purchased together from Princeton Instruments the Interface card will have been installed at the factory System Requirements The following information lists the system hardware and software requirements Hardware Requirements e Princeton Instruments camera and if required by the camera a Princeton Instruments ST series controller with either a TAXI or USB 2 0 Interface Control module for communication between controller and host computer e Host Computer TAXI Protocol e Minimum is AT compatible computer with 80486 or higher processor 50 MHz or faster Pentium or better recommended e Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI or Photometrics high speed PCI serial card Computers purchased from Princeton Instruments are shipped with the card installed e Minimum of 32 Mbyte total RAM for CCDs up to 1 4 mi
326. ress Continue to initiate another offset computation cycle The reported error should decrease Repeat the cycle two or three times until no further reduction in the error can be achieved The final error value achieved may wander a bit with each cycle repetition reflecting the noise content of the spectrum 8 Click on OK to close the Offset dialog and return to the Spectrograph Calibrate dialog Once you have adjusted the Offset for a reference wavelength or for the zero order peak other wavelengths may still be improperly calibrated To see why this is so think of the calibration in terms of the linear general equation y mx b Although this is a simplified model it suffices to show the basic relationships The b term can be thought of as the offset which is adjusted to place the reference at precisely the center of the array The location of points away from the offset reference will be determined by the m or slope term as well as b and the Adjust procedure allows m to be set so that adjusting the spectrograph to other wavelengths will result in this wavelength falling on the center of the array Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 97 Click on the Adjust button to open the Adjust Adjust dialog Figure 69 Selected Grating 6 70131e 150 Enter as the Reference Wavelength a known line ee 573 066 in the observed spectrum such as 579 066 for Adustvaue 0 Mercury Next click the Start Adjust Proced
327. rns a 1 data that falls below the minimum threshold or above the maximum returns a 0 In an experiment containing n accumulations only one data set is stored but with the data added from each accumulation Thus if a given bit contained data within the threshold range on 7 of 10 iterations the value of the bit in the acquired data set would be 7 The minimum and maximum levels can be independently set and checkboxes allow the minimum and maximum threshold functions to be independently toggled on or off Enable Minimum F Enable Maximum p E Cancel Help Figure 110 Online Thresholding Setup dialog 127 128 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Parameters Enable Minimum The check box allows the Minimum threshold function to be switched ON checked or OFF unchecked When the function is ON you can enter the minimum threshold level This can be any positive or negative value in the range of possible intensities provided the setting is lower than the Maximum setting This setting will be retained when the function is switched OFF When the Minimum threshold is ON and data is being acquired any intensity value below the set value will return a 0 Intensities higher than the Minimum setting will return a 1 unless they also exceed the Maximum setting in which case they will return a 0 When the Minimum threshold is OFF all intensities below the Maximum will return a 1 intensities that exceed Maximum return 0 Enable Max
328. rollers However it doesn t exercise some of the special features such as video monitor support available on certain controller models 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting AMEH E data Data collection can be initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed Observe the displayed data and adjust the system optics for the best possible image t may be necessary to readjust the Exposure Time Experiment Setup Main page ae To store the most recent image EXESIENSTAE TE click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page Figure 51 Typical Data Acquisition Image This completes the initial data acquisition routine which should work with any Princeton Instruments controller 76 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 K Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files Introduction This chapter discusses how to open close and save existing data files to disk Options for saving and deleting files will be explained Data files created with temporary file name
329. rved3 pr unsigned char new calib flag Lx char calib label 81 char expansion 87 75 End of Calibration Structures char Istring 40 char empty3 80 f int lastvalue fe Version 2 5 Header 3 23 04 3978 4018 offset for absolute data scaling X factor for absolute data scaling A selected scaling unit x reserved Kf special string for scaling reserved Kf flag if calibration is valid kI current input units for calib value ay linear UNIT and used AY in the polynom coeff zy ORDER of calibration POLYNOM Zy valid calibration data pairs AT pixel pos of calibration data x7 calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS f laser wavenumber for relative WN reserved AY If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d a Calibration Expansion area Ej special Intensity scaling string empty block to reach 4100 bytes x 4098 Always the LAST value in the header The current data file used for WINX files consists of a 4100 1004 Hex byte header followed by the data Beginning with Version 2 5 many more items were added to the header to make it a complete as possible record of the data collection This includes spectrograph and pulser information Many of these additions were accomplished by recycling old information that had not been used in previous versions AII data files created under previous 2 x versions of WinView WinSpec CAN still be read correctly HOWEVER files created und
330. s 288 zi fields and checkboxes that exist on the Cleans Skips tab page WinSpec 32 will display and hide features based on the controller version All of the features shown are described in the text that m follows Refer to Chapter 10 starting on Figure 18 Cleans Skips tab page page 139 for additional information Load Default Values Reloads the factory defaults from the NVRAM Cleans Cleans are applied to the entire CCD array and remove charge that has accumulated on the array while waiting for data acquisition to begin The charge on the CCD chip is transferred to the shift register and discarded to prevent charge buildup from occurring On completion of a setup successive clean cycles occur normally The Number of Cleans and Number of Strips per Clean parameters allow you to program additional clean cycles that will be performed after initiating the run but before any data are taken Number of Cleans For most applications the default value should be used Clicking on the Load Default Values button and then selecting Yes will install the default value Values other than the default can be directly entered in the field or selected via the spin buttons Number of Strips per Clean Sets the number of CCD data strips to be transferred and discarded during each clean The maximum valid setting is limited by the chip size The default value will generally give good results Clean Mode Photometrics brand cameras Sets when and how charg
331. s 180 Cross Section ii ge eb ee te b tee D tem t dete ie recent 181 Introduction ette rete eec i Oe aes weal Ee POPE EO eR e 181 Procedure oec e Eo a s ead rt e ecd Ro eb E event 181 Binning and Skipping steed deer ete eth teg RE eret cible eee et 182 Introduction dc ned etie eee 182 Proc dure M 182 Binning and Skipping Restrictions and Limitations esee 183 Histogram Calculation cic sess stile sien een teer reir ene 184 Introduction oed en ede eR C aei des 184 Procedure nette eene E Ah Sata els chases oats 184 Chapter 17 Printing acscaniceassecesectsctaasecisccanceccsadzassecunsaheckecoasiewsdesnacnusvexbecusechactees 185 Introd cti n 5 etie eaten Pot eee rede ERES EE ex EE Ee ECL HERR ee Pte ce eda 185 Setting up the Printer oeroet ine edet eere e RAT ere ute ere eter eee 185 Printing Directly from WinSpec 32 eese eene nennen 186 viii WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Print Pfeview ue ciuse eh eee tee ee Re e bent wea eoe Eruca 186 Printing Screen Capture eet ERR Rate bee ee 188 saving as TIE and Printing uote tti rt iim cete ette cepe Et ete ceto 188 Chapter 18 Pulser OD6ratlOn 4 oii ipee emer a xe vcr raran aa Ea Pann E Ur Sape asst 189 WNT ODUCHION Ss oe ees eee e e ar cede Mince debe esheets eesti A E E E E E caudebsects 189 PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator eese nennen 189 Programming the Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger Outputs
332. s are taken WinSpec 32 begins an iterative process to find the best values This process is initiated by clicking on the Calculate Results button You will see the parameters change as WinSpec 32 performs the calculations The program stops when the best parameters are displayed in the Dispersion dialog If satisfied with the calibration simply click on OK to make the save the final dispersion parameters as part of the calibration data for the grating Click on Cancel to revert back 100 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K to previously saved parameters Note that you can also change the parameters manually and click on OK to save them Having completed the calibration for one grating select the next grating and repeat the procedure Continue until all available gratings have been calibrated Chapter 8 Displaying the Data Introduction WinSpec 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph or as a 3D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To have WinSpec 32 control the data display mode simply select the Auto Select checkbox provided on the File Open dialog and also on the Display Layout dialog The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data strips as follows e If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image su
333. s of the computer such as COMI or COM2 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the PG200 front panel Basic PG200 operation is reviewed in the following procedure 1 Make sure the PG200 is connected to one of the serial ports of the computer Later you will tell WinSpec 32 the name of this port COM1 COM2 etc The software cannot automatically detect the location of the PG200 Following the intensifier precautions listed in the hardware manuals turn on the PG200 Pulser and wait for it to initialize If the PG200 isn t turned on the WinSpec 32 software cannot program it Select Setup then Pulsers then PG200 Then click on the Setup PG200 button to open the PG200 dialog If PG200 is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog PG200 pulser support has not been installed Click on the Comm Port tab Select the Comm Port type Serial or Demo Serial must be selected to control the PG200 189 190 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K 6 Select the PG200 Comm Port Generally the mouse is connected to Triggers Gating Comm Port COMI and the Pulser is connected to COM2 COM ports 1 through 8 can be selected Pott Type Serial 7 Once you have selected the correct COM Port 2 port click on Initialize Port which will cause the software to search for the pulser If it can t find the pulser on the specified port such as would occur if the pulser were not turned on or if it were connect
334. s should be saved to disk periodically Files should be closed completely to conserve RAM for data collection Data files can be deleted directly from WinSpec 32 without using the File Manager or any other file utility Note WinSpec 32 can read data files acquired with earlier versions of WinSpec Versions of WinSpec prior to 1 6 cannot read WinSpec 32 data files Neither can versions prior to 1 6 read data files that were collected with earlier versions and then opened modified and saved using WinSpec 32 This should be considered carefully before modifying and saving old data files with WinSpec 32 Opening Data Files In WinSpec 32 files are opened pen 21x according to Win 95 conventions as Look in C3 Data 7 ct m follows _YT SPE yA 256strip SPE 1035strip 5PE wd 2strip SPE 1 Select Open from the File menu YA 3001 SPE The File Open dialog will appear 1 3stip SPE w adjust SPE Figure 52 v Argont spe 2 Open the directory containing the gt data files Clicking on the button fig name Sr at the right of the Look In field am Files of type winx Data spe Cancel opens a browser function allowing you to quickly and F papina As A Of easily access the correct folder Ix iy Display Layout y S Image Graph C 3D Graph As shown in Figure 52 the data files will be listed below Figure 52 Open dialog 3 If you want the software to control how the data will be d
335. se Resizing is done in the usual way with the ROI box handles If the ROI box is accidentally erased just redraw a new one in the desired location and the Edit box will reappear The Edit box wraps lines at the end of the box and the Label function will display the label as it appears in the box Figure 92 0 long for e edit box the edit box Figure 92 Edit box with line wrapped label and finished label with same line wraps 116 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K To correct the line wrapping simply resize the ROI as shown in Figure 93 S LLLLLLL SELL LLL L ELLE ELLE LEL EELS EEL EE LEE E TESTE E EET E TELE ETE E ELE A label that is too long for the edit box A label that is too long for the edit box H D L J 4 z 4 ahhh hhh hh hhh hhh bbb Figure 93 ROI resized to correct Line wrapping The font can be changed after the label is printed on the display y4 Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 IP x This is the label Hg Argon Figure 94 Display after changing Font Selection To change the background or color the label must be erased and reprinted it can only be altered inside the edit box Data Displayed as an Image WinSpec 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph or as a 3 D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To ha
336. set every nth line will be suppressed during the adjustment so the process remains fast When the data is displayed as desired releasing the mouse button will cause the entire data set to be displayed with the new orientation TIP Since you can move the cursor outside the data window reducing the data window size before adjusting the Z axis will give you greater range of motion while dragging the axis 2 Click on OK The data should be redisplayed as shown in Figure 84 with the hidden surface clearly visible v Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Pixel 328 Intensity 469253 00 point 328 strip 19 frame 1 Figure 84 3D Plot with Hidden Surfaces 3 If the hidden surfaces aren t clearly delineated you may need to change their color Use the Normal Hidden Surface button on the Display Layout Color tab page to choose a different hidden surface color Note that the Marker Hidden Surface button allows you to set the color of the marker curves in hidden surface regions 112 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Data Window Context menu For your convenience the essential data window functions Autoscale have been gathered into a single menu illustrated in Figure 85 Auto 5 95 This menu which is available whether the data is displayed as Cursor gt an image graph or 3D graph can be accessed by right clicking Zoom gt anywhere in the data display area Brief descriptions of the New gt provided functions follow Colorbar
337. sity versus pixel number the actual number of data strips plotted depending on the 3D Layout display parameter settings All of the strips could come from the same frame or in the case of a file containing multiple frames the same numbered strip could come from each frame e If Graph is selected the selected data strip only will be plotted as a function of intensity versus pixel number 4 Note the Files of Type field which allows you to select files for listing according to their type If WinXData spe is selected only files of type spe will be listed This is the native WinSpec 32 format If TIFF or 8 bit TIFF File tif is selected only files of the type tif will be listed If All Files is selected all files in the folder will be listed WinSpec 32 can open either spe files or tif files 8 bit or 16 bit Select type 8 bit TIFF File to open an 8 bit TIFF file Select type TIFF File to open a 16 bit TIFF file The open display default selection can be changed and saved from the Display Layout window Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 79 5 Either double click on PERIZZZZXIZTUUEZ PSU the name of the file you want to open or single click on the name and then click on the Open button For example with 3D Graph selected double clicking on Hid lamp spe would open that file producing the display shown in Figure 53 Note that there are many different ways of controlling how the Ex ExiS
338. sk Defragmenter can be accessed from the Windows Start menu and can usually accessed from the Programs Accessories System Tools subdirectory After defragmenting the hard disk turn off the computer and make the USB cable connections between the host computer and the ST 133 Then turn the ST 133 on before turning on the host computer At bootup Windows will detect the Princeton Instruments USB2 Interface hardware i e the USB 2 0 Interface Control module You may be prompted to enter the directory path s for the apausbprop dll and or the apausb sys file s either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI during the application software installation WinSpec automatically put the required INF DLL and USB driver file in the Windows directories shown below Refer to the Table 2 below for the file locations Windows Version USB INF Filename USB Properties DLL USB Device Driver Located in Located in Windows Name Windows INF System32 directory Located in Windows directory System32 Drivers directory Windows XP rsusb2k inf in apausbprop dll in apausb sys in Vista 32 bit WINNT INF for WINDOWS System32 for WINDOWS example example System32 Drivers for example The INF directory may be hidden Table 2 USB Driver Files and Locations WinSpec Version 2 5 25 and later The PVCAM INI file required by a PVCAM supported camera i e Princeton Instruments c
339. solution based on the spectrometer calibration and other known quantities In the resulting file each point does not represent a physical pixel The total number of data points in the resulting file cannot exceed 65 536 8 Click on SET to store the Step and Glue parameters If the experiment is ready to run click on the RUN to begin collecting data The software will collect one exposure at each spectrometer position It will automatically move the spectrometer to the next position with the correct amount of overlap and collect the next exposure The software will collect as many exposures as needed During data collection individual spectra may or may not be displayed depending on the time between spectra 164 Theory WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K The Glue operation is done in two stages First the data in an input file is converted into an intermediate file with the calibration of the output file and then the converted file is glued onto the output file The algorithm for the file conversion is based on the fact that the pixels have small but finite dimensions this means that each pixel has some wavelength coverage and is not just a wavelength point When WinSpec reports the wavelength of a pixel it is actually the wavelength at the center of the pixel Since WinSpec uses a polynomial wavelength 6699 calibration the wavelength at the center of a pixel x is Wavelength center Ag Aix Ax 5 and the wa
340. sses of Roper Scientific s overseas offices and representatives is maintained on the web page Log onto the FTP site and go to the Software Official Current directory 2 Execute the program WinSpec exe and follow the instructions on your screen You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions Custom Installation Choices Application Files Loads the actual WinSpec 32 files Help Files Loads the Help System both general and context sensitive Help PCI Interface Loads the drivers for the PCI Interface card Sample SPE Data Files Creates a directory Data containing sample SPE files This directory is located beneath the one containing the WinSpec 32 files Diagnostic Program Loads the diagnostics program pidiag32 exe It is located in the directory containing the WinSpec 32 application files and can be executed by double clicking on pidiag32 exe via the Windows Explorer Spectrograph Support Loads drivers for Acton and or Spex spectrographs Pulser Support Loads the pulser drivers if required Currently supported pulsers include the SuperSYNCHRO PTG PG200 and the DG535 Timing Generator drives the PI MAX pulsing circuits Snap Ins Loads the selected Snap In files When a Snap In is installed its button will be added to the Snap In toolbar PI Screen Saver Loads the PI Screen Saver PI Shell Extension Provides additional SPE file properties pages Right click on SPE
341. st to the original purchaser Any failure to cool to spec beyond our Basic 1 year limited warranty from date of shipment due to a non vacuum related component failure e g any components that are electrical electronic is NOT covered and carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty 267 268 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Sealed Chamber Integrity Limited 12 Month Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants the sealed chamber integrity of all our products for a period of twelve 12 months after shipment If at anytime within twelve 12 months from the date of delivery the detector should experience a sealed chamber failure all parts and labor needed to restore the chamber seal will be covered by us Open chamber products carry NO WARRANTY TO THE CCD IMAGING DEVICE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Vacuum Integrity Limited 12 Month Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants the vacuum integrity of Non XP style detectors do not have all metal seals for a period of up to twelve 12 months from the date of shipment We warrant that the detector head will maintain the factory set operating temperature without the requirement for customer pumping Should the detector experience a Vacuum Integrity failure at anytime within twelve 12 months from
342. system or switch the active camera system to another camera system already connected to the host computer 44 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Entering the Data Orientation Hardware Setup 1133 Xx tup ST121 Figure 16 Display tab page left applies to all controllers except ST 121 right applies to ST 121 only With the exception of the ST 121 the Display tab page is the same for all controllers Three display options Rotate Reverse and Flip are provided This feature allows you to compensate for CCD array or camera orientation Before and after thumbnail illustrations show the effect of each selection If no option is selected the thumbnails will be the same Any orientation can be achieved with the proper combination of Rotate Reverse and Flip In the case of the ST 121 only Reverse is provided Rotate Rotates the image 90 counterclockwise Reverse Reverses the image horizontally Flip Flips the image vertically Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 45 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters The Interface tab page allows you to specify ESTONT ESS the interface card installed in your computer amp eeo Display Inefoce Cleans Skis and to enter the I O addresses if required a This functionality is particularly useful if you ard Number Jui have multiple PCI cards installed in the host B W computer Figure 17 shows all of the fields xac g and checkboxes that exist on the Interface MO A
343. tab page with the smaller of the two values written to the C file MAX The A file is compared pixel by pixel with the B file and the larger of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B tab page with the larger of the two values written to the C file Non Linear Operations Log10 The Log10 of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Natural Log The natural log of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Square Root The square root of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Squared Each point in the A file is squared and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file 158 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Absolute The absolute value of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Bitwise Operations AND A bitwise AND operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file A twelve bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 000000010101 21 OR A bitwise OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of
344. tated LI x in the hardware manuals turn on the Controller PTG installed Zf the Controller isn t turned on the WinSpec 32 software won t be able to control the PTG pra _SeuoPTG _ Select Active Pulser C PG200 2 Onthe Setup menu select Pulsers to open the Pulsers dialog 3 Select PTG Then click on the Setup Pulser button The PTG dialog Figure 178 will open If PTG is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog Figure 177 Pulsers dialog PTG support has not been installed Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 197 Select the Trigger mode either PTG x Internal in which the PTG free runs Triggers Gating Aux Trig Out or External in which it is triggered Input Trigger Mode from an external source C intemal Frequency foo f He If operating in the Internal trigger mode set the trigger Frequency in Threshold f4 H Vots Hz P Slope Coupling Termination If operating in the External trigger C Extemal Posive CAC C High i Negative DC 50 Ohms mode specify the Threshold Slope Coupling Termination and Gate Gee Dorit Del F d f h Ext TriggerIn elay From appropriate for the C Toout trigger source Note that the gate delay from the TO connector is approximately a m 24 ns Click on the Gating tab Figure 178 PTG Triggers tab page Figure 179 Select Repetitive or Sequential and GE x then click on the adjacent Setup Triggers Gating Aux Trig Out
345. te Width and Gate E Delay remain constant over the course Repeat Width Delay for of the measurement Set the Gate Width fi Exposure s and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Cancel Heb Setup dialog will close and you will return to the PG200 dialog Figure 167 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog will appear as shown in Figure 168 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly Fixed or exponentially as the measurement progresses Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 200 for more information 192 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog will close and you will return to the PG200 dialog Sequential Gating Setup x Gate Width Gate Delay Number of cM Start 10000 nsec Start 121 nsec E zy Er
346. te results on sloping baselines Baseline correction is calculated by taking the uncorrected value or the area and subtracting the area below the baseline This calculation may be expressed as Crirst CLast 2 x Pixels Corrections Area Where Areay is the uncorrected value of the area Criss is the first channel of the specified range 132 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Cras is the last channel of the specified range Pixels is the number of pixels in the area Store Area button Once the area parameters have been keyed the Store Area button is used to store them and cause them to appear in the area listing box If you click on the OK key and close the window without first pressing the Store Area button the entries for the area will not be stored and the area will not be available for Y T analysis Note The parameters for an area can be changed by clicking on that area s designator in the area listing box and then keying new values for the parameter to be changed The changes do not take effect until the Store Area button is pressed Delete Area button Areas defined and listed in the area listing box can be deleted using this button To delete an area simply click on the area s designator in the area listing box and press the Delete Area button Then you must press OK to close the box and assure that the deleted area will be gone when the software is next booted Define Equations Equation Listing Box
347. tem is ideal for both general spectroscopy applications as well as Laser Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy PI LCX High performance photon counting system Medium X ray direct detection PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating Controller is ST 133 and gating timing is provided by a DG535 PTG or other TTL timing source PI MAX2 High speed PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating Controller is ST 133 5MHz and gating timing is provided by a DG535 PTG or other TTL timing source PI MAX3 High speed PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating with internal controller Gate timing is controlled by the internal SuperS YNCHRO timing generator or an external source Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 229 PI MTE Compact high sensitivity digital imaging system designed to deliver scientific performance inside high vacuum chambers over long operation times PI SCX X ray diffraction fiberoptically coupled detector PI SX High sensitivity deep vacuum interface for soft X ray acquisition PIXIS Compact permanent vacuum camera platform with internal controller Designed for low light level spectroscopy and imaging PIXIS XF Compact permanent vacuum camera platform with internal controller Designed for lens free indirect imaging of X rays using phosphor screens or other Lambertian sources PIXIS XO Compact vacuum open nose camera platform with internal control
348. terest ROIs General You may create more than 10 ROIs but when data is acquired using these ROIs the parameter information for only the first 10 ROIs will be stored when you save the data mgr teaer Mode ROIs cannot overlap This places restrictions on the Slit Y values that can be specified For example if Pattern 1 has a Slit Start value of 1 and a Slit Height 100 the Start value for the next ROI must be greater than 100 fa Full pattern is selected and stored it overlaps all others causing all data collections to be full chip Figure 127 illustrates multiple full width ROIs 2 Once the first pattern is defined all subsequent patterns are automatically assigned the same X axis starting ending and grouping values The first pattern need not be full width any values in the chip range can be entered but once stored those values will apply as well to subsequently defined patterns The figures below illustrate possible ROI patterns Note the additional functionality available in Imaging Mode Figure 129 Imaging Mode s4 Moon spe 275 X 387 X 1 Joj x In this mode ROIs can have varying sizes and degrees of overlap However when you define multiple ROIs like those in Figure 129 the computer automatically generates six side effect ROIs in the regions where extensions of the strips and columns of the defined ROIs intersect Both the defined and computer generated ROIs will be stored and the data for both will be
349. ters 3 and 4 Diagnostics Advanced functions such as Post Processing Custom Chip and Custom Timing are discussed in Part 2 of this manual Basic Hardware Overview The basic components of a Princeton Instruments system are a camera or detector a controller interconnecting cables a computer interface card and the application software in this case WinSpec 32 Note that other components such as a computer coolant circulator and pulser can also be ordered The interface card installed in the host computer permits communication between the host computer and the controller often an ST 133 The controller accepts input from the host computer and WinSpec 32 and converts it to the appropriate control signals for the camera These signals allow you to specify the readout rate binning parameters regions of interest gain and array temperature After data is acquired in the camera it is transmitted to the controller where it is processed transmitted to the host computer displayed in the WinSpec 32 window and can be stored to disk Figure 5 illustrates possible system configurations spectrometers and pulsers are not shown Figure 6 shows the interconnections for an air cooled Princeton Instruments camera with an internal controller as well as interconnections to an optional external shutter and spectrometer Figure 7 and Figure 8 show the interconnections for a Princeton Instruments system with an external controller as well as
350. the Shutter mode Gate mode for PI MA X3 In both cases Shutter and Gate mode the camera can be damaged if exposed to light overload Before powering the controller and camera reduce the room light to reduce the risk of damage Note that intensifiers are particularly at risk in pulsed laser operation where overload spot damage can occur without raising the average current to where the overload detection circuits will be activated It is far better to be careful than sorry Before proceeding take the time to carefully read the manual for your intensified camera 65 66 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K WARNING Aiso take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for shutter or gate mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual Temperature Control Before continuing the array temperature should be set to some easily achieved value in the operating range and Temperature lock should be established The way this is done depends on the controller Temperature Control for a system using an ST 133 Controller 1 Open the WinSpec 32 Setup menu and click on Detector Temperature This will cause d Target Temperature 0 0 Set Temp the Temperature dialog to appear as shown in E Figure 40 Current Temperature Locked 2 Set the Target Temperature to the desired value 0 suggested for ini
351. the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101111111 1407 Exclusive OR A bitwise Exclusive OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101101010 1386 Complement For each pixel value n in the A file the corresponding value in the output file C is set to 1 n Otherwise stated each 0 becomes a 1 and each 1 a 0 Binary Operations NOT For each pixel in the A file all non zero values yield a zero and all zero values only yield a one The resulting values are written to the corresponding point of the C file Chapter 13 Procedure 1 2 Spectra Math 159 Select the operation to be performed on the Operation tab page Enter the first input filename on the A tab page If the operation involves two files or one file and a constant enter the second file name on the B tab page or enter the value of the constant on the B tab page If you want to process only part of the input images change the Frame X Range and Y Range values on the A tab page and also on the B tab page if two files are involved Alternati
352. the array The timing diagram below is for an experiment set up to acquire three 3 spectra in Freerun timing mode with normal shutter operation selected In this diagram clean cycles occur before the first exposure and after the last readout period Note The start of the exposure is signaled by NOTSCAN going high but will not occur until the current clean cycle has finished stored Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close lot I S NOTSCAN SAAN Read Read Read AN i Aen E dao 7 i i l Data Second Data l Last Data I I iFirst exposure stored exposure exposure stored Figure 118 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation 139 140 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K The configuration of clean cycles is performed on the Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page eslosss nere pesi Figure 119 When you set up the detector for the first time default values are automatically r Cleans inserted into these fields These will give the best Number ot Cleans Po 4 results for most applications Even so it is a good fee E idea to know what these entries mean with regard TETES to cleaning Clear Pre Exposure X F Use Continuous Cleans Instruction Let s begin with Number of Strips per Clean This parameter sets the number of rows that will es Eu a T be shifted and discarded per clean cycle While a UID i large number such as the number of rows in t
353. the button 8 When the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard appears click on Next Select the Search for a suitable driver radio button 9 Ontbhe next screen select the Specify a location checkbox 10 Browse and select the location Click on OK 262 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K 11 In the Driver Files Search Results window check the Install one of the other drivers check box 12 Select the NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller B1 driver Microsoft is the provider Click on Next and the installation will take place When the Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears click on Finish You will then be given the choice of restarting the computer now or later According to the window text the hardware associated with the driver will not work until you restart the computer Program Error message Program Error Winspec exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows You will need to restart the program An error log is being created Figure 218 Program Error dialog This dialog may appear if you have tried to acquire a test image acquire data or run in focusing mode and the DMA buffer size is too small A large array for example a 2048x2048 array requires a larger setting than that for a smaller array for example a 512x512 array To correct the problem 1 Click on OK 2 Reboot WinSpec 3 Note the array size on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page or the Acquisitio
354. the controller The possible choices are Full Frame The entire chip can be read out Frame Transfer Only the unmasked area of the chip can be read out Frame transfer is only available if the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 1024 Interline Provides 100 duty cycle operation Interline is only available with a camera having an interline chip such as the PI 1300 x 1030 Kinetics Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then read out very quickly See the System or Controller manual for more details on the CCD aspects of this readout mode WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K DIF or Dual Image Feature MicroMAX PI MAX2 and PI MAX3 Interline only Dual Image Feature DIF is a special feature that allows images to be taken in pairs with very short exposure times as small as 1 us For MicroMAX this feature is only available for factory modified MicroMAX controller Interline camera systems The three MicroMAX DIF timing modes are IEC Internal Exposure Control EEC External Exposure Control and ESABI Electronic Shutter Active Between Images These modes are in addition to Free Run mode The two DIF timing modes for PI MAX2 and PI MAX3 are Single Trigger and Dual Trigger Vertical Shift Time This information appears for the Frame Transfer and Kinetics modes Reports the speed in microseconds at whic
355. the date of delivery all parts and labor needed to restore the vacuum integrity will be covered by us Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Image Intensifier Detector Limited One Year Warranty All image intensifier products are inherently susceptible to Phosphor and or Photocathode burn physical damage when exposed to high intensity light Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of image intensifier products that are found to have Phosphor and or Photocathode burn damage which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all image intensifier products for a period of one 1 year after shipment See additional Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty X Ray Detector Limited One Year Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of CCD imaging device and fiber optic assembly damage due to X rays which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all X ray products for one 1 year after shipment See additional Basic Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Software Limited Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants all of our manufactured software discs to be f
356. tial data LX Cancel Heb acquisition Figure 40 Temperature dialog 3 Click on the Set Temp button When the Current Temperature Unlocked message changes to Current Temperature Locked temperature lock will have been established Notes 1 The ST 133 additionally has a Temp Lock LED on the Analog Control module at the rear of the controller that visually indicates when temperature lock occurs 2 If you are using the USB 2 0 interface or have a PVCAM based system with internal controller the Detector Temperature dialog will not display current temperature information while you are acquiring data Temperature Control for Other Systems ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 Controller Change the dial setting on the front panel of the Controller PentaMAX Set the temperature on the front panel of the Temperature Power Supply unit Micro View Not user settable Temperature is solely under software control Cleans and Skips With some controllers specifically the PentaMAX ST 130 ST 133 ST 138 and internal controllers there is a Cleans Skips tab page in the Hardware Setup dialog Cleans are used to reduce charge buildup on the CCD array while waiting to begin data acquisition Skips are used when the Region of Interest ROD is smaller than the full chip they allow binning and quick traversing of the rows that precede and follow the ROI For the procedures that follow load the default values for these parameters by bring
357. tings in the Spectrograph dialog Also try turning off and back on the spectrograph then closing and reopening the WinSpec 32 software If wavelength direction is reversed you won t be able to calibrate successfully However a warning message will be displayed If this happens open the Hardware Setup dialog and select the Display tab page If Rotate is selected toggle the Flip box If Rotate is not selected toggle the Reverse box Click on OK and then begin Offset calibration again Calibration Parameters 1 Select Auto Spectro on the Usage dialog to open select Usage on the Calibration menu f the Use for Auto Spectro Calibration checkbox on the Define Spectrograph Main tab page was used to designate a particular spectrograph as the one to be used for calibration purposes that spectrograph will be automatically selected If the Save as Default button on the Usage dialog isn t already selected select it now Select Calibrate on the Spectrograph menu This will open the Spectrograph Calibration dialog Figure 65 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 93 Be sure the correct Spectrograph to Calibrate is selected If another Spectrograph To Calibrate spectrograph is indicated click on the Acton SP150 on COMI xi down arrow at the right of the selection Grating To Calibrate box to display all of the installed 600 spectrographs and make the correct selection f only one spectrograph has Detector Pixel width 50 m
358. tings of Minimum Block Size 2 and Number of Blocks 5 while appearing to work will result in invalid data Instead you must change these settings to 1 and 256 respectively for the 2 D OMA array Kinetics and Cleaning Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then shifted under the mask very quickly The defined clean cycles are used to keep charge from accumulating on the array while it is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array In addition to clean cycles continuous cleans for kinetics is supported by Version 5 or higher of the ST 133 Controller For kinetics experiments continuous cleans are only applied between the first NOTSCAN low to high transition and the External Sync high to low transition Because of the speed at which the array is then shifted exposed and shifted no further cleaning occurs until the last frame has been exposed and shifted At that point the clean cycles begin again Chapter 11 ROI Definition amp Binning Overview General A Region of Interest ROI may be the entire CCD array or it may be a rectangular subregion of the array For data acquisition the definition of such a region is done either from the Easy Bin dialog Figure 131 page 148 accessed from the Acquisition menu or from the ROI Setup tab page Figure 132 page 149 accessible afte
359. tion about the various menus and dialogs refer to the online Help topics Underlying assumptions for the following procedure are that the hardware has been installed per the instructions in the hardware manual s and that the hardware setup as discussed in Chapter 2 has been completed A further assumption is that a good imaging subject is available Often a picture or optical target mounted on a wall or lab bench will give good results If initial data collection is to be done using a microscope be sure to read the chapter on microscopy in your system manual before attempting data collection There are two data collection modes Focus and Acquire e InFocus mode operation no frames of data are stored until Start Storage is selected This mode is particularly convenient for familiarization and setting up For ease in focusing the screen refresh rate should be as rapid as possible achieved by operating with axes and cross sections off and with Zoom 1 1 selected e In Acquire mode every frame of data collected is stored This mode would ordinarily be selected during actual data collection One limitation of Acquire mode operation is that if data acquisition continues at too fast a rate for it to be stored data overflow will eventually occur This could only happen in Fast Mode operation The following data collection procedures are done in the Focus mode If using a PI MAX or PI MAX2 intensified camera initial data collection will be done in
360. ts Points Entered 0 Points Needed 2 I i p z nm m Save Find Default Peaks Cancel Help Calibration Setup dialog as shown in Figure 61 Calibration Setup dialog after running Figure 61 Note that the Find Peaks routine causes a small red Find Peaks routine on Hg Argon spectrum arrow to be displayed above each peak found in the spectrum together with a notation indicating the peak location in pixels Figure 62 Note Each time the Find Peaks routine is initiated the displayed peak heights will decrease Clicking on the data window Autoscale button will restore their original displayed height 86 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K v4 HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1X 1 500 Figure 62 Spectrum after running Find Peaks routine 3 Select the calibration points For the example being considered the peaks at 182 90 301 00 485 27 and 931 20 would be good choices The decimal point locations are based on the calculated center of peak and not necessarily the largest intensity position 4 Select the Calibration Units if not nanometers and select the Display Units Both the Calibration Units and the Display Units are nm the default in the example 5 Manually enter the wavelength of the selected peaks Appendix B contains wavelength tables and a detailed spectrum for Hg Argon In our example the wavelengths for the selected peaks would be Peak Location Peak Location Pixels Wavelength in nm 18
361. ts Of Glued File nm 7 complete spectral data but e i Jun GiWed Tle laseri e fi nm this is not required by the Ea i f E EE of D calibrated single spectrum l d 4 gt files can be used to create a Sa f gi 4 glued file The only Ending Value o Remove Add Files Selected requirements are that AEEA fe Files Units Point e The files have been wavelength calibrated Cancel Help either manually or using Auto Spectro Figure 138 Post Process Glue dialog e The files have the same number of frames and strips it is not necessary that they have the same number of pixels 1 Take the series of data files you would like to glue and use the file manager to rename them as a series such as EXPO01 SPE EXP002 SPE etc You do not have to arrange these files in any particular order These data files will not be altered in any way by the following procedure 2 From the Process menu select Glue This will open the Post Process Glue dialog Figure 138 For more information see the online Help for this dialog 3 Use the browser to select the files The Add Files button opens a browser to facilitate file selection 161 162 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Enter the starting and ending wavelength values for the resulting file If your wavelength range includes values that are not covered by any of the files in your series the resulting spectrum will have some zero values Any area where valid data
362. tting Started Introduction describes the contents of this manual as well as other information sources including online Help and other documentation files Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 lists system requirements and describes how to install the WinSpec 32 software 17 18 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K Basic Hardware Setup provides detailed instructions on how to configure WinSpec 32 for operation with the hardware detector controller and spectrograph in your particular system Pulser configuration is discussed in Chapter 18 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection provides a procedure for initial spectroscopic data collection allowing users to gain some operating familiarity before going on to more complex measurements Initial Imaging Data Collection provides a procedure for initial imaging data collection allowing users to gain some operating familiarity before going on to more complex measurements Opening Closing and Saving Data Files describes how to open close and save data files in WinSpec 32 Wavelength Calibration describes how to calibrate the WinSpec 32 software for one position of the spectrograph grating Spectrograph Calibration discusses how to calibrate the WinSpec 32 software for any position of the spectrograph gratings Displaying the Data describes the data file display options Part 2 Advanced T
363. u additionally have the option of restricting the X and Y pixel range data written to the Output File An alternative way to specify a region is to use the mouse to define the region on the active data display of the input file and then click on Mouse Input Output Filename All three tab pages have a field for entering the filename In each case there is a button at the end of the box which when pressed opens a browser to make selecting and specifying filenames and locations as simple as possible In the case of the B tab page there is 155 156 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K additionally a field for entering a constant Radio buttons are provided that activate one or the other of the two fields Either a constant value or a filename can be entered but not both Data Type For the A and B tab pages the data type is reported only and cannot be changed In the case of the C output tab page you can specify the data type Data types include Byte 8 bits only the eight least significant data bits levels 0 to 255 will be saved Unint Unsigned integer 16 bits 0 to 65535 Int Signed integer 16 bits 32768 to 32767 Long Signed integer 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Float Floating point 32 bits 1 75494351e to 3 402823466 e Display Result This checkbox appears on the C page only If checked the output Operations image will be displayed as soon as the processing is complete On the Operati
364. u want to be warned if the laser will shine directly on the CCD you Main Gratings Slits Mirors Connect need to enter the Laser Wavelength 3 Active Spectrograph This is done via the Main tab page Acton SP300ionCOM2 SCY in the Define Spectrograph dialog as shown in Figure 29 The Warn IZ Use for Auto Spectro Calibration When Crossing Laser Line Do Hardware Initialize selection tells WinSpec 32 to display a message whenever the Excitation grating is moved to where the laser Laser Wavelength 514532 inm light would be visible to the Iv Warn When Crossing Laser Line detector This is critical for detectors that could be damaged if exposed to Install Z Remove Spectrograph high light levels Also it will be necessary to enter the laser wavelength if you plan to work with units of relative wavenumbers Cancel Help To allow WinSpec 32 to display Figure 29 Entering the Laser Line in units of relative Define Spectrograph Main tab page wavenumbers enter a Laser Wavelength in nanometers to as many significant digits as desired e Ifyou have a bright laser line check the Warn when Crossing Laser Line box and enter the Laser Wavelength in nm WinSpec 32 will display a warning message whenever the wavelength range viewable by the detector might fall on or pass through the laser line The Warn When Crossing Laser Line is no guarantee that the detector will not be damaged by overexposu
365. uisition for intensified cameras Focusing This procedure applies for a system that includes an ST 133 Controller and a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC connector on the controller If your system doesn t include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section which begins on page 75 1 Select Video from the Acquisition menu This will allow live data to be displayed on your video monitor Interactive Camera Operation x 2 Select Video Focus from the Acquisition Menu The Interactive Camera dialog Exposure Time Patter Figure 49 will open 1 000 Seconds Zoom Pen PATRIS 3 Click on the RUN button in the Interactive Hoal eee Camera dialog The camera will begin acquiring ve r R5170 Intensity Scaling c OTo 54 Counts ic pictures at the fastest possible rate will and the image will be displayed on the video monitor Note that the image will not be displayed on the r Offset Non Linear Units computer monitor while the Interactive Camera PSU dialog is open N 4 Focus the system optics and set the Interactive Camera dialog Exposure Time Lancel Hep RS170 Scaling and Offset adjustments for the best viewed image In addition to the Figure 49 ST 133 Exposure Dime Intensit Interactive Camera dialog posure y Scaling and Offset parameters the Pattern parameters determine which CCD pixels will be displayed on the video monitor Note that
366. un with ST 133 controller Included in a PI MTE system NTE CCD and NTE 2 Stands for new TE head More cube shaped than the TE designed for maximum cooling NTE 2 requires high power version of ST 133 RTE CCD Round thermoelectrically cooled camera can be run with ST 133 controllers TE CCD Water cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers TEA CCD Forced air cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers V ICCD Video intensified detector Always shipped with its own control box produces standard video out so no interface card or software required As of Version 2 5 this detector will not be supported by WinView XP TE air cooled camera with lifetime vacuum can be run with ST 133 controllers Six speed digitization is an option XTE TE air cooled detector with cooling down to 100 C can be run with ST 133 controllers Pulsers FG 100 Pulser with 5 nsec 3 usec gating Gen II intensifiers only FG 101 Obsolete version of an ICCD unit with internal high voltage power and gating PG 10 Pulser with 200 nsec to 6 msec gating Gen II intensifiers only PG200 Software programmable pulser with 5 nsec to 80 msec gating Highest performance pulser with the most features Gen II intensifiers only PTG Dedicated programmable delay generator board that generates TTL level pulses to control intensifier gating in PI MAX models It is an option that sits in the third slot of an ST 133 c
367. ure button Ss zs The spectrograph will move to the reference wavelength and collect a spectrum It will also Instructions perform a peak find operation and display the acquired data The reference peak should appear E Reference Wavelength then click Start Procedure button somewhere near the center of the display and the cursor should be on the peak at or near the Messages highest point Figure 70 illustrates a typical Adjust data acquisition The reference peak should appear near Bair Ho the center of the display and the cursor should be 7 near or on the highest point of the peak Figure 69 Adjust dialog As was the case for the Offset adjustment before going on you have to make a judgment regarding the location of the cursor on the peak Take particular care that the proper peak has been found If for example the peak finder places the cursor on the 576 peak manually move the cursor to the 579 peak For additional information refer to the earlier discussion of how the peak finder works in the Calibration Offset procedure s4 WinSpec 32 Untitled 1340 X 1 X 1 Figure 70 Calibration Adjust Spectrum Note the reported Error value in the Adjust dialog The value is reported in nm Transposed to pixels it should be less than one pixel The number of nm represented by one pixel will depend of course on the dispersion of the grating The nm pixel can be approximated by picking the difference in the
368. ve WinSpec 32 control the data display mode simply check the Auto Select checkbox provided in the File Open dialog and also in the Display Layout dialog The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data strips as described on page 101 Displaying circuit spe The image used in this exercise is circuit spe one of the images supplied with your WinSpec 32 software Once you become comfortable working with this image you should have little difficulty in working with images from actual measurement data Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 117 1 From the File menu select RS 21x Open The Open dialog Look in avs i mg t E EJ Figure 95 allows you to _YT SPE yA 256strip SPE select the image to be 1035strip SPE y 2sttip SPE opened The Look In field 1Omorestrip SPE AA 300i 5PE provides a browser function 10strip SPE 16strip SPE adjust SPE so you can easily find the 1 stip SPE ionis directory where the images By default the data 3 xj directory is a subdirectory Femme of the directory where WinSpec 32 was installed Files of type wink Data spe ee Subdirectory names and the Open Display As filenames of all files of the Aut E Display Layout specified type the Image Graph C 3D Graph WinSpec 32 data type is spe in the current Figure 95 Open dialog directory are listed in the box below the directory name The WinS
369. velengths at the edges are given by Wavelength edges Ao Ay x 4 A x 12 where the is for one edge and the for the other The intermediate and output file data points also have a finite wavelength coverage given by the Final Resolution item on the Step and Glue or Post Process Glue dialog For example with a Starting Value of 400 nm Ending Value of 700 nm and Final Resolution of 1 nm the Output File will have 301 data points each with a coverage of 1 nm The file itself will actually cover the range from 399 5 nm to 700 5 nm The data point at 500 nm will have a wavelength coverage from 499 5 nm to 500 5 nm The wavelength calibration of the Output File will be linear and the wavelength at point x given by Wavelength center of point x Starting Value Final Resolution x 1 For each point in the Intermediate File the conversion routine sums in values from all pixels whose wavelength range overlaps the wavelength range of the data point If the pixel lies entirely within the range of the data point then 100 of its value is added if a pixel partially lies in the data point s range then the percentage of its value that is added is equal to the percentage of the pixel s wavelength range lying in the data point range In the above example if an input file pixel had a value of 1234 and a wavelength range of 498 9 nm to 499 6 nm then the amount summed into the 500 nm point 499 5 500
370. vely use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog to enter those values Enter the name of the output file on the C tab page If you want to restrict the output data range change the Frame X Range and Y Range values as appropriate Select the output file data type If you want the output file to be displayed as soon as the processing is complete check the Display Result box Click on OK to begin processing or Cancel to cancel the operation 160 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra Introduction There are two ways to glue together multiple exposures into a single contiguous spectrum The first is to take existing spectra that have already been calibrated and have the WinSpec 32 software connect the spectra at the appropriate points The second method requires spectrometer control With correctly calibrated spectrometer control the WinSpec 32 software can collect spectra and move the spectrometer automating the process of collecting a spectrum whose wavelength range can extend the full spectral range of the detector Gluing Existing Spectra You can glue any series of EEEIEE x existing data files providing iind f 5 Hc that they all have been Glued Output Data File Name 1 aw Input Data File Names properly calibrated in nm E The files should overlap some in order to provide Uni
371. warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties guarantees agreements and similar obligations of manufacturer or seller with respect to the repair or replacement of any parts In no event shall Princeton Instruments liability exceed the cost of the repair or replacement of the defective product or part This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that may vary from state to state and from country to country Some states and countries do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts when an action may be brought or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above provisions may not apply to you When contacting us for technical support or service assistance please refer to the Princeton Instruments factory of purchase contact your authorized Princeton Instruments representative or reseller or visit our technical support page at WwWW princetoninstruments com Contact Information Roper Scientific s manufacturing facility for this product is located at the following address Princeton Instruments 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Customer Support E mail techsupport princetoninstruments com For immediate support in your area please call the following locations directly America 1 877 4 PIACTON 877 474 2286 Benelux 31 347 324989 France 33 1 60 86 03 65
372. was available will be used to create the glued data Enter the final resolution you would like the final data file to have This value is in units per data point in the output file so the lower the number the higher the resolution and the more data points the glued file will contain For a 2400 groove per mm grating and a 0 3 m spectrometer a good final resolution would be about 0 1 nm per pixel For a 1200 groove per mm grating this value would be 0 15 to 0 2 nm per pixel The total number of data points in the resulting file cannot exceed 65 535 Enter the Glued Output Data File Name in the field provided The glued data will be contained in a single file If you change your mind about including one or more files in the resulting file highlight those files in the Raw Input Data File Names listing and click on Remove Selected Files When you have finished selecting files click on SET to execute the glue operation Step and Glue If you have spectrometer control through the WinSpec software the easiest way to create a glued spectrum is to let the software control both the data collection and the movement of the spectrometer The software will take an exposure and while the shutter is closed will move the spectrometer to the next position Unlike a monochromator with a single point detector the wavelength calibration will not depend on the speed and timing of the stepper motor only on its final position In this case you must set the am
373. wavelength calibrated range of the detector New Area button The first step in defining an area is to press the New Area button necessary before the area parameters can be defined Note that clicking Chapter 9 On Line Data Acquisition Processes 131 on New Area does not cause an immediate change in the listing box Newly entered area information does not appear there until the Store Area button is pressed Ordinarily you would not do that until all of the parameters for the area have been specified Comment box A user defined comment as long as 32 characters can be keyed as part of the area definition process The comment will appear in the area listing box when Store Area is pressed Once the comment has been keyed simply click in the left Range From box or click on the keyboard Tab key to move the data entry cursor to the left Range From entry box so that the range can be specified Range From These two boxes are used to specify the X range of the area The left box is used to specify the start of the range and the right box is used to specify the end of the range The units are those specified in the spectrograph Calibration Usage dialog Making both the start and end values the same defines an area of one data point Note that the area range is always stored internally in wavelength units This assures that if the area is used for Y T analysis on ROIs spanning different pixel range the starting and ending wavelengths for the are
374. which allows binning to be accomplished in software after the data has been collected The Parameters tab page allows the bin size to be set independently in the X and Y directions The Skipping parameter allows you to define the interval between binned regions The Skipping parameter size can be independently set for X and Y There is also provision for Input Parameters Output Binning and Skipping X Binning x Dimension 1 Y Dimension fi zd r Skipping either averaging or summing the binned data xt Dimension 1 points If Average is selected each output data value will be the average of the binned data ame C values in each region If Average is unselected each output data value will be the sum of the binned data values The procedure follows Mou e Apply Close Help Figure 158 Post processing Binning and Skipping Parameters tab page Procedure 1 Select Binning and Skipping from the Process menu 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button to the right of the field 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window
375. will also be displayed if you turn the camera system OFF or a cable comes loose while the application software is running in Focus mode 264 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 K This page intentionally left blank Appendix Glossary A D converter Analog to digital converter In a CCD detector system the electronic circuitry that converts the analog information continuous amplitudes acquired by the detector into the digital data quantified discrete steps used for image display ADU Analog to digital unit A number representing a CCD s output The relationship between the ADUs generated and the number of electrons acquired on the CCD is defined by the system gain Intensities given in ADUs provide a convenient method for comparing images and data generated by different detectors Also referred to as count and digital number Anti blooming Blooming is caused by saturation of one or more CCD pixels This can occur if the incoming light is too bright or when extensive serial and parallel binning is being performed When this saturation happens the excess charge overflows into the adjacent pixels and results in a streak or a blob appearing on the image Anti blooming is traditionally controlled by specific CCD architecture designs that drain the excess charge Avalanche Gain Also called on chip multiplication gain A technology that enables multiplication of charge i e electrons collected in each pixel of the CCD s active array Se
376. will be placed before the highlighted one Click on the Add button The button will disappear from the list of Available buttons and will be added to the list of Toolbar buttons 5 Click on Close to close the dialog Removing a Button 1 Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by clicking on Customize Toolbar in the Setup menu Referring to Figure 197 note that buttons already on the toolbar are listed on the right Available but unused buttons are listed on the left To remove an available button from the Custom Toolbar first select it from the right hand list You may have to scroll through the listed buttons to find the one you want Click on the Remove button The button will disappear from the list of Toolbar buttons and will be added to the list of Available buttons Click on Close to close the dialog Individual Dialog Item Descriptions Available Buttons You can select the button you wish to add to the Custom Toolbar from this section Many buttons each with its own preassigned function as described below are available Toolbar Buttons These are the buttons that will actually appear on the Custom Toolbar Add Causes the selected button on the Available buttons list to be transferred to the Toolbar buttons list before the selected button Remove Causes the selected button on the Toolbar list to be transferred to the Available Buttons list Close This button closes the Custom Toolbar Assignment dialog a
377. x782 MicroMA X 1024B ST 133 EEV 1024x1024 CCD 47 10 MicroMA X 1300B ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B MicroMAX 1300Y ST 133 PID1030x1300 MicroMAX 1300YHS ST 133 5 MHz PID1030x1300 MicroMAX 1300YHS DIF ST 133 5 MHz PID1030x1300 OMA V InGaAs 256 ST 133 InGaAs 1x256 OMA V InGaAs 512 ST 133 InGaAs 1x512 OMA V InGaAs 1024 ST 133 InGaAs 1x1024 Does not support NVRAM function 225 226 Version 2 5 K WinSpec 32 Manual Controller Type Camera CCD Type PhotonMAX 512B e2v CCD97B PhotonMAX 1024B e2v CCD201B PI LCX 400 ST 133 EEV 400x1340F PLLCX 576 ST 133 EEV 576x384 3 ph PLLCX 1242 ST 133 EEV 1152x1242 3 ph PI LCX 1300 ST 133 EEV 1300x1340F PI MAX 512HQ ST 133 THM 512x512 PI MAX 512RB ST 133 THM 512x512 PI MAX 512SB ST 133 THM 512x512 PI MAX 512UV ST 133 THM 512x512 PI MAX 1024HQ ST 133 EEV 256x1024F CCD30 PI MAX 1024RB ST 133 EEV 256x1024F CCD30 PI MAX 1024SB ST 133 EEV 256x1024F CCD30 PI MAX 1024UV ST 133 EEV 256x1024F CCD30 PI MAX MG 1024 ST 133 EEV 256x1024F CCD30 PI MAX2 512 Gen II or Gen III ST 133 5 MHz THM 512x512 PI MAX2 1003 Gen II or Gen III ST 133 5 MHz KAI 1024x1024 PI MAX3 1024i Kodak KAI 1003 PI MAX3 1024x256 NA eA CCD 30 11 PI MTE 1300B ST 133 ST 133 2 MHz EEV 1300x1340B PI SCX 1242 ST 133 EEV 1152x1242 6 ph PI SCX 1300 ST 133 EEV 1300x1340F PI SCX 4300 ST 133 KAF 2084x2084 SCX PI SX 400 ST 133 EEV 400x1340B PI SX 512 ST 133 TEK 512x512DB PI SX 1024 ST 133 TEK 1024x1024
378. y SiZes d ee ee e ieee ines dace e e et eese pee eoo de 243 Custom Data Types Used In the Structure eene 243 Reading Datars 4 eet pO DII re I e eere eee menge aes 244 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration 245 Equations used in WinSpec Wavelength Calibration eere 245 WinSpec X Axis Auto Calibration eese eene nennen 247 Appendix E CD ROM Failure Work Arounds seeeeeeeeee 249 Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance 251 Install Uninstall WinSpec 32 Components at a Later Time sess 251 Installing More than One Version of WinSpec 32 sese 253 PIHWDEF INI amp SESSION DAT onnur runor en e A enne etse then tense a 254 Uninstalling and Reinstalling esee nennen nennen 254 Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenenn 255 Appendix H Troubleshooting nnnm nana na aria rick etur mas 257 WN trOGUCEION NR cM A ES 257 Cameral or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog sss 257 Controller Is Not Responding eese nennen nter 258 Data Loss or Seral Violates e eH ent ee eH EEE EEE Eei 258 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict message eere 258 Data Overrun Has Occurred message eene eene 259
379. y27 28 CCD Blemish removal eese 154 Circuit spe displayed sess 116 Cleam Cycles m eerte e e ie te 139 CLEANING signal n ehe eem te 42 Cleans Skips tab page seeee 46 Cleanse oen oT eee hens 46 Minimum Block Size sess 48 Number of Blocks sseee 48 Number of Cleans sese 46 Number of Strips per Clean 46 Use Continuous Cleans Instruction 47 Cleans Skips tab page parameters Clean Mode eese 46 Vertical SKIPS inoino enorde em eet 48 Clipping and Threshold procedure 180 Closing a data file te eere 81 Color axes labels graphs background and surfaces 122 Communication Error with Spectrograph 92 Complement math operation 158 Computer requirement eene 21 Contact information ssseseeeeenreeee 270 Continuous cleans eee 140 Continuous Cleans Instruction 47 142 Correction techniques eseeeeeee 151 Cosmic Ray removal sese 154 Cross Sections post processing sss 181 Cross sections procedure ssessss 181 Cursor C tye sies pet Er E EEEN 110 Cursor functions data displayed as graph or image
380. ypically be two species contributing to the output data one of which decays much faster than the other For example there might be a fast fluorophor with a decay time of at most a few nanoseconds and a slower one with a decay time of perhaps a hundred nanoseconds By sweeping both the delay and the width and making provision for entering time constant and amplitude information for two species the sequential exponential algorithm is ideally suited to making this type of measurement At the start of the decay where the amplitude is high but the decay is rapid the gate pulses are narrow and close together Towards the end of the decay where the decay is slow the gate pulses are further apart but much wider to accommodate the lower signal amplitude The result is output data that is relatively constant in intensity over the decay time This data can be easily normalized by dividing each point by the exposure time and then using a spline fit to recover the curve The logarithm base e can then be taken to obtain a straight line or two lines successive line segments each with a different slope for two species Tangents can be fitted to each segment to determine the rate constant for each species Fast Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay time of the faster of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered

WinSpec User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents